BHT-407-MM-11

CHAPTER 97 — AVIONICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

AVIONICS SYSTEMS

97-1 Instrument System — General Description.................................... 97-00-00 15

97-2 Avionics Systems (407 Helicopters S/N 53000 Through 54299) ... 97-00-00 16
97-3 Avionics Systems (407GX Helicopters S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)................................................................................... 97-00-00 18
97-4 Avionics — Operational Checks and Troubleshooting ............. 97-00-00 22
97-5 Avionics — General Troubleshooting ....................................... 97-00-00 22
97-6 Avionics System — Component Location................................. 97-00-00 22
97-7 Panel Mounted Components — Maintenance Practices .......... 97-00-00 23
97-8 Panel Mounted Components — Removal......................... 97-00-00 23
97-9 Panel Mounted Components — Cleaning......................... 97-00-00 23
97-10 Panel Mounted Components — Inspection ...................... 97-00-00 23
97-11 Panel Mounted Components — Installation...................... 97-00-00 24
97-12 Shelf or Rack Mounted Components — Removal ............ 97-00-00 24
97-13 Shelf or Rack Mounted Components — Cleaning ............ 97-00-00 24
97-14 Shelf or Rack Mounted Components — Inspection .......... 97-00-00 24
97-15 Shelf or Rack Mounted Components — Installation ......... 97-00-00 25
97-16 Antennas — Relocation or New Installation ............................. 97-00-00 25
97-17 Antennas — Removal ....................................................... 97-00-00 25
97-18 Antennas — Cleaning ....................................................... 97-00-00 28
97-19 Antennas — Inspection..................................................... 97-00-00 28
97-20 Antennas — Installation .................................................... 97-00-00 28
97-21 Avionics Systems — Power Requirements
(407 Helicopters S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................................ 97-00-00 28
97-22 Avionics Master Switch — Description
(407 Helicopters S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................................ 97-00-00 29

INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM (ICS) (KMA 24H-71)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-23 Intercommunication System (ICS) ................................................. 97-00-00 31

97-24 King Audio Communication Control Panels (KMA 24H-71)
— Description ........................................................................... 97-00-00 31
97-25 Copilot ICS Foot Switch — Description .................................... 97-00-00 36
97-26 Cyclic Control Sticks Trigger Switch — Description ................. 97-00-00 36
97-27 ICS Mode Selector Switch (Optional) — Description................ 97-00-00 36
97-28 Aft PA Speaker — Description.................................................. 97-00-00 37
97-29 Drop Cord Switches — Description .......................................... 97-00-00 37
97-30 Headsets — Description ........................................................... 97-00-00 37
97-31 ICS (KMA 24H-71) Communication Mode — Operation................ 97-00-00 37
97-32 ICS Communication With the Cyclic Trigger Switch
— Operation ............................................................................. 97-00-00 37
97-33 ICS Communication With the Copilot Foot Switch
— Operation ............................................................................. 97-00-00 37
97-34 ICS (KMA 24H-71) Transmission Mode — Operation ................... 97-00-00 37

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 1
BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-35 ICS Transmission With a Cyclic Control Stick Trigger Switch

- — Operation ............................................................................. 97-00-00 37
97-36 Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) — Replacement.................... 97-00-00 39
97-37 ICS (KMA 24H-71) Operational Checks ........................................ 97-00-00 39
97-38 Intercommunication System (ICS) — Component
Replacement............................................................................. 97-00-00 39
97-39 ICS (Installation Without the Aft ICS) — Operational Check .... 97-00-00 39
97-40 ICS Receiver and Transmitter — Operational Check ....... 97-00-00 40
97-41 ICS Mixing Switches — Operational Check...................... 97-00-00 41
97-42 ICS COMM 2 Switch — Operational Check...................... 97-00-00 41
97-43 ICS NAV 1 Switch — Operational Check.......................... 97-00-00 42
97-44 ICS ADF Switch — Operational Check............................. 97-00-00 42
97-45 ICS Audio Mute — Operational Check ............................. 97-00-00 42
97-46 ICS Emergency Function — Operational Check............... 97-00-00 43
97-47 ICS Priority — Operational Check .................................... 97-00-00 44
97-48 ICS (KMA 24H-71) (Installation With the Aft Three or Five
Station ICS) — Operational Check ........................................... 97-00-00 44
97-49 ICS Normal Mode — Operational Check .......................... 97-00-00 44
97-50 ICS Receiver and Transmitter (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 45
97-51 ICS (KMA 24H-71) Mixing Switches (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Checks.............................................................. 97-00-00 46
97-52 ICS COMM 1 Switch (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 46
97-53 ICS COMM 2 Switch (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 46
97-54 ICS NAV 1 Switch (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 46
97-55 ICS ADF Switch (NORMAL Mode) — Operational Check 97-00-00 47
97-56 ICS Audio Muting Check (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 47
97-57 ICS Emergency Function (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 47
97-58 ICS Priority (NORMAL Mode) — Operational Check........ 97-00-00 48
97-59 ICS Aft Cabin Audio (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 49
97-60 ICS (KMA 24H-71) ISOLATE Mode — Operational Checks .... 97-00-00 49
97-61 ICS Intercommunication (ISOLATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 49
97-62 ICS Transmit Position (ISOLATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 50
97-63 ICS (KMA 24H-71) Mixing Switches (ISOLATE Mode)
— Operational Checks.............................................................. 97-00-00 51
97-64 ICS COMM 1 Switch (ISOLATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 51
97-65 ICS COMM 2 Switch (ISOLATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 51

97-00-00
Page 2 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-66 ICS NAV 1 Switch (ISOLATE Mode)

— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 51
97-67 ICS ADF Switch (ISOLATE Mode) — Operational Check 97-00-00 51
97-68 ICS Audio Muting (With the ICS in ISOLATE Mode
and ADF) — Operational Check ....................................... 97-00-00 52
97-69 ICS Emergency Function (With the ICS in ISOLATE
Mode) — Operational Check ............................................ 97-00-00 52
97-70 ICS Aft Cabin Audio (With the ICS in ISOLATE Mode
and the PA) — Operational Check.................................... 97-00-00 53
97-71 ICS (KMA 24H-71) (PRIVATE Mode) — Operational Checks.. 97-00-00 53
97-72 ICS Intercommunication (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 53
97-73 ICS Transmit Position (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 54
97-74 ICS (KMA 24H-71) Mixing Switches (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Checks.............................................................. 97-00-00 55
97-75 ICS COMM 1 Switch (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 55
97-76 ICS COMM 2 Switch (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 55
97-77 ICS NAV 1 Switch (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 55
97-78 ICS ADF Switch (PRIVATE Mode) — Operational Check 97-00-00 56
97-79 ICS Audio Muting (PRIVATE Mode and ADF)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 56
97-80 ICS Emergency Function (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 57
97-81 ICS Aft Cabin Audio (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 58

VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155/165) / COMM (KY-196A) SYSTEM

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-82 VHF System................................................................................... 97-00-00 59

97-83 VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155/165) / VHF COMM (KY-196A)
System...................................................................................... 97-00-00 59
97-84 VHF NAV/COMM (K155/165) System — Operation......... 97-00-00 63
97-85 VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155) System — VOR/LOC Operation... 97-00-00 66
97-86 VOR Receiver (KX-155) — Operation .............................. 97-00-00 66
97-87 Localizer Receiver (KX-155) — Operation........................ 97-00-00 67
97-88 VHF NAV/COMM (KX-165) System — VOR/LOC/Glideslope
Operation .................................................................................. 97-00-00 67
97-89 VOR Receiver (KX-165) — Operation .............................. 97-00-00 67
97-90 Localizer Receiver (KX-165) — Operation........................ 97-00-00 67
97-91 Glideslope Receiver (KX-165) (Optional) — Operation .... 97-00-00 70
97-92 VHF NAV/COMM Transceiver (KX-155/165)
— Replacement ................................................................ 97-00-00 70

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 3
BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-93 VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155/165) System

— Component Replacement .................................................... 97-00-00 70
97-94 VHF NAV/COMM System (KX-155/165) — Operational Checks 97-00-00 70
97-95 VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155/165) System Transceiver
— Operational Check........................................................ 97-00-00 71
97-96 VOR — Operational Check (Without Test Equipment) ..... 97-00-00 72
97-97 VHF (KY-196A) Communication System — Description ............... 97-00-00 74
97-98 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System — Operation .......................... 97-00-00 74
97-99 VHF COMM (KY-196A) — Modes Of Operation ...................... 97-00-00 75
97-100 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Frequency Mode
— Operation...................................................................... 97-00-00 75
97-101 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Channel Mode
— Operation...................................................................... 97-00-00 75
97-102 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Program Mode
— Operation...................................................................... 97-00-00 76
97-103 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Program Secure
Mode (Avionics Shop Only) — Operation ......................... 97-00-00 76
97-104 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Direct Tune Mode
— Operation...................................................................... 97-00-00 77
97-105 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Display — Adjustment ... 97-00-00 77
97-106 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Transmit — Operation ... 97-00-00 77
97-107 VHF COMM Transceiver (KY-196A) — Replacement ...... 97-00-00 78
97-108 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System — Component Replacement . 97-00-00 78
97-109 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System — Operational Check .... 97-00-00 78
97-110 VHF Navigation Antennas — Description ...................................... 97-00-00 80
97-111 VHF Communication Antenna — Description................................ 97-00-00 80
97-112 Course Deviation Indicator (KI-208) (CDI) — Description ............. 97-00-00 80
97-113 Course Deviation Indicator (KI-208) — Functional Check ........ 97-00-00 80
97-114 Navigation Indicator (HSI) (KI 525A) — Description ...................... 97-00-00 81
97-115 Navigation Indicator (KI-525A) — Operational Check .............. 97-00-00 81

AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER (ADF)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-116 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) System ..................................... 97-00-00 83

97-117 ADF Receiver (KR-87) — Description ...................................... 97-00-00 83
97-118 ADF Antenna (KA-44B) — Description..................................... 97-00-00 83
97-119 ADF Indicator (KI-227) — Description ...................................... 97-00-00 83
97-120 ADF (KR-87) Receiver — Operation ........................................ 97-00-00 83
97-121 ADF (KR-87) Antenna Mode — Description ............................. 97-00-00 86
97-122 ADF Mode — Description ......................................................... 97-00-00 86
97-123 ADF (KR-87) Frequency Control — Description....................... 97-00-00 86
97-124 ADF (KR-87) Timers — Description ......................................... 97-00-00 86
97-125 ADF (KR-87) — Replacement .......................................... 97-00-00 87
97-126 ADF (KR-87) System — Component Replacement.................. 97-00-00 87
97-127 ADF System — Operational Checks ........................................ 97-00-00 87
97-128 ADF (KR-87) — Operational Check.................................. 97-00-00 87
97-129 ADF Timer — Operational Check ..................................... 97-00-00 88

97-00-00
Page 4 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

TRANSPONDER SYSTEM (KT-70/KT-76A)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-130 Transponder System (KT-70) ........................................................ 97-00-00 91

97-131 Transponder System (KT-70) Mode S — Description .............. 97-00-00 91
97-132 Transponder System (KT-70) — Operation.............................. 97-00-00 94
97-133 Transponder (KT-70) Mode Selector Knob — Operation . 97-00-00 94
97-134 Transponder (KT-70) Ident (IDT) Button — Operation ..... 97-00-00 94
97-135 Transponder (KT-70) Code Selector Knobs — Operation 97-00-00 94
97-136 Transponder (KT-70) VFR Button (PUSH VFR)
— Operation...................................................................... 97-00-00 94
97-137 Transponder (KT-70) Reply Indication — Operation ........ 97-00-00 95
97-138 Transponder (KT-70) Altitude Display — Operation ......... 97-00-00 95
97-139 Transponder (KT-70) Display — Adjustment .................... 97-00-00 95
97-140 Transponder (KT-70) Aircraft Address and Maximum
Airspeed — Program ........................................................ 97-00-00 95
97-141 Transponder (KT-70) — Replacement.............................. 97-00-00 96
97-142 Transponder (KT-70) System — Component Replacement..... 97-00-00 97
97-143 Transponder (KT-70) — Self-test ............................................. 97-00-00 97
97-144 Transponder System (KT-76A) — Description .............................. 97-00-00 97
97-145 Transponder (KT-76A) — Operation ........................................ 97-00-00 98
97-146 Transponder (KT-76A) Mode Selector Knob
— Description ................................................................... 97-00-00 98
97-147 Transponder (KT-76A) Code Selector Knobs
— Description ................................................................... 97-00-00 98
97-148 Transponder (KT-76A) Identification Button (IDENT)
— Description ................................................................... 97-00-00 98
97-149 Transponder (KT-76A) Reply Lamp — Description .......... 97-00-00 98
97-150 Transponder (KT-76A) — Replacement ........................... 97-00-00 98
97-151 Transponder (KT-76A) System — Component Replacement .. 97-00-00 99
97-152 Transponder (KT-76A) — Self-test ........................................... 97-00-00 99

SLAVED COMPASS SYSTEM (KCS-55A)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-153 Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) ............................................ 97-00-00 101

97-154 Slaved Compass Navigation Indicator (HSI) (KI-525A)
— Description ........................................................................... 97-00-00 101
97-155 Slaved Compass Directional Gyro (KG-102A) — Description .. 97-00-00 101
97-156 Slaved Compass Flux Valve (KMT-112) — Description ........... 97-00-00 101
97-157 Slaved Compass Slave Control (KA-51B) — Description......... 97-00-00 101
97-158 Slaved Compass Start-up Mode — Operation ......................... 97-00-00 101
97-159 Slaved Compass Slave Mode — Operation ............................. 97-00-00 104
97-160 Slaved Compass Free Mode — Operation............................... 97-00-00 104
97-161 Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A)
— Component Replacement .................................................... 97-00-00 104
97-162 Slaved Compass — Operational Check ................................... 97-00-00 104

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 5
BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-163 Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) — Calibration ................ 97-00-00 105

97-164 Slaved Compass System (KA-51B) — Final Swing.................. 97-00-00 106

GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) (KLN-89B)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-165 Global Positioning System (GPS) (KLN-89B) ................................ 97-00-00 109

97-166 GPS (KLN-89B) Database — Description ................................ 97-00-00 109
97-167 GPS (KLN-89B) Configuration — Description .......................... 97-00-00 112
97-168 GPS (KLN-89B) Receiving System Components
— Description ........................................................................... 97-00-00 112
97-169 GPS Antenna — Description ............................................ 97-00-00 112
97-170 GPS Switching and Annunciation — Description.............. 97-00-00 112
97-171 GPS (KLN-89B) — Operation ........................................................ 97-00-00 112
97-172 GPS (KLN-89B) — Replacement ............................................. 97-00-00 112
97-173 GPS (KLN-89B) System — Component Replacement............. 97-00-00 113
97-174 GPS (KLN-89B) — Operational Check..................................... 97-00-00 113

EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) (POINTER 4000-10)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-175 Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) (Pointer 4000-10).............. 97-00-00 115

97-176 ELT (Pointer 4000-10) — Operation......................................... 97-00-00 115
97-177 Remote ELT (Pointer 4000-10) Switch/Monitor
— Description ........................................................................... 97-00-00 115
97-178 ELT (Pointer 4000-10) Monitor Light — Replacement.............. 97-00-00 115
97-179 ELT (Pointer 4000-10) Maintenance Procedures
— Battery Replacement............................................................ 97-00-00 115
97-180 ELT (Pointer 4000-10) System — Component Replacement... 97-00-00 117
97-181 ELT (Pointer 4000-10) — Operational Check........................... 97-00-00 117

COMMUNICATION NAVIGATION AND SURVEILLANCE (CNS) SYSTEM (GIA 63H)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-182 VHF Communication System......................................................... 97-00-00 121

97-183 Integrated Avionics Units (GIA 63H)......................................... 97-00-00 121
97-184 Display Units (GDU 1040H)...................................................... 97-00-00 121
97-185 COM1 Antenna ......................................................................... 97-00-00 123
97-186 COM/GPS/WAAS 2 Antenna.................................................... 97-00-00 123
97-187 COM1 and COM2 Indicators on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD)/Multi-Function Display (MFD)......................................... 97-00-00 123
97-188 VHF Communication System — Operation ................................... 97-00-00 125
97-189 VHF Communication System — Component Replacement ..... 97-00-00 125
97-190 Integrated Avionics Units (GIA 63H) No. 1 and No. 2
— Removal, Cleaning, Inspection, and Installation .................. 97-00-00 126
97-191 Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display
(MFD) Display Units (GDU 1040H) — Removal, Cleaning,
Inspection, and Installation ....................................................... 97-00-00 126

97-00-00
Page 6 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-192 COM/GPS/WAAS Antenna — Removal, Cleaning,

Inspection, and Installation ....................................................... 97-00-00 126
97-193 COM1 Antenna (CI-122) — Removal ....................................... 97-00-00 126
97-194 COM1 Antenna (CI-122) — Cleaning ....................................... 97-00-00 126
97-195 COM1 Antenna (CI-122) — Inspection..................................... 97-00-00 128
97-196 COM1 Antenna (CI-122) — Installation .................................... 97-00-00 128
97-197 VHF Communication System — Operational Check ................ 97-00-00 128
97-198 Navigation System ......................................................................... 97-00-00 130
97-199 Integrated Avionics Units .......................................................... 97-00-00 131
97-200 Display Units............................................................................. 97-00-00 131
97-201 Navigation Antennas................................................................. 97-00-00 133
97-202 Antenna Coupler....................................................................... 97-00-00 133
97-203 NAV1 and NAV2 Indicators on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD)/Multi-Function Display (MFD)......................................... 97-00-00 133
97-204 Navigation System — Operation.................................................... 97-00-00 133
97-205 Navigation System — Component Replacement ..................... 97-00-00 135
97-206 Integrated Avionics Units — Removal, Cleaning, Inspection,
and Installation.......................................................................... 97-00-00 135
97-207 Display Units — Removal, Cleaning, Inspection, and
Installation................................................................................. 97-00-00 135
97-208 Navigation Antenna (DMN48-1) — Removal............................ 97-00-00 135
97-209 Navigation Antenna (DMN48-1) — Cleaning............................ 97-00-00 136
97-210 Navigation Antenna (DMN48-1) — Inspection.......................... 97-00-00 136
97-211 Navigation Antenna (DMN48-1) — Installation......................... 97-00-00 138
97-212 Antenna Coupler (DMH69-1) — Removal ................................ 97-00-00 138
97-213 Antenna Coupler (DMH69-1) — Cleaning ................................ 97-00-00 140
97-214 Antenna Coupler (DMH69-1) — Inspection .............................. 97-00-00 140
97-215 Antenna Coupler (DMH69-1) — Installation ............................. 97-00-00 140
97-216 Navigation System — Operational Check ................................ 97-00-00 141
97-217 Global Positioning System (GPS) .................................................. 97-00-00 142
97-218 Integrated Avionics Units .......................................................... 97-00-00 143
97-219 Display Units............................................................................. 97-00-00 143
97-220 GPS/WAAS Antenna No. 1....................................................... 97-00-00 145
97-221 COM/GPS/WAAS Antenna No. 2 ............................................. 97-00-00 145
97-222 GPS Status Page on the Multi-Function Display (MFD) ........... 97-00-00 145
97-223 Global Positioning System (GPS) — Operation............................. 97-00-00 145
97-224 Navigation System — Component Replacement ..................... 97-00-00 147
97-225 Integrated Avionics Units — Removal, Cleaning, Inspection,
and Installation.......................................................................... 97-00-00 147
97-226 Display Units — Removal, Cleaning, Inspection, and
Installation................................................................................. 97-00-00 147
97-227 GPS/WAAS Antenna (GA 36) — Removal............................... 97-00-00 147
97-228 GPS/WAAS Antenna (GA 36) — Cleaning............................... 97-00-00 148
97-229 GPS/WAAS Antenna (GA 36) — Inspection............................. 97-00-00 148
97-230 GPS/WAAS Antenna (GA 36) — installation ............................ 97-00-00 150
97-231 COM/GPS/WAAS Antenna (CI-2580-200) — Removal............ 97-00-00 150
97-232 COM/GPS/WAAS Antenna (CI-2580-200) — Cleaning............ 97-00-00 152
97-233 COM/GPS/WAAS Antenna (CI-2580-200) — Inspection ......... 97-00-00 152

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 7
BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-234 COM/GPS/WAAS Antenna (CI-2580-200) — Installation......... 97-00-00 152

97-235 Global Positioning System (GPS) — Operational Check ......... 97-00-00 153

INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM (ICS) (GMA 350H)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-236 Intercommunication System (ICS) ................................................. 97-00-00 155

97-237 Aft Intercommunication System (ICS) — Description ............... 97-00-00 155
97-238 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Description.................................. 97-00-00 155
97-239 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Operation.................................... 97-00-00 159
97-240 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Removal ..................................... 97-00-00 160
97-241 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Cleaning ..................................... 97-00-00 163
97-242 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Inspection ................................... 97-00-00 163
97-243 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Installation .................................. 97-00-00 163
97-244 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Operational Check...................... 97-00-00 164
97-245 Integrated Avionics Units No. 1 and No. 2 COM Transceivers
— Operational Check ............................................................... 97-00-00 164
97-246 Integrated Avionics Units No. 1 and No. 2 NAV Receivers
and Alerts — Operational Check .............................................. 97-00-00 165
97-247 Intercommunication System — Operational Check .................. 97-00-00 165
97-248 Satellite Telephone and Music — Operational Check .............. 97-00-00 166

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM (AHRS)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-249 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) ......................... 97-00-00 169
97-250 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) Unit
(GRS 77H) ................................................................................ 97-00-00 169
97-251 Magnetometer (GMU 44).......................................................... 97-00-00 169
97-252 Configuration Module (AHRS) .................................................. 97-00-00 171
97-253 Attitude and Heading Indicator on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD) ........................................................................................ 97-00-00 171
97-254 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) — Operation .... 97-00-00 171
97-255 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
— Component Replacement .................................................... 97-00-00 174
97-256 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) Unit
(GRS 77H) — Removal ............................................................ 97-00-00 174
97-257 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) Unit
(GRS 77H) — Cleaning ............................................................ 97-00-00 174
97-258 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) Unit
(GRS 77H) — Inspection .......................................................... 97-00-00 176
97-259 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) Unit
(GRS 77H) — Installation ......................................................... 97-00-00 176
97-260 Magnetometer (GMU 44) — Removal ...................................... 97-00-00 177
97-261 Magnetometer (GMU 44) — Cleaning ...................................... 97-00-00 177
97-262 Magnetometer (GMU 44) — Inspection.................................... 97-00-00 177
97-263 Magnetometer (GMU 44) — Installation ................................... 97-00-00 179
97-264 Configuration Module (AHRS (GRS 77H)) — Removal............ 97-00-00 179

97-00-00
Page 8 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-265 Configuration Module (AHRS (GRS 77H)) — Cleaning............ 97-00-00 180

97-266 Configuration Module (AHRS (GRS 77H)) — Inspection ......... 97-00-00 180
97-267 Configuration Module (AHRS (GRS 77H)) — Installation......... 97-00-00 180
97-268 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
— Operational Check ............................................................... 97-00-00 182

TRANSPONDER MODE S WITH EXTENDED SQUITTER (GTX 33H ES)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-269 Transponder System...................................................................... 97-00-00 185

97-270 Transponder (GTX 33H ES) ..................................................... 97-00-00 185
97-271 Transponder Antenna (KA 61).................................................. 97-00-00 188
97-272 Transponder Indicator and Controls on the PFD ...................... 97-00-00 188
97-273 Transponder System — Mode Selection Softkeys ........... 97-00-00 190
97-274 Transponder System — Function Softkeys ...................... 97-00-00 190
97-275 Transponder System — Code Selection Buttons ............. 97-00-00 193
97-276 Transponder System — Operation ........................................... 97-00-00 193
97-277 Transponder System — Component Replacement .................. 97-00-00 194
97-278 Transponder (GTX 33H ES) — Removal ................................. 97-00-00 194
97-279 Transponder (GTX 33H ES) — Cleaning ................................. 97-00-00 194
97-280 Transponder (GTX 33H ES) — Inspection ............................... 97-00-00 196
97-281 Transponder (GTX 33H ES) — Installation .............................. 97-00-00 196
97-282 Transponder Antenna (KA-61) — Removal.............................. 97-00-00 197
97-283 Transponder Antenna (KA-61) — Cleaning.............................. 97-00-00 200
97-284 Transponder Antenna (KA-61) — Inspection............................ 97-00-00 200
97-285 Transponder Antenna (KA-61) — Installation........................... 97-00-00 200
97-286 Transponder System — Operational Check ............................. 97-00-00 201

TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM (TAS) (GTS 800) (OPTIONAL KIT)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-287 Traffic Advisory System ................................................................. 97-00-00 209

97-288 Traffic Advisory System Processor (GTS 800) ......................... 97-00-00 209
97-289 Traffic Advisory System Antennas............................................ 97-00-00 209
97-290 Traffic Advisory System Indication on Display Units................. 97-00-00 211
97-291 Traffic Advisory System — Operation....................................... 97-00-00 211
97-292 Traffic Advisory Avoidance System — Component
Replacement............................................................................. 97-00-00 216
97-293 Traffic Advisory System Processor (GTS 800) — Removal ..... 97-00-00 216
97-294 Traffic Advisory System Processor (GTS 800) — Cleaning ..... 97-00-00 218
97-295 Traffic Advisory System Processor (GTS 800) — Inspection ... 97-00-00 218
97-296 Traffic Advisory System Processor (GTS 800) — Installation .. 97-00-00 218
97-297 Directional Antenna (GA 58) — Removal ................................. 97-00-00 219
97-298 Directional Antenna (GA 58) — Cleaning ................................. 97-00-00 221
97-299 Directional Antenna (GA 58) — Inspection............................... 97-00-00 221
97-300 Directional Antenna (GA 58) — Installation .............................. 97-00-00 221
97-301 Lower Monopole Antenna (KA-61) — Removal........................ 97-00-00 222
97-302 Lower Monopole Antenna (KA-61) — Cleaning........................ 97-00-00 223

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 9
BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-303 Lower Monopole Antenna (KA-61) — Inspection ..................... 97-00-00 223

97-304 Lower Monopole Antenna (KA-61) — Installation..................... 97-00-00 223
97-305 Traffic Advisory System — Operational Check......................... 97-00-00 225

RADAR ALTIMETER (RA-4500) SYSTEM (OPTIONAL KIT)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-306 Radar Altimeter System ................................................................. 97-00-00 231

97-307 Radar Altimeter Transceiver (RA-4500) ................................... 97-00-00 231
97-308 Radar Altimeter Antennas......................................................... 97-00-00 231
97-309 Radar Altimeter Display on Primary Flight Display (PFD) ........ 97-00-00 231
97-310 Radar Altimeter System — Operation ...................................... 97-00-00 233
97-311 Radar Altimeter System — Component Replacement ............. 97-00-00 233
97-312 Radar Altimeter Transceiver (RA-4500) — Removal................ 97-00-00 233
97-313 Radar Altimeter Transceiver (RA-4500) — Cleaning................ 97-00-00 233
97-314 Radar Altimeter Transceiver (RA-4500) — Inspection ............. 97-00-00 236
97-315 Radar Altimeter Transceiver (RA-4500) — Installation............. 97-00-00 236
97-316 Radar Altimeter Antenna — Removal....................................... 97-00-00 237
97-317 Radar Altimeter Antenna — Cleaning....................................... 97-00-00 237
97-318 Radar Altimeter Antenna — Inspection .................................... 97-00-00 239
97-319 Radar Altimeter Antenna — Installation.................................... 97-00-00 239
97-320 Radar Altimeter System — Radar Altitude Zero Calibration..... 97-00-00 240
97-321 Radar Altimeter System — Operational Check ........................ 97-00-00 241

XM WEATHER AND RADIO SATELLITE DATALINK RECEIVER (GDL 69AH)

(OPTIONAL KIT) (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-322 XM Weather and Radio Satellite System....................................... 97-00-00 243

97-323 XM Weather and Radio Satellite System — Operation ............ 97-00-00 243
97-324 XM Receiver (GDL 69AH) — Removal..................................... 97-00-00 243
97-325 XM Receiver (GDL 69AH) — Cleaning..................................... 97-00-00 245
97-326 XM Receiver (GDL 69AH) — Inspection .................................. 97-00-00 245
97-327 XM Receiver (GDL 69AH) — Installation.................................. 97-00-00 245
97-328 GPS/WAAS/XM Antenna (GA 37) — Removal ........................ 97-00-00 248
97-329 GPS/WAAS/XM Antenna (GA 37) — Cleaning ........................ 97-00-00 248
97-330 GPS/WAAS/XM Antenna (GA 37) — Inspection ...................... 97-00-00 250
97-331 GPS/WAAS/XM Antenna (GA 37) — Installation ..................... 97-00-00 250
97-332 XM Weather/Audio — Operational Check ................................ 97-00-00 251

WI-FI DATALINK AND STORAGE UNIT (GDL 59H) / IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER (GSR 56H)
(OPTIONAL KIT) (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-333 Wi-Fi Datalink and Iridium System................................................. 97-00-00 255

97-334 Wi-Fi Datalink and Iridium System — Operation ...................... 97-00-00 257
97-335 Datalink Receiver (GDL 59H) — Removal ............................... 97-00-00 257
97-336 Datalink Receiver (GDL 59H) — Cleaning ............................... 97-00-00 259
97-337 Datalink Receiver (GDL 59H) — Inspection ............................. 97-00-00 259
97-338 Datalink Receiver (GDL 59H) — Installation ............................ 97-00-00 259

97-00-00
Page 10 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number

97-339 Wi-Fi Antenna — Removal ....................................................... 97-00-00 260

97-340 Wi-Fi Antenna — Cleaning ....................................................... 97-00-00 261
97-341 Wi-Fi Antenna — Inspection ..................................................... 97-00-00 261
97-342 Wi-Fi Antenna — Installation .................................................... 97-00-00 261
97-343 Iridium Transceiver (GSR 56) — Removal ............................... 97-00-00 263
97-344 Iridium Transceiver (GSR 56) — Cleaning ............................... 97-00-00 264
97-345 Iridium Transceiver (GSR 56) — Inspection ............................. 97-00-00 264
97-346 Iridium Transceiver (GSR 56) — Installation ............................ 97-00-00 264
97-347 Iridium Antenna — Removal..................................................... 97-00-00 266
97-348 Iridium Antenna — Cleaning..................................................... 97-00-00 268
97-349 Iridium Antenna — Inspection................................................... 97-00-00 268
97-350 Iridium Antenna — Installation.................................................. 97-00-00 268
97-351 Wi-Fi/Iridium Datalinks — Operational Checks......................... 97-00-00 269
97-352 Wi-Fi Datalink — Operational Check ................................ 97-00-00 269
97-353 Iridium Datalink — Operational Check .............................. 97-00-00 270

EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) (C406-N HM) (OPTIONAL KIT)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-354 Emergency Locator Transmitter System........................................ 97-00-00 273

97-355 ELT ARM/XMIT Switch/Light .................................................... 97-00-00 273
97-356 Emergency Locator Transmitter (C406-N HM) ......................... 97-00-00 273
97-357 ELT Antenna............................................................................. 97-00-00 275
97-358 ELT Programming Adapter ....................................................... 97-00-00 275
97-359 ELT Buzzer ............................................................................... 97-00-00 275
97-360 ELT — Operation...................................................................... 97-00-00 275
97-361 ELT Battery Replacement......................................................... 97-00-00 277
97-362 ELT System — Component Replacement................................ 97-00-00 277
97-363 ELT (C406-N HM) — Removal ................................................. 97-00-00 277
97-364 ELT (C406-N HM) — Cleaning ................................................. 97-00-00 279
97-365 ELT (C406-N HM) — Inspection............................................... 97-00-00 279
97-366 ELT (C406-N HM) — Installation .............................................. 97-00-00 279
97-367 ELT Antenna — Removal ......................................................... 97-00-00 280
97-368 ELT Antenna — Cleaning ......................................................... 97-00-00 280
97-369 ELT Antenna — Inspection....................................................... 97-00-00 283
97-370 ELT Antenna — Installation ...................................................... 97-00-00 283
97-371 ELT ARM/XMIT Switch/Light — Removal ................................ 97-00-00 284
97-372 ELT ARM/XMIT Switch/Light — Cleaning ................................ 97-00-00 284
97-373 ELT ARM/XMIT Switch/Light — Inspection .............................. 97-00-00 286
97-374 ELT ARM/XMIT Switch/Light — Installation ............................. 97-00-00 286
97-375 ELT System — Operational Check........................................... 97-00-00 286

AVIONICS SYSTEMS WIRING DIAGRAMS

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-376 Avionics Systems Wiring Diagrams ............................................... 97-00-00 289

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 11
BHT-407-MM-11

FIGURES

Figure Page
Number Title Number

97-1 Avionics Equipment Location (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................................ 17

97-2 407GX Integrated Avionics System (G1000H) — Instrument Panel Layout
(S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............................................................................. 20
97-3 407GX Integrated Avionics System (G1000H) — Architecture
(S/N 54300 and Subsequent) ............................................................................. 21
97-4 Antennas — Approved Locations (S/N 53000 Through 54299).......................... 26
97-5 407GX Antennas — Approved Locations (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)............ 27
97-6 Avionics Master Switch Circuit — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 30
97-7 Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ........... 32
97-8 Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) and VHF No. 1 Schematic (No Aft ICS Stations)
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 33
97-9 Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) and VHF No. 1 Schematic (With Five Aft ICS
Stations) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ................................................................ 34
97-10 Drop Cord Switches — Description .................................................................... 38
97-11 VHF NAV/COMM Transceiver (KX-155/165) — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 60
97-12 VHF COMM Transceiver (KY-196A) — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 61
97-13 VOR Field Pattern............................................................................................... 62
97-14 ILS Field Patterns ............................................................................................... 64
97-15 Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) (KI-208) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............ 68
97-16 Navigation Indicator (HSI) (KI-525A) (S/N 53000 Through 54299)..................... 69
97-17 ADF System Components — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............. 84
97-18 ADF (KR-87) — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299).................................. 85
97-19 Typical Air Traffic Control Station ....................................................................... 92
97-20 Transponders (KT-70 and KT-76A) — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 93
97-21 Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) Components — Description
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 102
97-22 Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) — Simplified Schematic
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) ............................................................................... 103
97-23 Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) Adjustments — Description ..................... 107
97-24 GPS (KLN-89B) — Description........................................................................... 110
97-25 GPS (KLN-89B) Components — Description ..................................................... 111
97-26 ELT (Pointer 4000-10) System Components — Location................................... 116
97-27 ELT (Pointer 4000-10) System — Trouble No. 1 ................................................ 118
97-28 ELT (Pointer 4000-10) System — Trouble No. 2 ................................................ 119
97-29 VHF Communication System — Simplified Schematic....................................... 122
97-30 VHF Communication System — Indications and Controls.................................. 124
97-31 COM1 Antenna (CI-122)— Removal and Installation ......................................... 127
97-32 Navigation System — Simplified Schematic ....................................................... 132
97-33 Navigation System — Indications and Controls.................................................. 134
97-34 Navigation Antennas (DMN48-1) — Removal and Installation ........................... 137
97-35 Antenna Coupler (DMH69-1) — Removal and Installation ................................. 139
97-36 Global Positioning System (GPS) — Simplified Schematic ................................ 144
97-37 Global Positioning System (GPS) — Indications and Controls........................... 146
97-38 GPS/WAAS Antenna (GA 36) — Removal and Installation................................ 149
97-39 COM/GPS/WAAS Antenna (CI 2580-200) — Removal and Installation............. 151

97-00-00
Page 12 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

FIGURES (CONT)

Figure Page
Number Title Number

97-40 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) Controls ..................................................................... 156

97-41 Intercommunication System (ICS) — Simplified Schematic ............................... 157
97-42 Aft ICS — Simplified Schematic.......................................................................... 161
97-43 Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Removal and Installation ...................................... 162
97-44 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) — Simplified Schematic ....... 170
97-45 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) — Indications........................ 172
97-46 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) Unit (3420A1)
— Removal and Installation ................................................................................ 175
97-47 Magnetometer — Removal and Installation........................................................ 178
97-48 Configuration Module (AHRS (GRS 77H)) — Removal and Installation............. 181
97-49 Transponder System — Simplified Schematic.................................................... 186
97-50 Typical Air Traffic Control Station ....................................................................... 187
97-51 Transponder System — Indications and Softkeys .............................................. 189
97-52 Transponder System — Mode Select and Code Softkeys.................................. 191
97-53 Transponder System — Octal Digit Softkeys...................................................... 192
97-54 Transponder (GTX 33H ES) — Removal and Installation .................................. 195
97-55 Transponder Configuration Page........................................................................ 198
97-56 Transponder Antenna (KA-61) — Removal and Installation............................... 199
97-57 ATC-601 Transponder Antenna Placement........................................................ 203
97-58 ATC-601 Transponder Test Set Position Limits.................................................. 204
97-59 Sample Mode S UF20 Test Screen .................................................................... 206
97-60 Traffic Advisory System — Simplified Schematic ............................................... 210
97-61 Traffic Advisory System — PFD Indications ....................................................... 212
97-62 Traffic Advisory System — MFD Indications....................................................... 213
97-63 Traffic Advisory System — Symbols................................................................... 214
97-64 Traffic Advisory System Processor (GTS 800) — Removal and Installation ...... 217
97-65 Directional Antenna (GA 58) — Removal and Installation .................................. 220
97-66 Monopole Antenna (KA-61) — Removal and Installation ................................... 224
97-67 Radar Altimeter (RA-4500) — Simplified Schematic .......................................... 232
97-68 Radar Altimeter — Indications and Fail Flag ...................................................... 234
97-69 Radar Altimeter Transceiver (RA-4500) — Removal and Installation................. 235
97-70 RAD ALT Antennas (S67-2002) — Removal and Installation............................. 238
97-71 XM Weather and Radio Satellite System — Simplified Schematic..................... 244
97-72 XM Weather/Audio Receiver — Removal and Installation.................................. 246
97-73 GPS/WAAS/XM Antenna (GA 37) — Removal and Installation ......................... 249
97-74 Datalink and Iridium — Simplified Schematic ..................................................... 256
97-75 Datalink Receiver (GDL 59H) — Removal and Installation ................................ 258
97-76 Wi-Fi Antenna — Removal and Installation ........................................................ 262
97-77 Iridium Transceiver (GSR 56) — Removal and Installation ................................ 265
97-78 Iridium Antenna — Removal and Installation...................................................... 267
97-79 Emergency Locator Transmitter — Simplified Schematic................................... 274
97-80 ELT — Optional Programming Adapter .............................................................. 276
97-81 ELT (C406-N HM) — Removal and Installation .................................................. 278
97-82 ELT Antenna — Removal and Installation .......................................................... 281
97-83 ELT ARM/XMIT Switch/Light — Removal and Installation ................................. 285
97-84 VHF No. 1 and Audio Panel (No Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through
54299) — Wiring Diagram .................................................................................. 290
97-85 VHF No. 1 and Audio Panel (Three Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through
54299) — Wiring Diagram .................................................................................. 291

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 13
BHT-407-MM-11

FIGURES (CONT)

Figure Page
Number Title Number

97-86 VHF No. 1 and Audio Panel (Five Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through
54299) — Wiring Diagram .................................................................................. 292
97-87 Headset (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram .................................. 294
97-88 Omni with CDI (KI-208) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram........... 295
97-89 VHF COMM No. 2 (KY-196A) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram. 296
97-90 ADF System (KR-87) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram .............. 297
97-91 GPS System (KLN-89B) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram ......... 298
97-92 GPS/NAV Switching System (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram .. 299
97-93 GPS (KLN-89B) Dataloader/PC Interface (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
— Wiring Diagram............................................................................................... 300
97-94 Encoding Altimeter (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram.................. 301
97-95 Transponder System (KT-70) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram . 302
97-96 Transponder System (KT-76A) (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
— Wiring Diagram............................................................................................... 303
97-97 Compass System (KCS-55A) with Navigation System (HSI) (KI-525A)
(S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram................................................. 304
97-98 ELT System (Pointer 4000-10) (S/N 53000 Through 54299)
— Wiring Diagram............................................................................................... 305

TABLES

Table Page
Number Title Number

97-1 Avionics — Optional Equipment Kits (407 Helicopters S/N 53000 Through
54299)................................................................................................................. 18
97-2 Standard Avionics System Configurations (407GX Helicopters S/N 54300
and Subsequent)................................................................................................. 19
97-3 Avionics — Optional Equipment Kits (407GX Helicopters S/N 54300 and
Subsequent)........................................................................................................ 19
97-4 Avionics Systems Power Requirements (407 Helicopters S/N 53000
Through 54299) .................................................................................................. 29
97-5 MIC Selector Switch Functions (KMA 24H-71) ................................................... 36
97-6 Audio Panel Switch Connections (KMA 24H-71) ................................................ 39
97-7 Localizer/Glideslope Frequency Pairs (MHz) (KX 155/165) ............................... 65
97-8 VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Display Adjustment Ranges ............................ 77
97-9 Transponder System (KT-70) Display Adjustment Table.................................... 95
97-10 Transponder System (KT-70) Maximum Airspeed Program — Maximum
Airspeed Ranges ................................................................................................ 96
97-11 Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) Adjustments — Example of an Index
Error Calculation ................................................................................................. 106
97-12 GPS (KLN-89B) Pages ....................................................................................... 114
97-13 Transponder Test Points (Feet) .......................................................................... 205
97-14 Weather Products ............................................................................................... 253

97-00-00
Page 14 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

AVIONICS SYSTEMS

97-1. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM — GENERAL • Control Panels

DESCRIPTION
• Circuit Breakers
This chapter provides the data necessary to
understand the operation of the avionics systems and • Electrical Load Analysis
to perform the necessary maintenance steps.
• Electrical and Electronic Components,
Information is provided for 407 helicopters S/N 53000 Reference Designator/Description/Location —
through 54299 (paragraph 97-2) as well as for 407GX Reference Table and Location Figure
helicopters S/N 54300 and subsequent with the
Garmin G1000H integrated avionics system installed • Circuit, Wires, and Cable Harness —
(paragraph 97-3). Designations

Refer to the table of contents at the beginning of the Simplified electrical schematics are used throughout
chapter to identify the model and serial number range the chapter to help clarify system or circuit operation.
of helicopter that you are working on as well as the To make the schematics easier to follow and
specific content that you are looking for. understand, all wire numbers and certain intermediate
connectors are not shown. The schematics are to be
This chapter describes each system under its own used in conjunction with the system operational
section. It provides the operator with the information descriptions.
necessary to maintain the serviceability of the specific
instrument system. All of the electrical simplified schematics in this
chapter show the electrical equipment in the static
In addition to the information provided within this position. All of the block diagrams and internal views
chapter, refer to Chapter 96 for the following: of components are simplified representations and do
not necessarily reflect the actual internal workings.
The static position is specified as follows:
• Electrical Safety and Hazards
• No electrical power is applied
• Safety Practices — General
• Switches and relays are shown in the off or
• Standard Practices — Electrical Maintenance
de-energized position
or Repairs
• The pressure switches are shown with no
• Standard Practices — Electrical Work in pressure applied
Confined Spaces
• The temperature switches are shown at the
• Standard Practices — After Electrical temperature of 59°F (15°C)
Maintenance or Repairs
For detailed avionics wiring diagram information, refer
• Miscellaneous Electrical Tools to this chapter for avionics wiring diagrams applicable
to 407 helicopters S/N 53000 through 54299 and
• Operational Checks, Functional Checks, and Chapter 98 for wiring diagrams applicable to 407GX
Troubleshooting Charts helicopters S/N 54300 and subsequent.

• General Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Miscellaneous Electrical Components — If you install a Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT)
Maintenance Practices optional equipment kit for the first time, do
this in accordance with the instructions
• Semiconductor Devices provided in the applicable Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 15
BHT-407-MM-11

Instruction (II). Follow the instructions • VHF Communication (VHF COMM) system
provided in this chapter for any subsequent (kit)
installation.
• Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) (kit)
For the specific electrical wiring maintenance
information and procedures, refer to the Electrical • Air Traffic Control (ATC) transponder (kit)
Standard Practices Manual (BHT-ELEC-SPM), which
provides the data necessary to repair and replace the • Slave compass (kit)
wires, cables, or the electrical components to the
standards of performance and quality as specified by • Global Positioning System (GPS) (kit)
Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT).
• Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) (kit)
97-2. AVIONICS SYSTEMS
(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 • Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) (kit)
THROUGH 54299)
• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) (kit)
There are many avionics configurations available for
the Model 407 from Bell Helicopter Textron. Only the This chapter describes each component under its own
common configurations that are available from Bell section. It provides the operator with the information
Helicopter Textron are discussed in this manual. For necessary to maintain the serviceability of the avionics
systems that are not discussed in this manual, refer to system.
the Instructions for Airworthiness (ICA) from the
installer, STC holder, or original equipment NOTE
manufacturer. The optional (factory installed) Bell
Helicopter Textron avionics systems include the The optional equipment kits listed in
following: Table 97-1 are primarily factory installed
kits.
• Avionics master switch This chapter also provides information and
maintenance instructions necessary to maintain the
• Inter-Communication System (ICS) (kit) serviceability of the optional equipment kits
(Table 97-1), if installed.
• Very High Frequency (VHF) Navigation/
Communication (NAV/COMM) system (kit) Figure 97-1 shows the avionics equipment locations.

97-00-00
Page 16 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

10
6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3
TRQ 10
D S R 100
0
FEE
FEE
T

2 40 T N 100
00

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E M 299
120
9
1010
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T
K
T 7
DAVTRON E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5
L

3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7
T

6
E

R E C
16 5
2 4 9

MGT
8
12
3
FUEL
AMPS 8 2 NR
PSI
1 1 0 1
~C X 100 NAV
S
HDG
2
15
4 0 10 10
120
NP GS
21 GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0
12

PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110
24

PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN
E

30
T

100
W

5 3
1 2
6

4 5 7 8 % RPM 40 NAV
30

6 9 90
R

3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL 8 3 NG KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
W

6
30

FWD TANK
3

FADEC 2 MIN TURN

12 15
15
20
24

OVSPD HORN 10
W

E
6

8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

PSI OIL ~C PSI OIL ~C

6 10
10 MODE
12
24

ON
E

10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2
21 AUTO
5 HDG
15 S VALVE
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0 0 0 0 OBS MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

6 7
11

12

2
1. ICS mode selector
2. KR-87 ADF receiver
3. KT-70 or KT-76A ATC transponder
4. KY-196A VHF communication transceiver
13 5. KY-155 or KX-165 VHF communication/
1 navigation transceiver
6. KI-227 ADF indicator
7. KI-208 course deviation indicator
8. NAV/GPS switch
9. KI-525A horizontal situation indicator (HSI)
10. ELT remote switch
11. KLN 89B GPS receiver
12. KMA 24H-71 audio panel
13. KA 51B slave control

407_MM_97_0001

Figure 97-1. Avionics Equipment Location (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 17
BHT-407-MM-11

Table 97-1. Avionics — Optional Equipment Kits (407 Helicopters S/N 53000 Through 54299)

ITEM MODEL OR PART NUMBER

Audio Panel (ICS) – Center Pedestal BENDIX/KING KMA 24H-71

VHF No. 1 (NAV/COMM) – Center Pedestal BENDIX/KING KX-155/KX165

VHF No. 2 (Comm) – Center Pedestal BENDIX/KING KY-196A

ADF Receiver – Center Pedestal BENDIX/KING KR-87

ADF Indicator – Instrument Panel BENDIX/KING KI-227

Transponder – Center Pedestal BENDIX/KING KT-76A/KT70

GPS – Center Pedestal BENDIX/KING KLN-89B

CDI – Instrument Panel BENDIX/KING KI-208

Aft ICS – Drop Cord CE394 K3-6P

Aft ICS – Cabin Speaker 4C3Z80T

Slaved Compass – Directional Gyro BENDIX/KING KG-102A

Navigation Indicator (HSI) – Instrument Panel BENDIX/KING KI-525A

ELT – Nose (left side) POINTER 4000-10

97-3. AVIONICS SYSTEMS • Integrated Avionics System

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND
SUBSEQUENT) • Communications Navigation and Surveillance
(CNS) system
There are many avionics configurations available for
• Crew Intercommunication System (ICS)
the Model 407GX from Bell Helicopter Textron. Only
the common configurations that are available from Bell • Transponder Mode S
Helicopter Textron are discussed in this manual. For
systems which are not discussed in this manual, refer Refer to Table 97-2 for the standard avionics system
to the Instructions for Airworthiness (ICA) from the configurations. Refer to Figure 97-2 for the layout of
installer, STC holder, or original equipment the integrated avionics instrument panel and
manufacturer. The standard avionics system Figure 97-3 for the layout of the integrated avionics
configuration from Bell Helicopter Textron includes the architecture. Refer to Table 97-3 for the optional
following: avionics equipment kits.

97-00-00
Page 18 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Table 97-2. Standard Avionics System Configurations (407GX Helicopters S/N 54300 and Subsequent)

SYSTEM MANUFACTURER MODEL

Integrated Avionics System Garmin G1000H

Communications Navigation and Garmin GIA 63H

Surveillance (CNS) system

Crew Intercommunication System Garmin GMA 350H

(ICS)

Transponder Mode S with Extended Garmin GTX-33H

Squitter

This chapter describes each component under its own

section. It provides the operator with the information Table 97-3. Avionics — Optional Equipment Kits
(407GX Helicopters S/N 54300 and Subsequent)
necessary to maintain the serviceability of the avionics
system. EQUIPMENT KIT NUMBER II NUMBER

Aft ICS 407-706-032 BHT-407-II-37

NOTE (5 Stations)
If you install a Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT) RAD ALT 407-706-054 BHT-407-II-29
optional equipment kit for the first time, do (RA 4500)
this in accordance with the instructions
provided in the applicable Installation TAS 407-706-056 BHT-407-II-28
(GTS 800)
Instruction (II). Follow the instructions
provided in this chapter for any subsequent XM Satellite 407-706-057 BHT-407-II-36
installation. Wx/Radio
Datalink 407-706-058 BHT-407-II-35
This chapter also provides information and (Wi-Fi/Iridium)
maintenance instructions necessary to maintain the (GDL 59)
serviceability of the following optional avionics
equipment kits (Table 97-3), if installed. ELT 407-706-059 BHT-407-II-38

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 19
BHT-407-MM-11

4 5

3 6
160
20
9 A0L T 1 7
140 AIRSPEED 40 8 2
MASTER
EMERGENCY USE ONLY
120 KNOTS
7 3 W/C

60 WARNING
ELT ARM
ELT XMIT
100
80
6 5 4 PUSH TO MUTE

CAUTION RPM RADIO CALL THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN

TEST / RESET: PRESS TO XMIT
WAIT 1 SEC PRESS TO ARM
N407GX COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

FUEL CAPACITY BASIC 869 LBS FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 WITH DIRECT
TEST WITH AUX 998.9 LBS REVERSION TO MANUAL INSTALLED. REFER TO
PEDAL FADEC FUEL QTY DU FADEC ON (JET A AT 15°C) FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION

AUTO FUEL
8
MAN VALVE

OVSPD FWD TANK BACKUP MODE OFF

FLOAT FIRE STOP

VENT VENT
GARMIN
GMA-350
MKR MAN
MUTE
COM1 COM2 COM3 NAV1 AUX TEL MUSIC SQ

MIC1 MIC2 MIC3 NAV2 PILOT COPLT PASS SPKR VOL

PUSH TO
SPLIT COM PA DISTRIBUTE
CRSR

ATTD TRIM
DN
L R
UP

TRIGGER:
1st - ICS

1
2nd - RAD
LDG LTS
QUIET BOTH
F
W START
D
CARGO RELEASE

NORMAL OFF

FLOAT TA
ARM MUTE
DISENG
FLOAT
INFLATE

1. Audio panel (GMA 350H)

2. Multi-Function Display Unit (MFD) (GDU 1040H)
3. Emergency locator transmitter switch (optional kit)
4. Standby airspeed indicator
5. Standby altimeter
6. Master warning/caution light/mute switch
7. RPM warning light/mute switch
8. Primary Flight Display (PFD) (GDU 1040H)
407_MD-2_0001+

Figure 97-2. 407GX Integrated Avionics System (G1000H) — Instrument Panel Layout
(S/N 54300 and Subsequent)

97-00-00
Page 20 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

NO. 1
AUDIO GIA 63H
FREE FLIGHT GDL 59H GSR 56H GDL 69AH GTS 800
RA 4500 WI-FI DATALINK & IRIDIUM DATALINK (XM WEATHER/ NO. 1
ARINC 429 RS 232 TRAFFIC ADVISORY GIA 63H
RAD ALT (KIT) STORAGE (KIT) (KIT) AUDIO) (KIT) TA INHIBIT 2 SYSTEM (TAS) CAS MESSAGE AUDIO ALERT
(KIT)

AUDIO
AUDIO MGT EXCEED

HSDB
HSDB
HSDB MGT MISCOMP
(COLLECTIVE SWITCH)

HTAWS/TAS MUTE NOTE: NG EXCEED

HSDB (HIGH SPEED DATA BUS) HSDB NG MISCOMP
IF PFD FAILS, NP EXCEED 1

AURAL TA ALERT
TA INHIBIT 1
CONFIGURATION MFD WILL GENERATE NP MISCOMP
AUDIO ALERT CAS MESSAGE AIRFRAME DISCRETE INPUT MODULE THESE MESSAGES NR MISCOMP
Q EXCEED
1 BATTERY HOT BATTERY THERMAL SWICH
GDU 1040H COM / VOICE ALERT AUDIO
GMA 350H
COM / VOICE ALERT AUDIO GDU 1040H Q MISCOMP
1 5 ENGINE FIRE FIRE OVERHEAT DETECTOR (MFD)
RS 232
(PFD)
AUDIO PANEL RS 232 ALTN DATA FAIL
3 ENGINE OUT ENGINE OUT RELAY HSDB
HSDB
NG OAT LIMIT
4 FADEC FAIL FADEC ECU
CONFIGURATION FADEC MAINT
BAGGAGE DOOR BAGGAGE DOOR SWITCH MODULE
FADEC DEGRADED FADEC ECU
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
FADEC FAULT FADEC ECU
ARINC 429 GDC 74H ARINC 429
FADEC MANUAL FADEC AUTO/MANUAL RELAY RS 232 AIR DATA
COMPUTER (ADC)
FLOAT ARM FLOAT ARM SWITCH

ARINC 429
ANT: ANT:
FUEL FILTER A/F FUEL FILTER SWITCH Standard Garmin Equipment COM
NAV/GS GMU 44
RS 232
GTP 59 COM
NAV/GS ARINC 429
ARTEX ELT
FUEL LOW LOW LEVEL DETECTOR GPS (MAGNETOMETER) RS 485 (OAT PROBE) GPS (C406 N-HM)
1 NO. 1 (KIT)
FUEL VALVE FUEL SHUTOFF VALUE NO. 2
GIA 63H ARINC 429
ARINC 429
GRS 77H GIA 63H
GEN FAIL GENERATOR RELAY INTEGRATED ARINC 429
INTEGRATED AIRFRAME DISCRETE INPUT CAS MESSAGE AUDIO ALERT
AVIONICS UNIT ARINC 429 ATTITUDE AND HEADING RS 232 AVIONICS UNIT
HEATER OVERTMP HEATER TEMP SENSOR (AIRCOMM STC) RS 232 REFERENCE SYSTEM
(AHRS)
L/FUEL BOOST L/FUEL PRESS SWITCH-MAIN CELL CONFIGURATION BATTERY THERMAL SWICH BATTERY HOT 1
ANT:
L/FUEL XFR L/FUEL PRESS SWITCH-FWD CELL XPDR
MODULE EMERGENCY USE ONLY
ENGINE OUT RELAY ENGINE OUT 3
RS 232 GTX 33H ES RS 232
LITTER DOOR LITTER DOOR SWITCH ELT ARM
(TRANSPONDER) FADEC ECU ENGINE OVSPD
R/FUEL BOOST R/FUEL PRESS SWITCH-MAIN CELL CONFIGURATION ELT XMIT
XMSN OIL TEMP SWITCH XMSN OIL TEMP 1
R/FUEL XFR R/FUEL PRESS SWITCH-FWD CELL RS 485 MODULE TEST / RESET: PRESS TO XMIT
GEA 71H RS 485
WAIT 1 SEC PRESS TO ARM
XMSN OIL PRESS SWITCH XMSN OIL PRESS
AUTO RELIGHT AUTO RELIGHT RELAY AIRFRAME AND ENGINE
SYSTEM PROCESSOR BATTERY RELAY BATTERY RLY
ENGINE ANTI-ICE ENG ANTI-ICE PRESSURE SWITCH HYD. PRESS SWITCH HYDRAULIC SYS 1
INSTR FAN FAN CONTROL RELAY PEDAL STOP POSITION SWITCH PEDAL STOP
RESTART FAULT FADEC ECU GSC 46
ENGINE SIGNAL CYCLIC CENTERING SWITCH CYC CTR
START STARTER RELAY CONDITIONNER FAN CONTROL RELAY INSTR FAN
FLOAT TEST FLOAT TEST SWITCH AND FADEC ECU QUIET MODE SEL
FLOAT INFLATION SWITCH
QUIET/NORMAL SWITCH/FADEC ECU QUIET MODE ON
TRQ NR NG NP ENG OIL FUEL WOG
ENG XMSN OIL XMSN WEIGHT ON GEAR SWITCH
AMPS (ENGINE (XMSN (ENGINE (ENGINE PRESSURE PRESSURE
OIL TEMP PRESSURE (SHUNT) PRESSURE MONOPOLE MONOPOLE MONOPOLE OIL TEMP (TRANSDUCER) (TRANSDUCER)
(BULB) (TRANSDUCER) TRANSDUCER) SENSOR/ SENSOR/ (BULB)
OPTIONAL SENSOR)
Airframe Analogs & Discretes

FADEC ECU) FADEC ECU)

AUDIO ALERT LEGEND GARMIN EQUIPMENT
(GIA NO.1 OR NO.2 GENERATED) (KITS)
PRIMARY
DATA SOURCE
1 SINGLE PING STANDARD
ALTERNATE ENG CHIP XMSN CHIP TAIL ROTOR
GARMIN EQUIPMENT PUSH TO MUTE MGT DATA SOURCES DETECTORS (2) DETECTORS CHIP DETECTOR ENGINE FADEC ECU
2 CONTINUOUS SOLID TONE FUEL QTY (2+ FREEWHEEL)
(SIGNAL (ENGINE (PRIMARY DATA SOURCES FOR
3 CONTINUOUS FAST-PULSING TONE NON-GARMIN RPM 2 CONDITIONER) THERMO- ENGINE CHIP 1 XMSN CHIP 1 T/R CHIP 1 ARINC 429 NG, NP, NR, MGT)
EQUIPMENT (KITS) COUPLE)
RPM WARNING PBA (ALTERNATE DATA SOURCE
4 REPEATING DING-DONG TONE PEDAL STOP FOR TORQUE Q).
SOLENOID STATUS
EXISTING AIRCRAFT
5 CONTINUOUS SWEEPING SOUND EQUIPMENT
FOR RUSSIAN CERTIFICATION
MASTER
W/C
TEST
WARNING 1 PEDAL FADEC FUEL QTY DU FADEC ON
NOTE AUTO FUEL
CAUTION 1 MAN VALVE
REFER TO THE GARMIN G1000H PILOT’S GUIDE (190-01255-00) OR THE
MODE OFF
G1000H SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL (190-00907-00) FOR SPECIFIC WARNING/CAUTION PBA FLOAT FIRE STOP OVSPD FWD TANK BACKUP
G1000H SYSTEM MESSAGES, AUDIO ALERTS AND OTHER RELATED INFORMATION.

THIS SCHEMATIC PROVIDES PRIMARY IAS ARCHITECTURE AND IS NOT INTENTED TO

DEPICT ALL BACKUP REDUNDANCY FEATURES. REFER TO BHT-407-FM-2, SECTION 3,
407_MM_95_0008+
BHT-407-MD-2, SECTION 1 OR BHT-407-MM-10, CHAPTER 95.

Figure 97-3. 407GX Integrated Avionics System (G1000H) — Architecture (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 21
BHT-407-MM-11

97-4. AVIONICS — OPERATIONAL CHECKS contact, socket, or connection is cleaned.

AND TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM.

The operational check procedures are supplied to help • Examine all wiring, coaxial cables, connectors,
ensure the avionics systems operate correctly and to and terminal junctions for condition. Make sure
help you locate and correct most of the failures that that all connections are good and tight. Make
may occur in the avionics systems. sure that connectors are correctly aligned and
free of moisture and corrosion.
When troubleshooting an unserviceable avionics
system, do the operational check first. Possible failure • Make sure that electrical power is supplied to
or failures of the system are identified in the corrective the component and that ground connections
action sections of the operational check. Subsequent are clean, tight, and correct. Refer to the
to a repair action, continue the operational check to related wiring diagram.
make sure that the avionics system operates correctly.
• Make sure that switches, relays, diodes, and
other components operate correctly.
NOTE
For 407GX helicopters S/N 54300 and • Make sure the antennas are clean, correctly
subsequent, refer to the Garmin G1000/ installed, and that the coaxial cables are
G1000H System Maintenance Manual installed correctly. Make sure the base of the
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). antennas are correctly grounded and the
ground planes are correctly installed and
If more troubleshooting information is necessary. refer grounded. Good ground connections are very
to the manufacturer of the avionics equipment. important for the correct operation of avionics
systems. For the procedures necessary for a
The general troubleshooting information supplied in correct ground connection, refer to the BHT
paragraph 97-5 may also be used to help you ELEC-SPM.
troubleshoot the avionics systems.
• Make sure that electrical power is supplied to
97-5. AVIONICS — GENERAL the component.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Make sure that the switches, relays, and
The subsequent troubleshooting procedures are controls operate. Measure them for continuity.
general and may be used as a guide to locate a failure
in an avionics system. Make sure you understand the • Examine the airframe wiring, plugs, and
operation of the system or component before you do connectors for condition and continuity.
the troubleshooting procedure Refer to the appropriate
wiring diagram at the back of this chapter or in • Do the operational checks and troubleshoot
Chapter 98 (407GX) when troubleshooting a system. the system or component to isolate inoperative
components.
• Review the helicopter logbook for any recent
maintenance or avionics work done. This may • For individual component information, refer to
give you information that can help you find the the manufacturer’s instructions as necessary.
cause of the failure (for example: loose
connector, broken wire, etc.). 97-6. AVIONICS SYSTEM — COMPONENT
LOCATION
• Malfunctions can be caused by a bad
connection. The removal and installation of a For information on the installed location of
connector or component can stop the components, refer to the Electrical and Electronic
malfunction. When this occurs, a bad Components, Reference Designator/Description/
connection is likely. Make sure that the related Location — Reference Table and Location Figure
(Chapter 96).

97-00-00
Page 22 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Except for the antennas that are mounted directly on 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove
the outside of the helicopter structure, the avionics the component.
components are located in the following locations:
4. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on all
• Instrument panel the electrical connectors.

• Overhead panel
97-9. Panel Mounted Components — Cleaning
• Pedestal

• Hat rack area MATERIALS REQUIRED

• Cyclic control stick Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
• Collective control stick
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol
• The area above the aft baggage compartment
C-516 Clean Cloth
97-7. PANEL MOUNTED COMPONENTS —
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
cloth (C-516).
The following removal, cleaning, inspection, and
installation information may be used as applicable for
panel, shelf, or rack mounted components when 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
specific instructions are not provided. Also refer to the clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance (C-385).
Practices (Chapter 96) for additional information.
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
97-8. Panel Mounted Components — Removal soft bristle brush.

97-10. Panel Mounted Components — Inspection

MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. NOTE

The following inspection criteria are
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE primarily intended when the part or
component has been removed from the
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is
WARNING installed on the helicopter. Also refer to the
Miscellaneous Electrical Components —
Maintenance Practices (Chapter 96) for
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS additional information.
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
1. Examine the switches and controls for proper
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
operation.
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

1. Loosen the spring-lock fasteners, turn-locks, or 2. Examine the edge lit and integrally lit panels for
mounting screws. cracks, scratches, and damage.

2. Pull the component out of the panel to access the 3. Examine the windows, dials, and bezels for
connectors behind the component. cracks and scratches.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 23
BHT-407-MM-11

4. Examine the connectors and related wiring. NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC

EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
5. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
1. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
damage. Replace when necessary.
2. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on all
the electrical connectors.
97-11. Panel Mounted Components —
Installation
3. Remove the mounting screws from the shelf
mounted components.

WARNING
4. Loosen the knurled nut from the rack and slide
the component out of the rack.

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

5. Lift the component from the mounting surface.
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 97-13. Shelf or Rack Mounted Components —
Cleaning
1. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from all the
electrical connectors. MATERIALS REQUIRED

2. Connect the electrical connectors to the Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

component.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

3. Insert the component in its initial position. C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth

4. Secure the component to the panel using
spring-lock fasteners, turn-locks, or mounting screws.
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
5. Return the helicopter to the standard cloth (C-516).
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385).
97-12. Shelf or Rack Mounted Components —
Removal
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
soft bristle brush.
MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 97-14. Shelf or Rack Mounted Components —

Inspection
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-156 Caps and/or Plugs NOTE

The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or
component has been removed from the
WARNING helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS installed on the helicopter. Also refer to the
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR Miscellaneous Electrical Components —

97-00-00
Page 24 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Maintenance Practices (Chapter 96) for 97-16. ANTENNAS — RELOCATION OR NEW

additional information. INSTALLATION

1. Examine the component for damage.

WARNING
2. Examine the condition of the connectors.
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
4. Examine the condition of the rack.
The following removal, cleaning, inspection, and
installation information may be used as applicable for
5. Visually examine the attaching hardware for panel, shelf, or rack mounted components when
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion specific instructions are not provided.
damage. Replace when necessary.
The antennas should only be installed in locations
approved by Bell Helicopter Textron. Figure 97-4 and
97-15. Shelf or Rack Mounted Components —
Figure 97-5 show the locations that are approved for
Installation the most common antenna installations. For other
antennas, or for uncommon installations, contact
Product Support Engineering.
WARNING
97-17. Antennas — Removal

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

MATERIALS REQUIRED
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
1. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from all the
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs
electrical connectors.

2. Set the component onto the shelf or rack.

WARNING

3. Secure the component to the shelf with screws.

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
4. Secure the component to the rack by tightening NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
the knurled nuts EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

1. Remove the sealant around the base of the

5. Connect the electrical connectors.
antenna.

6. Return the helicopter to the standard 2. Remove the mounting hardware.

configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 25
BHT-407-MM-11

VOR/LOCALIZER/GLIDESLOPE
ANTENNA (BOTH SIDES
XPNDR ANTENNA
OF FUSELAGE)

ADF ANTENNA
COMM #2 ANTENNA COMM #2 ANTENNA
(VHF) (VHF)

ELT ANTENNA

GPS ANTENNA

407_MM_97_0004

Figure 97-4. Antennas — Approved Locations (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
Page 26 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

LEFT AND RIGHT

NAV / GS 1 AND 2
LOCATION: LEFT AND RIGHT SIDE
DM N48-1
108 MHZ - 118 MHz (NAV - RCV)
328 MHZ - 336 MHz (GS - RCV)
GPS1/WAAS/XM ANTENNA
GARMIN GA36 (WITHOUT XM)
GARMIN GA37 TOP TAS ANTENNA
1575.42 MHz (GPS-RCV) LOCATION: CENTER IRIDIUM ANTENNA
2332.5 MHz - 2345 MHz GARMIN GA 58 LOCATION: CENTER
(SATELLITE WX-RCV) 1030 MHz (XMIT) COMANT CI 490-22
1090 MHz (RCV) 1616 MHz - 1626.5 MHz (XMT/RCV)

COM2/GPS2 ANTENNA
LOCATION: RIGHT SIDE
COMANT CI 2580-200
118 - 137 MHz (COM-XMT/RCV)
1575.42 MHz (GPS-RCV)

ELT ANTENNA
LOCATION: CENTER
ARTEX 110-338
121.5 MHz, 243 MHz,
406 MHz (XMT)

RAD ALT RCV AND XMT BOTTOM TAS ANTENNA (KA-61)

COM 1 ANTENNA
ANTENNAS LOCATION: CENTER
LOCATION: LEFT SIDE
LOCATION: SIDE-BY-SIDE 1030 MHz (XMT)
COMANT CI 122
4300 MHz 1090 MHz (RCV)
118 MHz - 137 MHz (XMT/RCV)

WI-FI DATALINK (GDL 59) ANTENNA

LOCATION: NOSE, INSIDE LEFT SIDE
2412 - 2484 MHz - XMT/RCV
(ONLY ACTIVE ON-GROUND) XPDR ANTENNA (KA-61)
LOCATION: RIGHT SIDE
1030 MHz (XMT)
1090 MHz (RCV)

407gc_MM_97_0029

Figure 97-5. 407GX Antennas — Approved Locations (S/N 54300 and Subsequent)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 27
BHT-407-MM-11

4. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on all 97-20. Antennas — Installation
the electrical connectors.

97-18. Antennas — Cleaning MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

MATERIALS REQUIRED NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. C-251 Sealant

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol WARNING

C-516 Clean Cloth

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
cloth (C-516). EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a 1. Make sure the antenna mounting surface is clean
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol to permit proper bonding to the mounting surface.
(C-385).
2. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from all the
electrical connectors.
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
soft bristle brush.
3. Connect the coax connector to the antenna.

97-19. Antennas — Inspection 4. Position the antenna on the mounting surface.

5. Attach the antenna to the mounting surface with

NOTE
the mounting hardware.
The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or 6. Apply a bead of approved sealant (C-251) around
component has been removed from the the edge of the base of the antenna.
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
7. Return the helicopter to the standard
be used when the part or component is
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
installed on the helicopter.
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

1. Examine the component for damage.

97-21. AVIONICS SYSTEMS — POWER
REQUIREMENTS (407 HELICOPTERS
2. Examine the condition of the connector. S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface The avionics systems operate with 28 VDC electrical
and the attaching hardware. power. The avionics systems wiring is protected by
circuit breakers in the overhead panel. Table 97-4
shows the power requirement of each system. For
4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for additional data, including data for 407GX S/N 54300
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion and subsequent, refer to the electrical load analysis
damage. Replace when necessary. (Chapter 96).

97-00-00
Page 28 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Table 97-4. Avionics Systems Power Requirements (407 Helicopters S/N 53000 Through 54299)

EQUIPMENT POWER REQUIREMENT MAXIMUM CURRENT

VHF NAV/COMM 11 watts receive, 165 watts transmit 0.48 amps receive and 6.0 amps
Transceiver (KX-165) transmit at 27.5 VDC

VHF COM Transceiver 28 watts receive, 140 watts transmit 1.0 amp receive and 5.0 amps
(KY-196A) transmit at 28 VDC

ADF (KR-87) 13 watts 0.45 amps at 28 VDC

GPS (KLN-89B) 83 watts (35 watts nominal) 3.0 amps at 27.5 VDC (1.25 amps
nominal)

Transponder (KT-76A/78A) 49.5 watts (when set to ON) 1.1 amps standby and 1.8 amps ON
at 27.5.

Transponder (KT-70) 35 watts (maximum) 1.25 amps at 27.5 VDC

VHF NAV/COMM 21 watts receive, 145 watts transmit 0.77 amps receive and 5.3 amps
Transceiver (KX-155) transmit at 27.5 VDC

97-22. AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH — systems that do not use the avionics master switch are
DESCRIPTION (407 HELICOPTERS the ICS headset amplifier in the audio panel
S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299) (KMA 24H-71) and the VHF NAV/COMM No. 1. The
avionics master switch opens the circuit if the total
The avionics master switch has the capability to current supplied to the avionics bus is more than 30
supply and remove power to most of the avionics amps. Figure 97-6 shows a simplified schematic of the
systems. If an avionics kit is installed, the avionics avionics master switch circuit.
master switch can be installed. The only avionics

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 29
BHT-407-MM-11

3CB1
AVIONICS
MASTER
2301CB1

28 VDC 30 3 ICS
BUS SPEAKER

3427CB1

3 ENCDG
28 VDC ALT
AVIONIC
3406CB1
BUS
5 ADF

3415CB1

5 GPS

3410CB1

5 XPDR

2303CB1

10 VHF 2 COMM

407_MM_97_0006

Figure 97-6. Avionics Master Switch Circuit — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
Page 30 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM (ICS) (KMA 24H-71)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-23. INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 97-24. KING AUDIO COMMUNICATION

(ICS) CONTROL PANELS (KMA 24H-71) —
DESCRIPTION
If installed, the ICS permits the crew to communicate
If installed, the audio panel (KMA 24H-71)
with each other through their headsets, to listen to
(Figure 97-7) has two rows of pushbutton switches
communications and navigation radios, and to select
which are identified as SPEAKER and PHONE. These
radios for reception and transmission. The aft ICS
permit selection of the various avionics receivers as
cannot be used to transmit on the radios. The drop
marked on the panel. The top row of pushbutton
cord switches are used to connect the aft microphones
switches select the audio for the optional speakers.
to the ICS. When the ICS is set to the NORMAL mode
The bottom row of pushbutton switches select the
of operation, the audio from the aft microphones is
audio for the headsets. The emergency (EMG)
heard in all headsets. When the ICS is set to the
position of the microphone (MIC) rotary selector switch
ISOLATE mode, the audio from the aft microphones is
connects the pilot headset directly to the primary
heard in all headsets except the pilot headset (in the
communication system (VHF COMM No. 1). This
ISOLATE mode, the pilot is isolated from the ICS).
inter-connection provides a failsafe method of
When the ICS is set to the PRIVATE mode, the pilot
communication. The audio panel consists of the
and copilot positions are isolated from the aft ICS
following:
stations. To communicate, the passengers in the aft
cabin must push the drop cord switches, or use the
• Pushbutton audio control
VOX system.
• Rotary audio gain control
Figure 97-7 shows the audio panel (KMA 24H-71).
Figure 97-8 (no aft ICS) and Figure 97-9 (five aft ICS • Transceiver and receiver outputs to the pilot
stations) show schematics of the ICS and VHF No. 1 and copilot headsets
systems.
• Noise-free constant volume levels through
The ICS may consist of: isolation amplification

VOL Control. The volume control (VOL) (Figure 97-7)

• King audio communication control panel sets only the volume and does not affect the other
(KMA 24H-71) inputs.

• Foot switch for the copilot VOX Control. The VOX control (Figure 97-7) position
sets how the microphone is connected as follows:
• Pilot trigger switch installed on the pilot cyclic
• In the clockwise position, the microphone is
control stick and a copilot trigger switch
always connected (HOT MIC), or ON.
installed on the copilot cyclic control stick (if
installed)
• In the mid position, the microphone is
connected by a voice operated switch (VOX).
• ICS mode selector (INTERCOM) switch The voice operated switch keys the ICS when
you speak into any of the microphones. The
• Aft Passenger Address (PA) speaker sensitivity of the VOX is set by the VOX
control.
• Three or five drop cord switches for the aft • In the full counterclockwise position, the
cabin microphone is controlled by momentary
switches (cyclic trigger switches or drop
• Headsets switches).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 31
BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 TRQ 10
D S R 1000
FEE
FEE
T

2 40 T N 1000
0

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E M 299

SELECT CONTROL 12 120 1010

S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5

L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7

T
6

E
R E C
16 5
2 4 9
12
FUEL
AMPS
3
MGT
PSI 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120
NP GS
15 21 GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0

12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110

24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN

E
30

T
100

W
5 3
1 2

6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV

30
7 90
6 9
R

3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL 8 3 NG
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
W

6
30
FWD TANK
3

FADEC 2 MIN TURN

12 15
15
20
24

OVSPD HORN 10
W

E
6

8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

6
OIL ~C 10 OIL ~C 10 MODE

12
PSI PSI
24

ON
E

10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5 15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

2 3 4

8
7 6 5

1. Vox control
2. Volume control
3. Speaker pushbutton switches
4. Microphone rotary select switch
5. Speaker auto switch
6. Lock screw
7. Phone pushbutton switches
8. Vox delay adjustment

407_MM_97_0007

Figure 97-7. Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
Page 32 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-8. Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) and VHF No. 1 Schematic (No Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 33
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-9. Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) and VHF No. 1 Schematic (With Five Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through
54299) (Sheet 1 of 2)

97-00-00
Page 34 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-9. Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) and VHF No. 1 Schematic (with Five Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through
54299) (Sheet 2 of 2)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 35
BHT-407-MM-11

SPEAKER Pushbutton Switches. The SPEAKER 97-25. COPILOT ICS FOOT SWITCH —
pushbutton switches (Figure 97-7) are used to connect DESCRIPTION
the audio from the receivers to the speaker amplifier
through a mute switch and a sum network. You can The copilot ICS foot switch is installed to permit the
select one or more receivers at a time. copilot to speak on the ICS when there is no cyclic
control stick at the copilot position. The ICS foot switch
SPKR AUTO Switch. The AUTO switch (Figure 97-7) also permits the copilot to speak on the ICS and not
automatically connects the audio output from the have to touch the flight controls. The ICS foot switch
transceiver (selected with the MIC rotary selector can only be used for the ICS and cannot be used to
switch) to the cockpit speaker (if installed). To hear the transmit on the transceivers or on the PA. If the copilot
audio from the transceiver that is selected with the MIC cyclic control stick is installed, the trigger switch or the
rotary selector switch, pull out the SPKR AUTO knob. foot ICS switch can be used to speak on the ICS.

PHONE Pushbutton Switches. The PHONE 97-26. CYCLIC CONTROL STICKS TRIGGER
pushbutton switches (Figure 97-7) connect audio SWITCH — DESCRIPTION
outputs from the receivers to the headphone amplifiers
through mute switches and summing networks. The The cyclic control sticks trigger switch for the pilot and
audio from the selected radio is supplied to the pilot copilot (if installed) permit the flight crew to speak on
and copilot headsets. The PHONE pushbutton the ICS and key (transmit) the transceivers or the PA.
switches are used to listen to one or more receivers at When the cyclic trigger switch is pushed to the first
a time. When in transmit mode, audio is muted and the position it keys the ICS amplifier. When pushed to the
sidetone is supplied from the transceiver amplifier to second position, it connects the microphone to the
the pilot and copilot headsets. selected radio and keys the transmission or the PA (the
radio is selected with the audio panel rotary selector
MIC Selector Switch. The MIC selector switch switch).
(Figure 97-7) connects pilot and copilot microphones
to a transceiver or the Passenger Address (PA) 97-27. ICS MODE SELECTOR SWITCH
speaker. With EMG mode selected, only the pilot (OPTIONAL) — DESCRIPTION
microphone is connected directly to the VHF NAV/
COMM No. 1. Table 97-5 shows the functions of the The ICS mode selector (INTERCOM) switch is on the
MIC selector switch. center pedestal near the ashtray. You use the ICS
mode selector to set the ICS to one of three possible
modes. The three modes are NORMAL, PRIVATE, and
ISOLATE. Figure 97-1 shows the location of the ICS
mode selector.

Table 97-5. MIC Selector Switch Functions (KMA 24H-71)

POSITION FUNCTION
EMG Emergency – Connects the pilot microphone and audio to the VHF NAV/COMM No. 1 and
isolates the pilot from the others (sets the ICS to the ISOLATE mode).
1 VHF Comm No. 1 – Connects the microphone, audio/sidetone, and key lines to VHF Comm No. 1.
2 VHF Comm No. 2 – Connects the microphones, audio/sidetone, and key lines to VHF Comm
No. 2.
3 Not used.
4 Not used.
5 Not used.
PA Aft cabin speaker amplifier – Permits pilot or copilot to speak to passengers through the aft cabin
speaker; trigger switches are pushed to the second position to connect microphones to the PA.

97-00-00
Page 36 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-28. AFT PA SPEAKER — DESCRIPTION 97-32. ICS COMMUNICATION WITH THE CYCLIC
TRIGGER SWITCH — OPERATION
The aft PA speaker (2301LS1) is used for one way
communication from the flight crew to the passengers. 1. Make sure the ICS mode selector (if installed) is
The speaker is in the ceiling of the aft cabin. The set to the applicable mode.
speaker amplifier in the audio panel (KMA 24H-71)
supplies an audio power output of 10 watts to the 2. Push the cyclic trigger switch to the first position.
speaker. To use the speaker to listen to receivers, you
push in the applicable SPEAKER pushbuttons on the
audio panel. To connect the pilot or copilot microphone 3. Speak into the microphone.
audio to the PA speaker, set the rotary selector switch
on the audio panel to PA and push the trigger switch to 97-33. ICS COMMUNICATION WITH THE
the second position (same as for radio transmit). In the COPILOT FOOT SWITCH — OPERATION
PA mode, the audio inputs selected through the
SPEAKER pushbuttons are not heard when the pilot 1. Make sure the ICS mode selector (if installed) is
or copilot pushes the trigger switch to the second set to the applicable mode.
position (transmit).
2. Push the copilot foot switch.
97-29. DROP CORD SWITCHES — DESCRIPTION
3. Speak into the microphone.
The passengers in the aft cabin use the drop cord
switches to connect their headsets to the ICS and to
key the ICS to speak. Figure 97-10 shows the drop 97-34. ICS (KMA 24H-71) TRANSMISSION
cords. MODE — OPERATION

97-30. HEADSETS — DESCRIPTION The only method to transmit on a transceiver or the PA

is with the trigger switch on the cyclic control stick(s).
Each headset consists of two speakers and an
adjustable boom and microphone. The headset audio 97-35. ICS TRANSMISSION WITH A CYCLIC
input must have 500 ohms nominal impedance. The CONTROL STICK TRIGGER SWITCH —
headset must have a low impedance carbon or OPERATION
dynamic pre-amplified microphone.
1. Set the MIC rotary selector switch to the position
97-31. ICS (KMA 24H-71) COMMUNICATION necessary to select the transceiver you wish to use.
MODE — OPERATION
2. Tune to an approved frequency with the
There are two methods to communicate on the
transceiver controls.
intercom with the VOX/VOL switch in the key position
(full counterclockwise). The trigger switches, the
copilot foot switch, and the drop cords can be used to 3. Push the cyclic trigger switch to the second
speak on the ICS. The pilot does not have a foot position.
switch. With the VOX/VOL control in the full clockwise
position, the ICS is permanently keyed (Hot Mike). 4. Speak into the microphone. During transmission,
With VOX/VOL control carefully adjusted, the ICS is the sidetone should be heard to confirm radio
keyed by speaking in the microphone. transmission.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 37
BHT-407-MM-11

JACK ICS KEY SWITCH CABLE PLUG

407_MM_97_0010

Figure 97-10. Drop Cord Switches — Description

97-00-00
Page 38 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-7 shows the ICS audio panel. Table 97-5 b. Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until
and Table 97-6 provide the various positions of the the unit disengages from the rack.
MIC rotary selector switch and the audio pushbutton
switches. c. Pull on the sides of the audio panel and
remove it from the rack.

2. Install the audio panel as follows:

Table 97-6. Audio Panel Switch Connections
(KMA 24H-71)
a. Put the audio panel unit into the rack and push
it in until the locking screw touches the rear of the
SWITCH FUNCTION
rack.
COM1 VHF COMM No. 1
b. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access
COM2 VHF COMM No. 2 hole in the front panel. Engage the locking screw.
COM3 Not used

COM4 Not used CAUTION

COM5 Not used

NAV1 VOR/ILS DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW.

NAV2 Not used c. Turn the locking screw clockwise until the unit
is tightened into the rack.
DME Not used

MKR Not used d. Pull gently on the sides of the audio panel to
make sure it is correctly installed.
ADF ADF
3. Return the helicopter to the standard
SPKR AUTO Not used configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
97-36. Audio Panel (KMA 24H-71) —
Replacement 97-37. ICS (KMA 24H-71) OPERATIONAL
CHECKS

97-38. INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM (ICS) —

WARNING COMPONENT REPLACEMENT

To replace an electrical component, refer to the

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
97-39. ICS (INSTALLATION WITHOUT THE AFT
1. Remove the audio panel (Figure 97-7) as follows: ICS) — OPERATIONAL CHECK

NOTE
a. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access
hole at the front of the audio panel (Refer to Use this operational check procedure for a
Figure 97-7 for the location of the access hole). single audio panel (KMA 24H-71) without
Engage the locking screw. the aft ICS kit installed.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 39
BHT-407-MM-11

5. Push the copilot ICS foot switch and speak into

the copilot microphone.
CAUTION
RESULT:
USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT
DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE • You hear the microphone audio in the copilot
C H E C K S T O AV O I D B AT T E R Y and pilot headsets.
DEPLETION. IF BATTERY POWER IS
USED, KEEP ELECTRICAL LOADS AND • You do not hear microphone audio in the aft
CHECK TIME TO A MINIMUM. cabin speaker.

1. Make sure that 28 VDC power is supplied. 6. On the audio panel, set the VOX control fully
clockwise to the HOT MIC position and speak into the
2. Set the switches on the ICS audio panel as pilot microphone.
follows:
RESULT:
• Volume control (VOL) to the mid position
• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot
• VOX control to the fully counterclockwise and copilot headsets.
position
7. Speak into the copilot microphone.
• All SPEAKER and PHONE switches to the
OFF position (out position)
RESULT:

• SPKR/AUTO switch to the OFF position (in

• You hear the microphone audio in the copilot
position)
and pilot headsets.
• Microphone rotary selector to the 4 position
8. Set the VOX control on the audio panel to the
fully counterclockwise position.
3. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to
the first position (ICS) and speak into the pilot
microphone. 9. Slowly turn the VOX control on the audio panel
and speak into the pilot microphone.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot
and copilot headsets. • The sensitivity of the voice activated audio
increases as you turn the VOX control
• You do not hear microphone audio in the aft clockwise.
cabin speaker.
97-40. ICS Receiver and Transmitter —
4. Push the copilot cyclic control stick trigger switch Operational Check
to the first position (if copilot cyclic control stick is
installed) and speak into the copilot microphone.
CAUTION
RESULT:

• You hear the microphone audio in the copilot SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS
and pilot headsets. PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
• You do not hear microphone audio in the aft PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
cabin speaker. IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.

97-00-00
Page 40 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

1. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON and tune it to an RESULT:

approved frequency.
• VHF No. 2 transceiver transmits and you hear
2. Permit a 2-minute warmup period. the sidetone in the pilot and copilot headsets.
Release the trigger switch.

3. Set all SPEAKER and PHONE switches on the 13. Push the copilot cyclic control stick trigger switch
audio panel to the OFF positions. to second position (transmit) and speak into the copilot
microphone.
4. Set the volume control to the mid position.
RESULT:
5. Set the rotary control to the 1 position and listen
for radio reception or radio background noise (pull out • The VHF No. 2 transceiver transmits and you
the PULL/TST knobs to disengage the squelch). hear the sidetone in the copilot and pilot
Adjust the volume to a comfortable level. headsets. The sidetone tells that the radio
transmitter operates correctly. Release the
trigger switch.
6. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to
the second position (radio transmit) and speak into the 97-41. ICS Mixing Switches — Operational Check
pilot microphone.
1. Set all the SPEAKER and PHONE pushbutton
RESULT: switches on the audio panel to off.

• VHF No. 1 transceiver transmits and you hear 2. Set the rotary selector to the 1 position.
the sidetone in the pilot and copilot headsets.
Release the trigger switch. 3. Adjust the volume to a comfortable level.

7. Push the copilot cyclic control stick trigger switch 4. Pull the PULL/TST knob on the VHF No. 1 to
to the second position (transmit) and speak into the OFF to disable the squelch.
copilot microphone.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot and copilot
• VHF No. 1 transceiver transmits. You hear the headsets.
sidetone in the copilot and pilot headsets. The
sidetone tells that the radio transmitter 5. Set the rotary selector to the 2 position.
operates correctly. Release the trigger switch.
6. Set the PHONE COMM 1 pushbutton to ON (in
8. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF. position).

9. If the VHF No. 2 is installed, set the VHF No. 2 to RESULT:

ON and tune it to an approved frequency.
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot and copilot
headsets.
10. Permit a 2-minute warmup period.
7. Push in the PULL/TST knob on VHF No. 1.
11. Set the rotary selector switch on the ICS audio
panel to the 2 position. 97-42. ICS COMM 2 Switch — Operational Check

12. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to 1. Set the rotary selector to the 2 position.
the second position (transmit) and speak into the pilot
microphone. 2. Adjust the volume to a comfortable level.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 41
BHT-407-MM-11

3. Pull the PULL/TEST knob on the VHF Comm RESULT:

No. 2 to OFF to disable the squelch.
• You hear the ADF audio in the pilot and copilot
RESULT: headsets.

• You hear receiver noise in the pilot and copilot 5. Set the PHONE ADF pushbutton on the audio
headsets. panel to OFF (out position).

4. Set the rotary selector to the 1 position.

RESULT:
5. Set the PHONE COMM 2 pushbutton to ON (in
• You do not hear the audio from the ADF
position).
station.
RESULT:
97-45. ICS Audio Mute — Operational Check
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot and copilot
headsets.
CAUTION
6. Push in the PULL/TEST knob on the VHF Comm
No. 2.
SELECT FREQUENCIES ON WHICH IT IS
97-43. ICS NAV 1 Switch — Operational Check PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
1. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON. PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.
2. Push in the PHONE NAV 1 pushbutton and tune
the VOR to a local VOR station.
CAUTION
3. Pull the PULL IDENT knob to hear the VOR tone
or voice identification. Adjust the volume to a
comfortable level. VHF COMM 1 AND VHF COMM 2 MUST
BE TUNED AT FREQUENCIES THAT ARE
RESULT: AT LEAST 6 MHZ APART. FOR EXAMPLE:
VHF COMM 1 IS TUNED AT 120.00 MHZ
• You hear the identification audio. AND VHF COMM 2 AT 126.00 MHZ.

4. Set the PHONE COMM 1 pushbutton to OFF. 1. Set all the pushbutton switches to OFF and turn
the rotary selector to the 1 position.
RESULT:
2. Set the VHF No. 1 and the VHF No. 2 to ON.
• You do not hear the audio from the VOR.
3. Push in the PHONE COM 1 pushbutton on the
97-44. ICS ADF Switch — Operational Check
audio panel.
1. Set the ADF receiver to ON.
4. Tune VHF No. 1 to a local VHF ground station.
2. Set the ADF/ANT button to the ANT mode.
5. Set the VHF No. 1 volume control to a
3. Push in the PHONE ADF pushbutton. comfortable level.

4. Tune the ADF to a local station. Adjust the 6. Momentarily key (transmit) VHF No. 2 with the
volume to a comfortable audio level. pilot trigger switch.

97-00-00
Page 42 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: 5. Adjust the volume of the VHF No. 1 transceiver to

a comfortable audio level.
• You do not hear the VHF No. 1 audio in the
pilot headset when VHF No. 2 transmits. 6. Push the VHF No. 1 control VOL/TEST switch
(squelch disable).
7. Momentarily key (transmit) VHF No. 2 with the
copilot trigger switch. RESULT:

• You hear receiver noise in the pilot headset.

RESULT:
7. Push the VHF No. 1 VOL/TEST control switch to
• You do not hear the VHF No. 1 audio in the restore squelch.
copilot headset when VHF No. 2 transmits.
8. Push and hold the pilot cyclic trigger switch to the
97-46. ICS Emergency Function — Operational second position (transmit).
Check
9. Speak into the microphone.

CAUTION RESULT:

• You hear the sidetone in the pilot headset.

TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE
AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING 10. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF and continue to speak
GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF into the microphone.
B AT T E R Y P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P
ELECTRICAL LOADS AND CHECK TIME
TO A MINIMUM. RESULT:

• You do not hear the audio (sidetone) in the

pilot headset when the VHF No. 1 is OFF.
CAUTION
11. Release the pilot trigger switch.

SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS

PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT 12. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT 13. Tune to a frequency for communication with the
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. local tower or with another licensed station.

1. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to ON. 14. Push the cyclic stick trigger to the second position
and speak to the tower or to the other licensed station.
2. Permit a 2-minute warmup period.
RESULT:

3. Turn the rotary selector switch on the ICS audio

• The audio received by the tower or the other
panel to the EMG position and set the volume (VOL)
aircraft is satisfactory. The audio you hear is
control to the mid position.
satisfactory.

4. Open the ICS PHONES and the ICS SPEAKER 15. Close the ICS PHONES and the ICS SPEAKER
circuit breakers (2301CB2 and 2301CB1). circuit breakers (2301CB2 and 2301CB1).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 43
BHT-407-MM-11

97-47. ICS Priority — Operational Check • Volume control (VOL) to the mid position

• VOX control to the fully counterclockwise

CAUTION position

• All SPEAKER and PHONE switches to OFF

SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS (out position)
PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN • SPKR/AUTO switch to OFF (in position)
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.
• Microphone rotary selector to the 1 position

NOTE 2. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to

Two persons are necessary to do this the first position (ICS) and speak into the pilot
check. microphone.

1. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.

RESULT:

2. Tune VHF No. 1 to a permitted frequency.

• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot,
copilot, and aft headsets.
3. Set all PHONE and SPEAKER switches on the
audio panel to the OFF positions.
• You do not hear the microphone audio in the
aft cabin speaker.
4. Set the volume controls to the mid positions.
3. Push the copilot ICS foot switch and speak into
5. Set the rotary selector on the audio panel to the 1 the copilot microphone.
position.

6. Push and hold the pilot and copilot trigger RESULT:

switches to the second position. Speak into the pilot
and copilot microphones at the same time. • You hear the microphone audio in the copilot,
pilot, and aft headsets.
RESULT:
• You do not hear the microphone audio in the
• You only hear the microphone audio from the aft cabin speaker.
pilot position. Release the trigger switch.
4. If the copilot cyclic control stick is installed, push
7. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF. the copilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to the first
position and speak into the copilot microphone.
97-48. ICS (KMA 24H-71) (INSTALLATION WITH
THE AFT THREE OR FIVE STATION ICS) RESULT:
— OPERATIONAL CHECK
• You hear the microphone audio in the copilot,
Use the following operational check procedures if the
pilot, and aft headsets.
three or five position aft ICS kit is installed.

97-49. ICS Normal Mode — Operational Check • You do not hear the microphone audio in the
aft cabin speaker.
1. Set the ICS Mode selector to the NORMAL
position. Set the switches on the ICS audio panel as 5. Push one of the drop cord switches and speak
follows: into the related microphone.

97-00-00
Page 44 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: 5. Set the rotary control to the 1 position and listen

for radio reception or radio background noise. To
• You hear the microphone audio in the copilot, disengage the squelch, pull out the PULL/TST knob
pilot, and aft headsets. on the VHF COM No. 1 receiver.

• You do not hear the microphone audio in the 6. Push the pilot cyclic stick trigger switch to the
aft cabin speaker. second position (radio transmit) and speak into the
microphone.
6. Turn the VOX control fully clockwise to the HOT
MIC position and speak into any microphone. RESULT:

RESULT: • VHF No. 1 transceiver transmits and you hear

the sidetone in the pilot, copilot, and aft
• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot, headsets.
copilot, and aft headsets.
7. Push the copilot cyclic stick trigger switch to the
• The level of the audio you hear is satisfactory. second position (transmit) and speak into the
microphone.
7. Repeat step 6 for each of the other ICS stations.
RESULT:
8. Speak into a microphone and turn the volume
control.
• VHF No. 1 transceiver transmits. You hear the
sidetone in the copilot, pilot, and aft headsets.
RESULT:
8. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to OFF.
• The level of the audio changes in the pilot,
copilot, and aft headsets.
9. If the VHF No. 2 is installed, set the transceiver to
ON. Permit a 2-minute warmup period.
97-50. ICS Receiver and Transmitter (NORMAL
Mode) — Operational Check

CAUTION
CAUTION
SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS
SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.
10. Tune the VHF No. 2 transceiver to an approved
1. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to ON. Tune the frequency.
VHF No. 1 transceiver to an approved frequency.
11. Listen for radio reception or radio background
2. Permit a 2-minute warmup period. noise. To disengage the squelch, pull out the PULL/
TST knob on the VHF COMM No. 2 receiver.
3. On the audio panel, set all SPEAKER and
PHONE switches to OFF. RESULT:

4. Set the volume control to the middle position. • You hear audio or background noise.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 45
BHT-407-MM-11

12. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to 97-53. ICS COMM 2 Switch (NORMAL Mode) —
the second position (transmit) and speak into the Operational Check
microphone.
1. Set the VHF COM No. 2 to ON.
RESULT:
2. Set the rotary selector to the 5 position and push
• VHF No. 2 transceiver transmits and you hear in the PHONE COM 2 pushbutton.
the sidetone in the pilot, copilot, and aft
headsets. 3. Pull the PULL/TEST knob on the VHF COMM
No. 2 to OFF to disable the squelch.
13. Push the copilot cyclic control stick trigger switch
to the second position (transmit) and speak into the RESULT:
microphone.
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot, copilot,
RESULT: and aft headsets.

• The VHF No. 2 transceiver transmits and you 4. Adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
hear sidetone in the copilot, pilot, and aft
headsets. 5. Set the PHONE COM 2 pushbutton to OFF (out
position).
14. Set the VHF No. 2 transceiver to OFF.
6. Push in the PULL/TEST knob on VHF COMM
97-51. ICS (KMA 24H-71) MIXING SWITCHES No. 2.
(NORMAL MODE) — OPERATIONAL
CHECKS
7. Set the VHF COMM No. 2 to OFF.
97-52. ICS COMM 1 Switch (NORMAL Mode) —
Operational Check 97-54. ICS NAV 1 Switch (NORMAL Mode) —
Operational Check
1. On the audio panel, set all the SPEAKER and
PHONE pushbutton switches to the OFF positions. 1. Set the VHF NAV/COMM No. 1 transceiver to
ON.
2. Set the rotary selector to the 5 position and push
in the PHONE COM 1 pushbutton. 2. Push in the PHONE NAV 1 pushbutton and tune
the VOR to a local VOR station.
3. Adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
3. Pull the PULL IDENT knob to hear the VOR tone
or voice identification and adjust the volume to a
4. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to ON. comfortable level.

5. Pull the VOL/TST knob on the VHF No. 1 to OFF RESULT:

to disable the squelch.
• You hear the identification audio in the pilot,
RESULT: copilot, and aft headsets.

• You hear receiver noise in the pilot, copilot, 4. Set the PHONE COM 1 pushbutton to OFF.
and aft headsets.
RESULT:
6. Set the PHONE COM 1 pushbutton to OFF.
• You do not hear the audio from the VOR.
7. Push in the VOL/TST knob.
5. Set the VHF NAV/COMM No. 1 transceiver to
8. Set VHF COMM No. 1 to OFF. OFF.

97-00-00
Page 46 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-55. ICS ADF Switch (NORMAL Mode) — 5. Tune the ADF to a local ground station and adjust
Operational Check the volume to a comfortable level.

1. Set the ADF receiver to ON. 6. Momentarily key (transmit) VHF No. 1 with the
pilot trigger switch.
2. Set the ADF to the ANT mode with the ADF/ANT
button.
RESULT:

3. Push in the PHONE ADF pushbutton, tune the • You do not hear the ADF audio when VHF
ADF to a local station, and adjust the volume to a No. 1 transmits.
comfortable audio level.

7. Momentarily key (transmit) VHF No. 1 with the

RESULT: copilot trigger switch.

• You hear the ADF audio in the pilot, copilot,

and aft headsets. RESULT:

4. Set the PHONE ADF pushbutton on the audio • You do not hear the ADF audio when VHF
panel to OFF (out position). No. 1 transmits.

RESULT: 8. Set the ADF to OFF and set the VHF No. 1 to
OFF.
• You do not hear the audio from the ADF
station. 97-57. ICS Emergency Function (NORMAL Mode)
— Operational Check
5. Set the ADF receiver to ON.

97-56. ICS Audio Muting Check (NORMAL Mode)

CAUTION
— Operational Check

SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS

CAUTION PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.
PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
CAUTION
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.

1. Set all the pushbutton switches to OFF and turn USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT
the rotary selector to the 1 position. DURING GROUND MAINTENANCE
C H E C K S T O AV O I D B AT T E R Y
2. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON and set the ADF to ON. DEPLETION. IF BATTERY POWER IS
USED, KEEP ELECTRICAL LOADS AND
3. Set the ADF to the ANT mode with the ADF/ANT CHECK TIME TO A MINIMUM.
button.
1. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to ON.
4. Push in the PHONE ADF pushbutton on the
audio panel. 2. Permit a 2-minute warmup period.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 47
BHT-407-MM-11

3. Turn the rotary selector switch on the ICS audio RESULT:

panel to the EMG position. Set the volume (VOL)
control to the mid position. • The audio received by the tower or the other
station is satisfactory. The audio you hear is
4. Open the ICS PHONES and the ICS SPEAKER satisfactory.
circuit breakers (2301CB2 and 2301CB1).
15. Close the ICS PHONES and the ICS SPEAKER
circuit breakers (2301CB2 and 2301CB1).
5. Pull the VHF No. 1 control PULL/TST switch to
disable the squelch.
16. Push the copilot trigger switch to the second
position and speak into the copilot microphone.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot headset.
• You hear the microphone audio (sidetone) in
6. Adjust the volume of VHF No. 1 transceiver to a the pilot and copilot headsets.
satisfactory audio level.
17. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver control to OFF.
7. Push the VHF No. 1 PULL/TST control switch to
restore squelch. 97-58. ICS Priority (NORMAL Mode) —
Operational Check

8. Push and hold the pilot cyclic trigger switch to the

second position (transmit).
CAUTION
9. Speak into the microphone.
SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS
RESULT: PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
• You hear the sidetone in the pilot headset PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
only. IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.

10. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF and continue to speak NOTE
into the microphone. Two persons are necessary to do this
check.
RESULT:
1. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.
• You do not hear the audio (sidetone) in the
pilot headset when the VHF No. 1 is OFF. 2. Tune VHF No. 1 to a permitted frequency.

11. Release the pilot trigger switch. 3. Set the rotary selector switch on the ICS audio
panel to the 1 position.

12. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.

4. Set all the PHONE and SPEAKER pushbutton
switches on the audio panel to OFF.
13. Tune to a frequency for communication with the
local tower or with another licensed station. 5. Set the volume control on the audio panel to the
mid position.
14. Push the cyclic control stick trigger switch to the
second position and speak to the tower or to the other 6. Push the pilot and copilot cyclic control stick
licensed station. trigger switches to the second position (transmit) at the

97-00-00
Page 48 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

same time and speak into the pilot and copilot 2. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to
microphones. the first position (ICS) and speak into the pilot
microphone.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• VHF No. 1 transceiver transmits the audio
from the pilot only. • You do not hear the audio from the pilot
microphone in the copilot headset, aft
7. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF. headsets, and aft speaker.

97-59. ICS Aft Cabin Audio (NORMAL Mode) — • You do not hear the microphone audio in the
Operational Check aft speaker.

1. Set the rotary selector switch to the PA position. 3. Push the copilot ICS trigger switch and speak into
the copilot microphone.
2. Push the pilot trigger switch to the second
position and speak into the pilot microphone.
RESULT:

RESULT:
• You hear the microphone audio in the copilot
and aft headsets.
• You hear the pilot from the aft cabin speaker.
• You do not hear the microphone audio in the
3. Push the copilot trigger switch to the second
pilot headset and aft cabin speaker.
position and speak into the copilot microphone.

4. Push one of the drop cord switches and speak

RESULT:
into the related microphone.
• You hear the copilot from the aft cabin
speaker. RESULT:

97-60. ICS (KMA 24H-71) ISOLATE MODE — • You hear the microphone audio in the copilot
OPERATIONAL CHECKS and aft headsets.

97-61. ICS Intercommunication (ISOLATE Mode) • You do not hear the microphone audio in the
— Operational Check pilot headset and aft cabin speaker.

1. Set the ICS mode selector switch to the ISOLATE 5. Repeat step 4 for each of the other aft ICS
position. Set the switches on the ICS audio panel as positions.
follows:
6. Push the copilot ICS foot switch and speak into
• Volume control (VOL) to the mid position the copilot microphone.

• VOX control to the fully counterclockwise

position RESULT:

• All SPEAKER and PHONE switches to the • You hear the microphone audio in the copilot
OFF position (out position) and aft headsets.

• SPKR/AUTO switch to the OFF position (in • You do not hear the microphone audio in the
position) pilot headset and aft cabin speaker.

• Microphone rotary selector switch to the 7. Turn the VOX control fully clockwise to the HOT
1 position MIC position and speak into the copilot microphone.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 49
BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: AT LEAST 6 MHZ APART. FOR EXAMPLE:

VHF COMM 1 IS TUNED AT 120.00 MHZ
• You do not hear the microphone audio in the AND VHF COMM 2 AT 126.00 MHZ.
pilot headset and aft speaker.
NOTE
• You hear the microphone audio in the copilot
and aft headsets. The copilot cannot transmit on the radios
when the ICS is in the ISOLATE mode.
8. Repeat step 7 for each of the other aft ICS
1. Set the VHF No. 1 and VHF No. 2 transceivers to
stations.
ON. Tune the VHF No. 1 and VHF No. 2 transceivers
to an approved frequency.
9. Speak into the pilot microphone.
2. Permit a 2-minute warmup period.
RESULT:
3. Set all SPEAKER and PHONE switches on the
• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot
audio panel to the OFF positions.
headset.

• You do not hear the microphone audio in the 4. Set the rotary control to the 1 position and listen
copilot headset, aft headsets, and aft cabin for radio reception or radio background noise.
speaker.
5. Push the pilot cyclic stick trigger switch to the
10. Speak into the pilot microphone and turn the second position (radio transmit) and speak into the
volume control. microphone.

RESULT: RESULT:

• The level of the audio changes when you turn • VHF No. 1 transceiver transmits and you hear
the volume control. the sidetone in the pilot headset.

97-62. ICS Transmit Position (ISOLATE Mode) — • You do not hear the microphone audio in the
Operational Check copilot and aft headsets.

6. If the VHF No. 2 is installed, set the rotary

selector switch on the ICS audio panel to the
CAUTION 2 position.

MAKE SURE THE VHF COMM 1 AND VHF 7. Push the pilot cyclic stick trigger switch to the
COMM 2 TRANSCEIVERS ARE TUNED second position (transmit) and speak into the
TO FREQUENCIES ON WHICH IT IS microphone.
PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN RESULT:
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. • VHF No. 2 transceiver transmits and you hear
the microphone audio in the pilot headset.

CAUTION • You do not hear the microphone audio in the

copilot and aft headsets.

VHF COMM 1 AND VHF COMM 2 MUST 8. Set the VHF No. 1 and VHF No. 2 transceivers to
BE TUNED AT FREQUENCIES THAT ARE OFF.

97-00-00
Page 50 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-63. ICS (KMA 24H-71) MIXING SWITCHES 4. Adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
(ISOLATE MODE) — OPERATIONAL
CHECKS 5. Set the PHONE COM 2 pushbutton to ON (in
position).
97-64. ICS COMM 1 Switch (ISOLATE Mode) —
Operational Check 6. Set the rotary selector switch to the 1 position.

1. Set all the SPEAKER and PHONE pushbutton

RESULT:
switches on the audio panel to off.
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot headset
2. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON. only.

3. Set the rotary selector switch to the 1 position. 7. Push in the PULL/TEST knob on VHF COMM
No. 2.
4. Pull the PULL/TST knob (volume) on the VHF
No. 1 to OFF to disable the squelch. 8. Set the VHF COM No. 2 to OFF.

RESULT: 97-66. ICS NAV 1 Switch (ISOLATE Mode) —

Operational Check
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot headset
only. 1. Set the VHF NAV/COMM No. 1 transceiver to
ON.
5. Adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
2. Push in the PHONE NAV 1 pushbutton and tune
6. Set the PHONE COM 1 pushbutton to ON (in the VOR to a local VOR station.
position).
3. Pull the PULL IDENT knob to hear the VOR tone
7. Set the rotary selector switch to the 2 position. or voice identification and adjust the volume to a
comfortable level.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot headset
only. • You hear the identification audio in the pilot
headset only.
8. Push in the PULL/TST knob.
4. Set the PHONE COMM 2 pushbutton to OFF.
9. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF.
RESULT:
97-65. ICS COMM 2 Switch (ISOLATE Mode) —
Operational Check • You do not hear the audio from the VOR.

1. Set VHF COM No. 2 to ON. 5. Set the VHF NAV/COM No. 1 transceiver to OFF.

2. Set the rotary selector switch to the 2 position. 97-67. ICS ADF Switch (ISOLATE Mode) —
Operational Check
3. Pull the PULL/TEST knob on the VHF COMM
No. 2 to OFF to disable the squelch. 1. Set the ADF receiver to ON.

RESULT: 2. Push in the PHONE ADF pushbutton.

• You hear receiver noise in the pilot headset 3. Set the ADF to the ANT mode with the ADF/ANT
only. button.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 51
BHT-407-MM-11

4. Tune the ADF to a local station. RESULT:

5. Set the volume to a comfortable audio level. • You do not hear the ADF audio when VHF
No. 1 transmits.
RESULT:
8. Momentarily key (transmit) VHF No. 1 with the
• You hear the ADF audio in the pilot headset copilot trigger switch.
only.
RESULT:
6. Set the PHONE ADF pushbutton on the audio
panel to OFF (out position). • You still hear the ADF audio when you push
the copilot trigger switch (copilot cannot
RESULT: transmit in the ISOLATE mode).

• You do not hear the audio from the ADF • You do not hear the audio from the copilot
station. microphone in the pilot headset.

7. Set the ADF receiver to OFF. • You do not hear the audio from the copilot
microphone in the aft headsets.
97-68. ICS Audio Muting (With the ICS in
ISOLATE Mode and ADF) — Operational 9. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to OFF. Set the
Check ADF receiver to OFF.

97-69. ICS Emergency Function (With the ICS in

ISOLATE Mode) — Operational Check
CAUTION

SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS CAUTION

PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING
GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF
1. Set all the pushbutton switches to OFF. Turn the B AT T E RY P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P
rotary selector switch to the 1 position. ELECTRICAL LOADS AND CHECK TIME
TO A MINIMUM.
2. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON. Set the ADF to ON.
1. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.
3. Push in the PHONE ADF pushbutton on the
audio panel. 2. Permit a 2-minute warmup period.

4. Tune the ADF to a local ground station. 3. Turn the rotary selector switch on the ICS audio
panel to the EMG position. Set the volume (VOL)
5. Set the ADF/ANT button to the ANT mode. control to the mid position.

6. Adjust the volume to a comfortable level in the 4. Open the ICS PHONES and the ICS SPEAKER
pilot headset. circuit breakers (2301CB2 and 2301CB1).

7. Momentarily key (transmit) VHF No. 1 with the 5. Adjust the volume of the VHF No. 1 transceiver to
pilot trigger switch. a satisfactory audio level.

97-00-00
Page 52 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

6. Pull the VHF No. 1 control PULL/TST switch to RESULT:

disable the squelch.
• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot
RESULT: headset only.

• You hear receiver noise in the pilot headset. 17. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to OFF.

7. Push the VHF No. 1 PULL/TST control switch to 97-70. ICS Aft Cabin Audio (With the ICS in
restore squelch. ISOLATE Mode and the PA) — Operational
Check
8. Push and hold the pilot cyclic control stick trigger
switch to the second position (transmit). 1. Set the rotary selector switch to the PA position.

9. Speak into the microphone. 2. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to
the second position and speak into the pilot
microphone.
RESULT:

• You hear the sidetone in the pilot headset RESULT:

only.
• You hear the microphone audio in the aft cabin
10. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF and continue to speak speaker.
into the microphone.
3. Push the copilot cyclic control stick trigger switch
to the second position and speak into the copilot
RESULT:
microphone.
• You do not hear the microphone audio
(sidetone) in the pilot headset when the VHF RESULT:
No. 1 is OFF.
• You hear the microphone audio in the aft cabin
11. Release the pilot cyclic control stick trigger speaker.
switch.
97-71. ICS (KMA 24H-71) (PRIVATE MODE) —
OPERATIONAL CHECKS
12. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.
97-72. ICS Intercommunication (PRIVATE Mode)
13. Tune to a frequency for communication with the — Operational Check
local tower or with another licensed station.
1. Set the ICS mode selector switch to the PRIVATE
14. Push the cyclic control stick trigger switch to the position. Set the switches on the ICS audio panel as
second position and speak into the pilot microphone. follows:

RESULT: • Volume control (VOL) to the mid position

• The audio received by the tower or other • VOX control fully counterclockwise
licensed station is satisfactory. The audio you
hear is satisfactory. • All SPEAKER and PHONE switches to OFF
(out position)
15. Close the ICS PHONES and the ICS SPEAKER
circuit breakers (2301CB2 and 2301CB1). • SPKR/AUTO switch to OFF (in position)

16. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to • Microphone rotary selector switch to the
the second position and speak into the microphone. 1 position

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 53
BHT-407-MM-11

TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
NOTE
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
The HOT MIC function is automatically IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.
activated when you set the ICS mode
selector switch to the PRIVATE position. 1. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to ON. Tune the
VHF No. 1 transceiver to an approved frequency.
2. Speak into the pilot microphone.
2. Permit a 2-minute warmup period.
RESULT:
3. Set all SPEAKER and PHONE switches on the
• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot
audio panel to OFF.
and copilot headsets.

• You do not hear the microphone audio in the 4. Set the rotary selector switch to the 1 position
aft headsets and aft cabin speaker. and listen for radio reception or radio background
noise.
3. Speak into the copilot microphone.
5. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to
RESULT: the second position (radio transmit) and speak into the
microphone.
• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot
and copilot headsets. RESULT:

• You do not hear the microphone audio in the • VHF No. 1 transceiver transmits and you hear
aft headsets and cabin speaker. the microphone audio in the pilot and copilot
headsets.
4. Speak into one of the aft microphones.
• You do not hear the microphone audio in the
RESULT: aft headsets and the speaker.

• You hear the microphone audio in each of the 6. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver to OFF.
aft headsets.
7. If the VHF No. 2 transceiver is installed, set the
• You do not hear the microphone audio in the
VHF No. 2 transceiver to ON.
pilot and copilot headsets.

5. Speak into one of the aft microphones and turn 8. Set the rotary selector switch on the ICS audio
the volume control. panel to the 2 position.

RESULT: 9. Permit a 2-minute warmup period.

• Only the level of the audio in each of the aft 10. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to
headsets changes. the second position (transmit) and speak into the pilot
microphone.
97-73. ICS Transmit Position (PRIVATE Mode) —
Operational Check RESULT:

• VHF No. 2 transceiver transmits and you hear

CAUTION the microphone audio in the pilot and copilot
headsets.

SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS • You do not hear the microphone audio in the
PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT aft headsets and aft speaker.

97-00-00
Page 54 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

11. Push the copilot cyclic control stick trigger switch 9. Set the PHONE COM 1 pushbutton to OFF (out
to the second position (transmit) and speak into the position).
copilot microphone.
10. Set the VHF COMM No. 1 to OFF.
RESULT:
97-76. ICS COMM 2 Switch (PRIVATE Mode) —
• The VHF No. 2 transceiver transmits and you Operational Check
hear the microphone audio in the pilot and
copilot headsets. 1. Set the VHF COMM No. 2 to ON.

• You do not hear the microphone audio in the 2. Set the rotary selector switch to the 2 position.
aft headsets and aft speaker.
3. Pull the PULL/TST knob (volume) on the VHF
12. Set the VHF No. 2 transceiver to OFF. No. 2 to OFF to disable the squelch.

97-74. ICS (KMA 24H-71) MIXING SWITCHES RESULT:

(PRIVATE MODE) — OPERATIONAL
CHECKS • You hear receiver noise in the pilot and copilot
headsets only.
97-75. ICS COMM 1 Switch (PRIVATE Mode) —
Operational Check 4. Adjust the volume to a comfortable level.

1. Set all the SPEAKER and PHONE pushbutton 5. Set the rotary selector switch to the 1 position.
switches on the audio panel to OFF (out position).
6. Set the PHONE COMM 2 pushbutton to ON (in
2. Set the VHF COMM No. 1 to ON. position).

3. Set the rotary selector switch to the 1 position. RESULT:

4. Pull the PULL/TST knob (volume) on the VHF • You hear receiver noise in the pilot and copilot
No. 1 to OFF to disable the squelch. headsets.

7. Push in the PULL/TEST knob on VHF COMM

RESULT: No. 2.

• You hear receiver noise in the pilot and copilot

8. Set the PHONE COMM 2 pushbutton to OFF (out
headsets only.
position).

5. Adjust the volume for a comfortable level.

9. Set the VHF COMM No. 2 to OFF.

6. Set the rotary selector switch to the 2 position.

97-77. ICS NAV 1 Switch (PRIVATE Mode) —
Operational Check
7. Set the PHONE COM 1 pushbutton to ON (in
position). 1. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.

RESULT: 2. Push in the PHONE NAV 1 pushbutton and tune

the VOR to a local VOR station.
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot and copilot
headsets. 3. Pull the PULL IDENT knob to hear the VOR tone
or voice identification and adjust the volume to a
8. Push in the PULL/TST knob. comfortable level.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 55
BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: 6. Set the PHONE ADF pushbutton to OFF (out

position).
• You hear the identification audio in the pilot
and copilot headsets only. 7. Set the ADF receiver to OFF.

4. Set the PHONE COM 2 pushbutton to OFF.

97-79. ICS Audio Muting (PRIVATE Mode and
ADF) — Operational Check
RESULT:

• You do not hear the audio from the VOR.

CAUTION
5. Push in the PULL IDENT knob on VHF No. 1.
SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS
6. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF. PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
97-78. ICS ADF Switch (PRIVATE Mode) — PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
Operational Check IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.

1. Set all the pushbutton switches to OFF and turn

the rotary selector switch to the 1 position.
CAUTION
2. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.
SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS
PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT 3. Set the ADF to ON.
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. 4. Push in the PHONE ADF pushbutton on the
audio panel.
1. Set the ADF receiver to ON.
5. Tune the ADF to a local ground station and adjust
2. Push in the PHONE ADF pushbutton. the volume to a comfortable level.

3. Set the ADF to the ANT mode with the ADF/ANT RESULT:
button.
• You hear the audio in the pilot and copilot
4. Tune the ADF to a local station and adjust the headsets.
volume to a comfortable audio level.
• You do not hear audio in the aft headsets.
RESULT:
6. Momentarily key (transmit) VHF No. 1 with the
• You hear the ADF audio in the pilot and copilot pilot trigger switch.
headsets only.
RESULT:
5. Set the PHONE ADF pushbutton on the audio
panel to OFF (out position). • You do not hear the ADF in the pilot headset
when you push the pilot trigger switch to the
RESULT: second position.

• You do not hear the audio from the ADF 7. Momentarily key (transmit) VHF No. 1 with the
station. copilot trigger switch.

97-00-00
Page 56 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: 7. Pull the VHF No. 1 control PULL/TST switch to

disable the squelch.
• You do not hear the ADF in the copilot
headset when you push the copilot trigger RESULT:
switch to the second position.
• You hear receiver noise in the pilot headset
8. Set the PHONE ADF pushbutton to OFF (out only.
position).
8. Push the VHF No. 1 PULL/TST control switch to
9. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF. restore squelch.

10. Set the ADF to OFF. 9. Push and hold the pilot cyclic control stick trigger
switch to the second position (transmit).
97-80. ICS Emergency Function (PRIVATE Mode)
— Operational Check 10. Speak into the microphone.

RESULT:
CAUTION
• You hear the sidetone in the pilot headset
only.
SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS
PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT 11. Set the VHF No. 1 to OFF and continue to speak
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN into the microphone.
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. RESULT:

• You do not hear the microphone audio

CAUTION (sidetone) in the pilot headset when the VHF
No. 1 is OFF.

TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE 12. Release the pilot cyclic control switch trigger
AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING switch.
GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF
B AT T E R Y P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P 13. Set the VHF No. 1 to ON.
ELECTRICAL LOADS AND CHECK TIME
TO A MINIMUM. 14. Tune to a frequency for communication with the
local tower or with another licensed station.
1. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver control to ON.
15. Push the cyclic control stick trigger switch to the
2. Permit a 2-minute warmup period. second position and speak into the pilot microphone.

3. Tune VHF No. 1 to a permitted frequency. RESULT:

4. Turn the rotary selector switch on the ICS audio • The audio received by the tower or other
panel to the EMG position. Set the volume (VOL) station is satisfactory. The audio you hear is
control to the mid position. satisfactory.

5. Open the ICS PHONES and the ICS SPEAKER 16. Close the ICS PHONES and the ICS SPEAKER
circuit breakers (2301CB2 and 2301CB1). circuit breakers (2301CB2 and 2301CB1).

6. Adjust the volume of VHF No. 1 transceiver to a 17. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to
satisfactory audio level. the second position and speak into the microphone.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 57
BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: RESULT:

• You hear the microphone audio in the pilot

• You hear the microphone audio in the aft cabin
and copilot headsets.
speaker.
18. Set the VHF No. 1 transceiver control to OFF.
3. Push the copilot cyclic control stick trigger switch
97-81. ICS Aft Cabin Audio (PRIVATE Mode) — to the second position and speak into the copilot
Operational Check microphone.

1. Set the rotary selector switch to the PA position.

RESULT:
2. Push the pilot cyclic control stick trigger switch to
the second position and speak into the pilot • You hear the microphone audio in the aft cabin
microphone. speaker.

97-00-00
Page 58 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155/165) / COMM (KY-196A) SYSTEM

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-82. VHF SYSTEM audio from the VHF signal. The name of this audio
signal is sidetone. The detector inside the transceiver
If installed, the VHF system can consist of one or two supplies the sidetone to the pilot or copilot headsets
systems. A NAV/COMM system (KX-155/165) through the ICS system. The sidetone gives an
(Figure 97-11) and/or a communication system indication that the VHF COM operates correctly.
(KY-196A) (Figure 97-12) can be installed. The VHF
system permits the flight crew to communicate with The VHF COM radio signals have amplitude
other stations such as ATC or other aircraft and to modulated Very High Frequency (VHF) radio waves.
receive VOR/LOC and glideslope navigation signals. VHF radio waves can only communicate with other
stations that are in their line of sight. Line of sight
97-83. VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155/165) / VHF transmissions at low altitude reduce the distance at
COMM (KY-196A) SYSTEM which communications are possible. This prevents
interferences from other stations that are below the
The VHF NAV/COMM system consists of the horizon and hundreds of miles away.
following:
The duty cycle of the KX-155/KX-165 transceiver is
• One transceiver (KX-155) or transceiver 10%, 4.5 minutes receive and 0.5 minutes transmit.
(KX-165) (2303TR1) (Figure 97-11) The specified minimum power output is 10 watts.

• Two navigation antennas (2303E2 and

The basic functions of the VOR are as follows:
2303E3) (Figure 97-4)

• One communication antenna (2303E1) • To give an indication of the helicopter position

(Figure 97-4) with reference to a VOR ground station

The NAV/COMM transceiver (KX-155 or KX-165) is • To show the flight crew how to follow a given
installed in the center pedestal. The transceiver path to or from the ground station
permits the following:
The VOR shows when the helicopter is on the
• Communication from 118.000 to 136.975 selected VOR radial or which radial it is on. The VOR
Megahertz (MHz) in 25 Kilohertz (kHz) ground station supplies two signals. The phase
increments (760 channels) difference between the two signals changes as the
position relative to the station changes. The VOR
• Navigation reception from 108.00 to 117.95 receiver uses the phase difference of the two signals it
MHz in 50 kHz increments (200 channels) receives to find the radial to the VOR ground station.
The VOR ground station makes one non-directional
• Optional reception of glideslope signals from reference signal. This non-directional reference signal
329.15 to 335.00 MHz in 150 kHz increments has the same phase in all directions. The second
(40 channels) signal has a phase that is different in different
directions. The phase of the variable phase signal is
The VHF COM transceiver internally makes a VHF the same as the reference signal at the 0° radial
signal and makes a combination of that VHF signal (North). As the angle from the 0° radial increases, the
with the audio from the pilot or copilot microphone. phase between the variable phase signal and the
The transceiver receives the microphone audio signal non-directional phase signal increases. The phase
through the ICS system. The VHF COM transceiver difference between the two signals is the same as the
supplies the signal combination to the external VHF angle between the radial that the helicopter is on and
COM antenna. the 0° radial. If the helicopter is on the 90° radial for
example, the variable phase signal is 90° behind the
A circuit inside the transceiver samples the VHF signal non-directional phase signal. Figure 97-13 shows the
before it goes to the antenna. That circuit detects the pattern of a VOR field.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 59
BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 TRQ 10
D S R 1000
FEE
FEE
T

2 40 T N 1000
0

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299

SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5

L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7

T
6

E
R E C
16 5
2 4 9
12
FUEL
AMPS
3
MGT
PSI 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120
NP GS
15 21 GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0

12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110

24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN

E
30

T
100

W
5 3
1 2

6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV

30
7 90
6 9
R

3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL
8 3 NG KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
W

6
30
FWD TANK
3

FADEC 2 MIN TURN

12 15
15
20
24

OVSPD HORN 10
W

E
6

8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

6
OIL ~C 10
OIL ~C 10 MODE

12
PSI PSI
24

ON
E

10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5 15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

COMM ACTIVE NAV ACTIVE

FREQUENCY WINDOW COMM STANDBY FREQUENCY WINDOW NAV STANDBY
FREQUENCY WINDOW FREQUENCY WINDOW

COMM FREQUENCY NAV FREQUENCY

TRANSFER BUTTON LOCK SCREW NAV FREQUENCY CONTROLS
TRANSFER BUTTON
ON/OFF
VOLUME CONTROL COMM FREQUENCY NAV IDENT
CONTROLS KNOB

407_MM_97_0011

Figure 97-11. VHF NAV/COMM Transceiver (KX-155/165) — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
Page 60 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3
TRQ 10
D S R 1000
FEE
FEE
T

2 40 T N 1000
0

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E M 299

SELECT CONTROL 12 120 1010

S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5

L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7

T
6

E
R E C
16 5
2 4 9
12
FUEL
AMPS
3
MGT
PSI 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120
NP GS
15 21 GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0

12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110

24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN

E
30

T
100

W
5 3
1 2

6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV

30
7 90
6 9

R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL
8 3 NG KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3

6
30
FWD TANK

3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
24
OVSPD HORN 10

E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

6
OIL ~C 10
OIL ~C 10 MODE

12
PSI PSI

24
ON

E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5 15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

LOCKING SCREW
ACTIVE WINDOW
FREQUENCY CONTROL KNOB
STANDBY WINDOW

FREQUENCY TRANSFER BUTTON VOLUME CONTROL

CHANNEL SELECTOR

407_MM_97_0012

Figure 97-12. VHF COMM Transceiver (KY-196A) — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 61
BHT-407-MM-11

MAGNETIC NORTH

0° RADIAL

9960 Hz
ROTATING FIELD SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY
(30 REVOLUTIONS EACH SECOND) MODULATED AT 30 Hz

VARIABLE
PHASE
SIGNAL

90°
RADIAL

270°
RADIAL

REFERENCE
PHASE
SIGNAL

180°
RADIAL

407_MM_97_0013

Figure 97-13. VOR Field Pattern

97-00-00
Page 62 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

The 30 Hz (reference and variable signals) modulate (in normal approach and seen from the helicopter) is
the RF signal. The RF signal is necessary to make amplitude modulated at 90 Hz, while the pattern to the
transmission and reception possible. The VOR right is modulated at 150 Hz. Figure 97-14 shows the
receiver must isolate the 30 Hz reference and variable patterns for the localizer and glideslope fields. It also
signals from the RF carrier and compare the phase of shows the results on the indicators that are caused by
the two signals. The phase difference is shown on the the position of the helicopter inside the patterns (not to
CDI or HSI. The VOR also transmits a voice or Morse scale).
code identification. Each VOR ground station has a
different identification.
The ratio of 90 Hz to 150 Hz signals depends on the
position of the helicopter inside the two patterns. If the
Radiation from two ground antennas on the ground helicopter is in a perfect approach (in-line with the
make the VOR electromagnetic field. The two center of the runway), the two signals have the same
antennas radiate at the same carrier frequency. The strength and no deviation is shown by the deviation
first antenna radiates a carrier that it modulates in bar. If the 90 Hz signal is stronger, the deviation bar
amplitude. The frequency of the signal changes from shows the pilot that he is at the left of the runway. If the
9480 Hz to 10440 Hz and back to 9480 Hz 30 times 150 Hz signal is stronger, the deviation needle shows
each second (a 9960 Hz subcarrier amplitude an approach to the right of the runway (Figure 97-14).
modulates the RF carrier and a 30 Hz signal frequency
modulates the 9960 Hz subcarrier).
The glideslope receiver can receive 40 channels from
329.15 MHz to 335.00 MHz (150 kHz spacing). The
The second antenna makes a dipole field that turns glideslope frequencies are paired with localizer
30 times each second. The dipole field makes a frequencies. When the flight crew selects a localizer
figure 8 pattern (two lobes). The RF voltages in the frequency, the glideslope automatically tunes to the
two lobes are 180° out of phase. The RF in one of the correct (or paired) frequency. Table 97-7 shows the
lobes is in phase with the RF of the non-directional localizer and glideslope frequency pairs.
VOR field. The figure 8 pattern reinforces the
non-directional pattern on one side. This results in a
The glideslope receiver is not used with the
cardioid field pattern which turns at the rate of 30
transceiver (KX-155) because it cannot be interfaced
revolutions each second (the rate at which the dipole
to the optional navigation indicator (HSI) (KI-525A)
antenna turns) (Figure 97-13).
and because the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
(KI-208) does not have a glideslope needle. The
A helicopter inside the VOR field pattern receives an transceiver (KX-165) could have the optional
RF carrier with an amplitude that changes at the rate glideslope receiver. The optional glideslope antenna
of 30 times each second. The amplitude changes and navigation indicator (HSI) (KI-525A) must be
30 times each second because of the rotation of the installed to use the optional glideslope receiver of the
cardioid pattern. The VOR ground station also transceiver (KX-165).
modulates the amplitude of the carrier at 9960 Hz. A
30 Hz (the reference) frequency modulates the
97-84. VHF NAV/COMM (K155/165) System —
9960 Hz signal.
Operation

If the receiver is tuned to an Instrument Landing

Display. The left side of the front panel consists of the
System (ILS) frequency, and the optional glideslope
COMM display and controls. The right side of the front
receiver is installed, the optional Course Deviation
panel consists of the display and controls for the NAV.
Indicator (CDI) (KI-208) can supply deviation
Figure 97-11 shows the controls of the VHF NAV/
indications. The localizer gives a visual indication of
COMM.
the position of the helicopter relative to a straight
approach line to the runway. The ground-based
localizer antenna system generates two lobe patterns: Power On. To energize the transceiver, the VOL
one lobe pattern is directed toward the right side of the control is turned clockwise from the OFF position. To
runway, the other to the left. The two patterns have the make sure the receiver operates or to adjust the
same carrier frequency but different audio modulated volume you can pull the VOL control to stop the
frequencies. The lobe pattern at the left of the runway squelch.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 63
BHT-407-MM-11

z
50 H
0 H z>1
9 z
= 90 H
150 Hz
1.4° z
150 Hz > 90 H

GLIDESLOPE 3°

RUNWAY
A B

LOCALIZER

150 Hz > 90 Hz A
3-6° 150 Hz = 90 Hz
90 Hz > 150 Hz B
RUNWAY
A B

407_MM_97_0014

Figure 97-14. ILS Field Patterns

97-00-00
Page 64 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Table 97-7. Localizer/Glideslope Frequency Pairs (MHz) (KX 155/165)

LOCALIZER GLIDESLOPE LOCALIZER GLIDESLOPE

108.10 334.70 110.10 334.40

108.15 334.55 110.15 334.25

108.30 334.10 110.30 335.00

108.35 333.95 110.35 334.85

108.50 329.90 110.50 329.60

108.55 329.75 110.55 329.45

108.70 330.50 110.70 330.20

108.75 330.35 110.75 330.05

108.90 329.30 110.90 330.80

108.95 329.15 110.95 330.65

109.10 331.40 111.10 331.70

109.15 331.25 111.15 331.55

109.30 332.00 111.30 332.30

109.35 331.85 111.35 332.15

109.50 332.60 111.50 332.90

109.55 332.35 111.55 332.75

109.70 333.20 111.70 333.50

109.75 333.05 111.75 333.35

109.90 333.80 111.90 331.10

109.95 333.65 111.95 330.95

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 65
BHT-407-MM-11

Squelch. RF noise is always present in the air. The

circuit that stops the noise and lets the necessary CAUTION
signal pass through is called the squelch circuit. The
squelch is automatic but can be disabled if you pull the
PULL/TST knob on the transceiver. The squelch can SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS
be disabled to make sure the receiver operates or to PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT
hear weak signals. TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
PULL RAD Knob (KX-165 Only). The PULL RAD IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT.
knob is used to show the radial from the VOR station.
The radial from the station is shown in the standby 4. Set the rotary selector switch on the audio panel
window. to the 1 position and push in the PHONE COM 1
pushbutton.
Transmit Indicator. A letter T is shown between the
USE and STBY windows when in the transmit mode. 5. Adjust the volume control. Pull the volume control
to disengage the squelch and to hear audio noise.
Frequency Transfer Buttons. The KX-155/KX-165
has an active/standby frequency selection. The
6. Tune to a permitted frequency.
display shows two frequencies. The two frequencies
shown are the active frequency and the standby
(STBY) frequency. The standby frequency becomes 7. Make sure the frequency is shown in the USE
the active frequency (and the active frequency window.
becomes the standby frequency) if the frequency
transfer button is pushed. Figure 97-3 shows the 8. Push the trigger switch to the second position
controls of the transceivers. (radio transmit).

Frequency Control Knobs. The frequencies are

RESULT:
selected with the increment/decrement knobs. To
increment the frequency you turn the controls
clockwise. To decrement the frequency you turn the • A letter T is seen between the USE and STBY
controls counterclockwise. The larger knob is used to frequency indications.
change the standby frequency in 1 MHz increments.
The smaller knob is used to change the standby 9. Speak into the microphone.
frequency in 25 kHz (if control pulled out) or 50 kHz (if
control pushed in) increments. To tune to a frequency, RESULT:
do the steps that follow:
• You hear the sidetone (microphone audio) in
1. Select the frequency with the two frequency the headset. This confirms correct operation
control knobs. of the transmitter.

2. Make sure the correct frequency is shown in the 97-85. VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155) SYSTEM —
standby (STBY) window. VOR/LOC OPERATION

3. Push the transfer button. The NAV receiver controls are on the right portion of
the front panel. The NAV consists of a VOR/LOC
RESULT: receiver. Visual flight information is shown on the
optional Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) (KI-208).
• The STBY and USE frequencies interchange. The CDI does not have a glideslope needle.

Transmit. The only way to transmit on COMM 1 is with 97-86. VOR Receiver (KX-155) — Operation
the pilot or the copilot cyclic control stick trigger
switches. To transmit do the steps that follow: To use the VOR receiver do the steps that follow:

97-00-00
Page 66 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

1. Set the NAV/COMM receiver to the ON position transceiver (KX-155/165) can also display bearing and
with the volume control. signal validity information.

2. Tune to the necessary frequency with the two 97-89. VOR Receiver (KX-165) — Operation
frequency knobs. Transfer the frequency on the STBY
window to the USE window with the transfer button. To use the VOR receiver, do the steps that follow:

RESULT: 1. Set the NAV receiver to ON.

• The OFF indicator on the CDI is out of view. 2. Tune to the necessary frequency (on the STBY
window) with the two frequency knobs. Transfer the
3. Adjust the volume control and listen to the audio. frequency to the USE window with the transfer button.
Make sure the audio identification you hear is from the
correct VOR station. RESULT:

4. Turn the OBS control on the CDI to the necessary • The OFF flag (barber pole) is out of view.
radial. The radial selection is above the yellow triangle.
The CDI deviation needle is at the center.
3. Pull out the PULL IDENT control and turn it to
adjust the audio level.
97-87. Localizer Receiver (KX-155) — Operation
4. Listen to the audio. Make sure the audio
The Localizer (LOC) receiver receives electrical power identification you hear is from the correct VOR station.
automatically when the NAV receiver is tuned to an
Instrument Landing System (ILS) frequency. The CDI
OFF indicator is out of view when the LOC signal is 5. Turn the OBS control on the CDI to the necessary
satisfactory. To use the LOC receiver, do the steps that radial. The radial selection is above the yellow triangle.
follow: The CDI deviation needle is at the center.

1. Set the transceiver to ON. 6. Pull the PULL RAD knob to see the bearing from
the station in the STANDBY/RAD window. Dashes
(----) are shown if the signal is too weak.
2. Tune the NAV receiver to the ILS frequency (on
the STBY window). Transfer the frequency to the USE
window with the transfer button. 97-90. Localizer Receiver (KX-165) — Operation

RESULT: The Localizer (LOC) receiver receives electrical power

automatically when the NAV receiver is tuned to an
Instrument Landing System (ILS) frequency. The OFF
• The CDI OFF indicator is out of view if a LOC flag is out of view when the LOC signal is satisfactory.
signal is present. To use to LOC receiver do the steps that follow:

97-88. VHF NAV/COMM (KX-165) SYSTEM — 1. Set the transceiver to ON.

VOR/LOC/GLIDESLOPE OPERATION

2. Tune the NAV receiver to the ILS frequency on

The NAV receiver (KX-165) (Figure 97-11) controls are
the STBY window. Transfer the frequency to the USE
on the right portion of the front panel. The NAV
window with the transfer button.
consists of a VOR/LOC and glideslope receivers.
Visual flight information is shown on the optional CDI
(KI-208) (Figure 97-15) or navigation indicator (HSI) 3. Make sure the OFF flag on the CDI is out of view
(KI-525A) (Figure 97-16). The right window of the when a LOC signal is present.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 67
BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 TRQ 10
D S R 1000
FEE
FEE
T

2 40 T N 1000
0

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299
SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5

L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7

T
6

E
R E C
16 5
2 4 9
12
FUEL
AMPS
3
MGT
PSI 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120
NP GS
15 21 GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0

12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110

24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN

E
30

T
100

W
5 3
1 2

6
4 5 7 8 % RPM 40 NAV

30
6 9 90
R

3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL 8 3 NG
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
W

6
30
FWD TANK
3

FADEC 2 MIN TURN

12 15
15
24

20
OVSPD HORN 10
W

E
6

8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

6
OIL ~C 10 OIL ~C 10 MODE

12
PSI PSI
24

ON
E

10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5 15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

FROM INDICATION

TO INDICATION

OFF INDICATION

DEVIATION NEEDLE

COMPASS CARD

OMNI BEARING TO/FROM INDICATOR

SELECTOR

407_MM_97_0015

Figure 97-15. Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) (KI-208) (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
Page 68 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3
TRQ 10
D S R 1000
FEE
FEE
T

2 40 T N 1000
0

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299

SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5

L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7

T
6

E
R E C
16 5
2 4 9
12
FUEL
AMPS 8
3
2
MGT NR
PSI
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120
NP GS
15 21 GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0

12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110

24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN

E
30

T
100

W
5 3
1 2

6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV

30
7 90
6 9

R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL
8 3 NG KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3

6
30
FWD TANK

3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20
24

OVSPD HORN 10

E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

6 10
OIL ~C 10
OIL ~C MODE

12
PSI PSI

24
ON

E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5 15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

NAV WARNING FLAG

LUBBER LINE

HEADING WARNING FLAG

HEADING SELECT
MARKER SELECTED COURSE POINTER

TO-FROM INDICATOR
GLIDESLOPE POINTER

SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT
LATERAL DEVIATION BAR

HEADING SELECT KNOB

COURSE SELECT KNOB

COMPASS CARD RECIPROCAL COURSE POINTER

407_MM_97_0016

Figure 97-16. Navigation Indicator (HSI) (KI-525A) (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 69
BHT-407-MM-11

97-91. Glideslope Receiver (KX-165) (Optional) a. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access
— Operation hole in the front panel. Engage the locking screw.

The transceiver could have a glideslope receiver. The

glideslope antenna is combined with the LOC/VOR
CAUTION
antenna (Figure 97-4), and the navigation indicator
(HSI) (KI-525A) (Figure 97-16) must be installed to
use the glideslope receiver. The glideslope receiver
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW.
can receive 40 channels from 329.15 MHz to 335.00
MHz (150 kHz spacing). The glideslope receiver is b. Turn the locking screw clockwise until the rear
automatically turned on when the transceiver is tuned engages the rack.
to an ILS frequency. Glideslope deviation information
is shown on the optional navigation indicator (HSI), if
c. Continue to turn until the unit is locked into the
installed.
rack.
97-92. VHF NAV/COMM Transceiver (KX-155/165)
4. Return the helicopter to the standard
— Replacement
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

WARNING 97-93. VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155/165) SYSTEM —

COMPONENT REPLACEMENT

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS To replace an electrical component, refer to the
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.

1. Remove the VHF transceiver (Figure 97-11) as 97-94. VHF NAV/COMM SYSTEM (KX-155/165) —
follows: OPERATIONAL CHECKS

a. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access

hole in the front panel (Refer to Figure 97-11 for the SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
location of the access hole). Engage the locking
screw.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
b. Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until
the unit disengages from the rack. Bird Model 43 Wattmeter

c. Pull the unit out of the rack. Do the subsequent operational checks to make sure
the VHF NAV/COMM operates correctly. Do only the
2. Install the VHF transceiver as follows: checks applicable to the configuration of the system.
The VSWR check is necessary to make sure that the
3. Put the VHF transceiver into the rack. Push it in antenna is serviceable. The power check is necessary
until the front lock touches the rack. to make sure that the transceiver transmits correctly.

97-00-00
Page 70 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT:
97-95. VHF NAV/COMM (KX-155/165) System
Transceiver — Operational Check
• The wattmeter shows 8 watts or more.

9. Connect the wattmeter element so that the arrow

CAUTION points to the transmitter. Key the transmitter. Take a
note of the power indication.

TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE 10. Divide the first power indication (forward) by the
AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING second power indication (reflected).
GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF
B AT T E R Y P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P
RESULT:
ELECTRICAL LOADS AND CHECK TIME
TO A MINIMUM.
• The result is not less than 4 (the ratio of
1. On the ICS audio panel, push in the COM 1 forward-to-reflected power indication is not
switch. On the ICS audio panel, set the MIC switch to less than 4:1 or VSWR is 3:1 or less).
the 1 position. On the VHF NAV/COMM panel, set
COMM No. 1 to ON. Let the unit warm up for 11. Tune the radio to a frequency of 125.00 MHz.
2 minutes.
12. Key (transmit) the transmitter and take a note of
RESULT: the power indication.

• The display shows the STBY and USE RESULT:

frequencies.
• The wattmeter shows 8 watts or more.
2. Pull the volume control to disengage the squelch.
13. Connect the wattmeter element so that arrow
points to the transmitter. Key the transmitter and take a
RESULT: note of the power indication.

• You hear background noise. 14. Divide the first power indication (forward) by the
second power indication (reflected).
3. Adjust the volume control to a comfortable level.
RESULT:
4. Push the volume control in.
• The result is not less than 4 (the ratio of
RESULT: forward-to-reflected power indication is not
less than 4:1 or VSWR is 3:1 or less).
• The background noise stops.
15. Tune the radio to a frequency of 130.00 MHz.
5. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the antenna.
16. Key (transmit) the transmitter and take a note of
the power indication.
6. Connect the wattmeter between the antenna and
the coaxial cable. Connect the wattmeter so that the
RESULT:
arrow on the element points to the antenna.
• The wattmeter shows 8 watts or more.
7. Tune the radio to a frequency of 118.00 MHz.
17. Connect the wattmeter element so that the arrow
8. Key (transmit) the transmitter and take a note of points to the transmitter. Key the transmitter. Take a
the power indication. note of the power indication.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 71
BHT-407-MM-11

18. Divide the first power indication (forward) by the RECEIVER, THE N AV I G AT I O N
second power indication (reflected). ANTENNAS, AND THE CDI OPERATE.

RESULT: THIS CHECK DOES NOT VERIFY THE

C O R R E C T C A L I B R AT I O N O F T H E
• The result is not less than 4 (the ratio of NAVIGATION RECEIVER AND THE CDI.
forward-to-reflected power indication is not DO A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
less than 4:1 or VSWR is 3:1 or less). TO MAKE SURE THAT THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM OPERATES AT ITS SPECIFIED
19. Remove the wattmeter. Connect the coaxial cable ACCURACY.
to the antenna.
NOTE
20. Momentarily push the COMM 1 transfer switch to A known VOR station frequency,
transfer the desired frequency from the STBY window identification, and exact bearing must be
to the USE window. available to use this procedure.

RESULT: 1. Put the helicopter on a known radial to the VOR

station.
• The USE and the STBY windows interchange
each time you push the transfer switch.
2. Push in the PHONE NAV 1 switch on the ICS
audio panel.
21. Tune to an approved frequency.

3. Set the transceiver (KX-155/165) to ON.

22. Push the pilot cyclic stick trigger switch to the
second position.
RESULT:
23. Establish two-way communication with either the
local tower or with another licensed station. • The display shows the STBY and USE
frequencies.
RESULT:
4. Tune the NAV to the known VOR station
• The audio received by the tower or the other frequency.
station is satisfactory.
5. Make sure that the correct frequency is shown in
• The audio you hear is satisfactory and the the USE window.
volume control operates correctly.
6. Pull out the PULL IDENT control and turn it to
• You hear sidetone when in the transmit mode. adjust audio level.

97-96. VOR — Operational Check (Without Test

Equipment) RESULT:

Do this check if the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) • You hear the VOR audio identification.
(KI-208) is installed.
7. Listen to the voice or Morse code identification.
Make sure that the VOR station received is the known
VOR station.
CAUTION
RESULT:
THIS CHECK PROCEDURE IS TO MAKE
S U R E T H AT T H E N AV I G AT I O N • The OFF flag on the CDI is out of view.

97-00-00
Page 72 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

8. On the CDI, turn the OBS control until the RESULT:

deviation needle (vertical needle) is centered and the
TO/FROM indicator shows TO. • The CDI gives a bearing indication of the VOR
radial minus 10 ±2°.
RESULT:
13. Set the VHF NAV No. 1 transceiver OFF.

• The CDI bearing indication is within ±3° of the 14. Do this check if the navigation indicator (HSI)
known VOR radial. (KI-525A) is installed.

NOTE
To get the reciprocal bearing (radial), just CAUTION
add 180° to a bearing. For example the
reciprocal bearing of a VOR station at a
bearing of 90° is 90 + 180, or 270°. THIS CHECK PROCEDURE IS TO MAKE
S U R E T H AT T H E N AV I G AT I O N
RECEIVER, THE N AV I G AT I O N
NOTE ANTENNAS, AND THE CDI OPERATE.
10° left of a radial on a TO indication is the
THIS CHECK DOES NOT VERIFY THE
radial plus 10°. For example, if the
C O R R E C T C A L I B R AT I O N O F T H E
helicopter is located on the 0° radial and
NAVIGATION RECEIVER AND THE CDI.
the CDI shows a 10° left deviation (with a
DO A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
TO indication), the helicopter is on the 10°
TO MAKE SURE THAT THE NAVIGATION
radial.
SYSTEM OPERATES AT ITS SPECIFIED
ACCURACY.
9. On the CDI, turn the OBS control until the
reciprocal bearing is above the yellow triangle.
NOTE

RESULT: A known VOR station frequency,

identification, and exact bearing must be
available to use this procedure.
• The TO/FROM indicator shows FROM.
15. Put the helicopter on a known radial to the VOR
• The deviation needle moves full-scale right or station.
left and returns to the center.
16. On the ICS audio panel, push in the PHONE
10. On the CDI, turn the OBS control until the NAV 1 switch.
bearing (or radial) of the known VOR station is above
the yellow triangle. 17. Set the transceiver (KX-155/165) to ON.

11. On the CDI, turn the OBS control until the RESULT:
deviation needle shows full-scale left course deviation
(the needle moves to the right over the last dot). • The display shows the STBY and USE
frequencies.

RESULT: 18. Tune the NAV to the VOR station frequency.

• The CDI course pointer indication is the VOR 19. Make sure the correct frequency is shown in the
radial plus 10 ±2°. USE window.

12. On the CDI, turn the OBS control to get full-scale 20. Pull out the PULL IDENT control and turn it to
right course deviation (the needle moves to the left). adjust the audio level.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 73
BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: RESULT:

• You hear the VOR audio identification. • The HSI selected course pointer shows the
VOR radial plus 10 ±2°.
21. Listen to the voice or Morse code identification.
Make sure that the VOR station received is the known 26. On the HSI, turn the course select knob to get
VOR station. full-scale right course deviation (the needle moves to
the left).

RESULT: RESULT:

• The NAV flag on the HSI is out of view. • The HSI selected course pointer shows the
VOR radial minus 10 ±2°.
22. On the HSI, turn the course select knob until the
deviation needle is in the center and the TO/FROM 27. Set the VHF NAV No. 1 transceiver OFF.
indicator shows TO.
28. Return the helicopter to the standard
RESULT: configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
• The HSI selected course pointer shows the
VOR known radial ±3°. 97-97. VHF (KY-196A) COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM — DESCRIPTION

NOTE The VHF Communication VHF COMM permits the

10° left of a radial on a TO indication is the flight crew to communicate with other stations such as
radial plus 10°. For example, if the ATC or other aircraft. The COMM transceiver
helicopter is on the 0° radial and the HSI (KY-196A) (Figure 97-12) is a single VHF
shows a 10° left deviation (with a TO communication transceiver and is installed in the
indication), the helicopter is on the 10° center pedestal. The transceiver has a power output of
radial. 16 watts. The transceiver has an operating range of
118.00 Megahertz (MHz) to 135.975 MHz. The
23. On the HSI, turn the course select knob until the transceiver can store up to nine frequencies into a
VOR bearing (or radial) is under the reciprocal course non-volatile memory and has an active/standby
pointer. frequency selection. Frequency is changed in the
standby (STBY) window and then transferred to the
active (USE) window. The duty cycle of the transceiver
RESULT: is 1 minute ON, 4 minutes OFF. The system consists
of a transceiver and a communication antenna.
• The TO/FROM indicator shows FROM. Figure 97-12 shows the controls of the transceiver.

97-98. VHF COMM (KY-196A) SYSTEM —

• The deviation needle moves full-scale right or
OPERATION
left and returns to the center.

Display. The left window shows the active (USE)

24. Turn the HSI course select knob until the frequency (KY-196A) and the right window shows the
selected course pointer shows the bearing of the VOR standby (STBY) frequency.
station.
Power On. To energize the transceiver, the volume
25. Turn the HSI course select knob until the control (KY-196A) is turned clockwise from the OFF
deviation needle shows full-scale left course deviation position. To make sure the receiver operates or to
(the needle moves over the fifth dot on the right). The adjust the volume, you can pull the volume control
deviation scale is 2° per dot; full-scale deviation is 10°. (PULL TEST) out to disengage the squelch.

97-00-00
Page 74 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Squelch. RF noise is always present in the air. The 3. Push the transfer button (button with the two
circuit that stops the noise and lets the necessary arrows).
signal pass through is called the squelch circuit. The
squelch is automatic but can be disengaged (stopped) RESULT:
if you pull the volume control (PULL TEST) knob
(KY-196A) on the transceiver. The squelch can be • The STBY frequency becomes the USE
disengaged to make sure the receiver operates or to frequency and the USE frequency becomes
hear weak signals. the STBY frequency.

Transmit Indicator. A letter T is shown between the 97-101. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Channel
USE and STBY windows (KY-196A) when in the Mode — Operation
transmit mode.
The channel mode permits the operator to use a
CHAN Knob. The CHAN button (KY-196A) is frequency that is kept in memory. The memory can
momentarily pushed to go into the channel mode. If it hold up to nine frequencies. When the CHAN button
is pushed and held for 2 seconds, it goes into the (Figure 97-12) is pushed, the frequency control knobs
program mode. are used to scan the channels and frequencies that
are stored in memory. They are shown in the STBY
97-99. VHF COMM (KY-196A) — MODES OF window and must be transferred within 5 seconds: the
OPERATION transceiver stays in the channel mode for only 5
seconds if nothing occurs. To tune to a preset (or
The transceiver (KY-196A) (Figure 97-12) has five programmed) frequency do the steps that follow:
modes of operation. They include the following:
1. Make sure the transceiver is in the frequency
• Frequency mode mode.

• Channel mode 2. Push the CHAN button.

• Program mode RESULT:

• Program secure mode • The channel number of the programmed

frequency used previously is shown on the
• Direct tune mode display.

97-100. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Frequency • If there are no programmed channels, the
Mode — Operation transceiver automatically selects channel 1
and the STBY window shows dashes (----).
The frequency is selected with the two frequency
control knobs (Figure 97-12). To increment the 3. Turn one of the two frequency control knobs to
frequency you turn the knobs clockwise. To decrement scan through the programmed channels. Stop when
the frequency you turn the knobs counterclockwise. the correct channel is shown. If there are no
The larger knob is used to change the standby programmed channels, the STBY window shows
frequency in one MHz increments. The smaller knob is dashes (----) and does not change when the knob is
used to change the standby frequency in 25 kHz (if the turned.
knob is pulled out) or 50 kHz (if the knob is pushed in)
increments. To tune to a frequency, do the steps that 4. Push the transfer button (button with the two
follow: arrows).

1. Select the frequency with the two frequency RESULT:

control knobs.
• The channel frequency becomes the USE
2. Make sure the correct frequency is shown in the frequency and the USE frequency becomes
STBY window. the STBY frequency.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 75
BHT-407-MM-11

97-102. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Program

NOTE
Mode — Operation
Do this procedure in an avionics shop with
The program mode permits the operator to program the proper installation. The program secure
new channels or to change channel frequencies. To go pin (TP501) cannot be accessed with the
into the program mode, the CHAN button transceiver in its rack. For more data on this
(Figure 97-12) must be pushed and held for longer procedure, refer to the BENDIX/KING
than 2 seconds. To program a channel, do the steps installation manual for the transceiver
that follow: (KY-196A/197A).

1. Push and hold the CHAN button for more than 1. Remove the transceiver from the helicopter and
2 seconds. set it up in the proper installation in an avionics shop.

RESULT: 2. Push and hold the CHAN button for more than
2 seconds.
• The channel number flashes.
RESULT:
• The channel number changes if a frequency
control knob is turned. • The transceiver is in the program mode.

2. Turn the frequency control knobs until the 3. Turn the frequency control knobs until the
channel to be programmed (or changed) shows. channel that you want to lock, shows.

3. Push the transfer button. 4. Momentarily push the transfer button.

RESULT: RESULT:

• The frequency associated with the selected • The standby frequency display flashes.
channel flashes.
5. Turn the frequency control knobs to change the
4. Turn the frequency control knobs until the new frequency if required.
frequency shows.
6. Ground the program secure pin (TP501).
5. Push the transfer button.
7. Momentarily push the transfer button.
RESULT:
8. Remove the ground from the program secure pin
• The channel number flashes. You can (TP501).
program a new channel.
9. To de-program a locked channel, do the steps
97-103. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Program
that follow:
Secure Mode (Avionics Shop Only) —
Operation
a. Push and hold the CHAN button for more than
The program secure mode is used to lock a frequency 2 seconds.
into memory. A locked (or secured) frequency cannot
be changed by the flight crew and stays programmed b. The transceiver is in the program mode.
until it is unlocked. All the channels can be locked into
memory. You cannot do this procedure in the c. Turn the frequency control knobs until the
helicopter because you cannot access the program channel to be de-programmed shows.
secure pin (TP501) with the unit in its rack. To lock a
frequency, do the steps that follow: d. Ground the program secure pin (TP501).

97-00-00
Page 76 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

e. Momentarily push the transfer button. 4. Turn the frequency control knobs to set the
range. Refer to Table 97-8.
f. Remove the ground from the program secure
pin (TP501).
Table 97-8. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Display
g. Momentarily push the transfer button. Adjustment Ranges

MODE RANGE DESCRIPTION

97-104. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Direct Tune
Mode — Operation DA 1 1 to 8 Display brightness
(1= fast, 8 = slow)
The direct tune mode is entered from the standby DA 2 0 to 64 Response to dimmer
frequency entry mode or from the channel mode, photocell
when the transfer button is pushed for longer than (0 = dim, 64 = bright)
2 seconds. To change the frequency that shows in the
DA 3 0 to 255 Display age compensation
USE window, turn the frequency control knobs. To use
for brightness
the direct tune mode, do the steps that follow:
(0 = dim, 255 = bright)

1. Push and hold the transfer button for more than

2 seconds. 5. Momentarily push the CHAN button.

RESULT:
2. Turn the frequency control knobs to the
necessary frequency.
• The indication DA 2 replaces the indication
DA 1 in the USE window.
RESULT:

6. Turn the frequency control knobs to set the

• The frequency that shows in the USE window range.
changes.

7. Momentarily push the CHAN button.

97-105. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Display —
Adjustment
RESULT:
To set the display with the display adjust, do the steps
that follow: • The indication DA 3 replaces the indication
DA 2 in the USE window.

1. Push and hold the CHAN button.

8. Turn the frequency control knobs to set the
range.
RESULT:

9. Push the transfer button to exit the display adjust.

• The unit enters the program mode.

97-106. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System Transmit —

2. Push and hold the transfer button for more than Operation
2 seconds.

The only way to transmit on COMM 2 is with the pilot

3. The indication DA 1 replaces the frequency or the copilot trigger switch on the control sticks. To
indication in the USE window. transmit, do the steps that follow:

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 77
BHT-407-MM-11

location of the access hole). Engage the locking

screw.
CAUTION
b. Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until
the unit disengages from the rack.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSCEIVER IS
TUNED TO AN APPROVED FREQUENCY
c. Pull the unit out of the rack. Do not pull on the
BEFORE YOU TRANSMIT ON ANY
knob.
TRANSCEIVER.

1. Set the rotary selector switch on the audio panel 2. Install the transceiver as follows:
to the 2 position and push in the PHONE COM 2
pushbutton. a. Put the transceiver into the rack. Push it in
until the front lobe touches the rack.
2. Adjust the volume control. Pull the volume control
to disengage the squelch to hear audio noise. b. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access
hole in the front panel. Engage the locking screw.
3. Tune to an approved frequency.

4. Make sure the frequency shows in the USE CAUTION

window.

5. Push the trigger switch to the second position DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW.
(radio transmit).
c. Turn the locking screw clockwise until the rear
RESULT: lobe engages the rack.

• The letter T is shown in the display. d. Continue to turn the locking screw until the
unit is locked into the rack.
6. Speak into the microphone.
3. Return the helicopter to the standard
RESULT: configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
• Sidetone is heard in the headset.
97-108. VHF COMM (KY-196A) SYSTEM —
97-107. VHF COMM Transceiver (KY-196A) — COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
Replacement
To replace an electrical component, refer to the
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
WARNING Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 97-109. VHF COMM (KY-196A) System —
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR Operational Check
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
1. Remove the transceiver (Figure 97-12) as
follows:
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
a. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access
Bird Model 43 Wattmeter
hole in the front panel (Refer to Figure 97-12 for the

97-00-00
Page 78 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

7. Tune the radio to a frequency of 120.00 MHz.

CAUTION
8. Key (transmit) the transmitter.

TO AVOID BATTERY DEPLETION, USE RESULT:

AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT DURING
GROUND MAINTENANCE CHECKS. IF • The wattmeter shows 12 watts or more.
B AT T E R Y P O W E R I S U S E D , K E E P
ELECTRICAL LOADS AND CHECK TIME 9. Connect the wattmeter element so that the arrow
TO A MINIMUM. points to the transmitter. Key the transmitter. Note the
power indication.
1. On the ICS audio panel, push in the COM 2
switch. On the ICS audio panel, set the MIC switch to
10. Divide the first power indication (forward) by the
the 2 position. On the VHF NAV/COMM panel, set
second power indication (reflected).
COMM No. 2 to ON. Let the unit warm up for
2 minutes.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• The result is not less than 4 (the ratio of the
forward-to-reflected power indication is not
• The display shows the STBY and the USE
less than 4:1 or VSWR is 3:1 or less).
frequencies.
11. Connect the wattmeter between the antenna and
2. Pull the volume control to disengage the squelch.
coaxial cable so that the arrow on the element points
to the antenna.
RESULT:
12. Tune the radio to a frequency of 125.00 MHz.
• You hear background noise.
13. Key (transmit) the transmitter.
3. Adjust the volume control to a comfortable level.

RESULT:
4. Push the volume control in.
• The wattmeter shows 12 watts or more.
RESULT:
14. Connect the wattmeter element so that the arrow
• The background noise stops. points to the transmitter. Key the transmitter. Note the
power indication.
5. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the antenna.
15. Divide the first power indication (forward) by the
6. Connect the wattmeter between the antenna and second power indication (reflected).
the coaxial cable. Connect the wattmeter so that the
arrow on the element points to the antenna. RESULT:

• The result is not less than 4 (the ratio of the

CAUTION forward-to-reflected power indication is not
less than 4:1 or VSWR is 3:1 or less).

SELECT A FREQUENCY ON WHICH IT IS 16. Connect the wattmeter between the antenna and
PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. DO NOT the coaxial cable so that the arrow on the element
TRANSMIT IF A COMMUNICATION IS IN points to the antenna.
PROGRESS. LISTEN AND WAIT UNTIL IT
IS PERMITTED TO TRANSMIT. 17. Tune the radio to a frequency of 134.65 MHz.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 79
BHT-407-MM-11

18. Key (transmit) the transmitter. 97-110. VHF NAVIGATION ANTENNAS —

DESCRIPTION
RESULT:
The two optional navigation VOR/localizer/glideslope
• The wattmeter shows 12 watts or more. antennas (2303E3 and 2303E4) (Figure 97-4) are
mounted on the left and right sides of the fuselage.
19. Connect the wattmeter element so that the arrow The two antennas connect to the receiver through an
points to the transmitter. Key the transmitter. Note the antenna coupler. The two antennas are used by the
power indication. VOR/LOC and the glideslope receiver.

20. Divide the first power indication (forward) by the 97-111. VHF COMMUNICATION ANTENNA —
second power indication (reflected). DESCRIPTION

RESULT: The omnidirectional communication antenna for VHF

COMM 1 (2303E1) is installed on the front belly of the
• The result is not less than 4 (the ratio of the helicopter. The antenna for VHF COMM 2 (2303E2) is
forward-to-reflected power indication is not installed on the aft belly near the aft jack point.
less than 4:1 or VSWR is 3:1 or less). Figure 97-4 shows the location of the antennas.

21. Remove the wattmeter. Connect the coaxial cable 97-112. COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR
to the antenna. (KI-208) (CDI) — DESCRIPTION

22. Momentarily push the COMM transfer switch to The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) (KI-208)
transfer the desired frequency from the STBY window (2303DS1) (Figure 97-15) gives a visual indication of
to the USE window. course deviation from the selected bearing. The CDI
has a built-in VOR/LOC converter, blue-white lighting,
RESULT: an OFF flag, and a TO/FROM indicator. The CDI does
not have a glideslope needle.
• The USE and the STBY windows interchange
each time you push the COMM transfer Omni Bearing Selector (OBS). The OBS knob is
switch. used to turn the compass card of the course deviation
indicator.
23. Tune to an approved frequency.
Deviation Needle. The deviation needle tells the flight
24. Push the pilot cyclic stick trigger switch to the crew if there is deviation to the left or to the right from
second position. the selected course. Each dot on the deviation scale
shows a 2° deviation.
25. Establish two-way communication with either the
local tower or with another licensed station. OFF Flag. The OFF flag goes out of view when a
satisfactory signal is received.
RESULT:
97-113. COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (KI-208)
• The audio received by the tower or the other — FUNCTIONAL CHECK
licensed station is satisfactory.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) (KI-208)
• The audio you hear is satisfactory and the (Figure 97-15) is functionally tested with the
control volume operates correctly. transceiver (KX-155/165) and GPS (if installed). If you
replace the CDI, do the VOR/LOC functional check to
• Sidetone is heard when in the transmit mode. make sure it operates correctly.

97-00-00
Page 80 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-114. NAVIGATION INDICATOR (HSI) when the helicopter is on the course selection.
(KI 525A) — DESCRIPTION The reciprocal course pointer can be used to
fly away from a VOR station.
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) (Figure 97-16)
is made up of a number of individual display devices • The glideslope pointers give an indication of
that supply visual flight information. The visual flight the helicopter deviation from the glideslope
information is supplied to the HSI from the navigation beam center. The pointers show the position
systems installed in the helicopter. The navigation of the beam center in relation to the helicopter.
systems may include the GPS, the VHF NAV/COMM The glideslope pointer is out of view during
(VOR, localizer, and glideslope) and the compass glideslope transmitter or receiver malfunction.
system.
• The TO/FROM indicator shows the location of
The HSI has display devices that supply visual flight the selected VOR station with respect to the
information as follows: helicopter position. The TO arrow shows at
the nose of the fixed aircraft symbol when the
• The compass card gives a visual indication of helicopter flies to a VOR station. The FROM
the helicopter heading. The slave compass arrow shows at the tail of the fixed aircraft
supplies the heading information to the symbol when the helicopter flies from a VOR
compass card. The helicopter heading is read station. The heading of the helicopter has no
under the lubber line. effect on the TO/FROM indication.

• The heading select marker is a movable • The aircraft symbol shows at the center of the
reference point that shows the heading HSI. It gives a reference of the helicopter
selection. The heading select knob sets the position in relation to the course and heading
heading selection. When the helicopter flies selection, or to the actual heading.
on a heading selection, the heading select
marker is aligned with the lubber line. The • The heading warning flag (HDG) and
heading select marker moves in
navigation warning flag (NAV) give visual
synchronization with the compass card.
indications of system malfunctions. The
applicable warning flag shows when a
• The selected course pointer is a movable malfunction occurs. The heading warning flag
reference point that shows the course shows if the slave compass fails, if the
selection. The course select knob is used to compass card is not following the compass
set the course selection. When the helicopter input signal, or if there is inadequate power to
flies the magnetic heading of the course the HSI. The navigation warning flag shows if
selection without yaw angle, the selected the navigation signal is not received or if there
course pointer is aligned with the upper lubber is a malfunction of the NAV receiver. If the
line. The course pointer moves in glideslope signal received is not reliable, the
synchronization with the compass card. glideslope pointers do not show.

• The lateral deviation bar shows the deviation 97-115. NAVIGATION INDICATOR (KI-525A) —
from the VOR radial set by the course select OPERATIONAL CHECK
knob, the deviation from the localizer path, or
the deviation from the GPS path. The course
select knob on the HSI sets the VOR course The operational check of the navigation indicator (HSI)
for the VHF NAV/COMM. The fixed aircraft (KI-525A) is done with its related avionics systems. If
symbol shows the helicopter: the lateral you replace the HSI, do operational checks of the
deviation bar gives an indication of the VOR systems connected to the HSI. The systems that can
radial position, localizer path, or GPS path be connected to the HSI are the VHF NAV/COMM
with respect to the helicopter. The lateral (VOR/localizer/glideslope), the GPS, and the slave
deviation bar is aligned with the course pointer compass.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 81/82
 BHT-407-MM-11

AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER (ADF)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-116. AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER null reception from the radio station. The sense
(ADF) SYSTEM antenna is used to remove the null ambiguity and
provide continuous reception. The two antenna signals
are combined and supplied to the receiver through a
If installed, the automatic direction finder (ADF)
triaxial cable (double shielded coaxial cable).
receiver permits the flight crew to determine the
bearing to a Non Directional Beacon (NDB) or to an
AM broadcast station. The ADF system (Figure 97-17) 97-119. ADF INDICATOR (KI-227) —
consists of the following: DESCRIPTION

• ADF receiver (KR-87) The ADF indicator (Figure 97-18) supplies the flight
crew with a visual indication of the bearing data
• ADF antenna (KA-44B) supplied by the receiver. The ADF indicator is a backlit
and single needle indicator. It has a compass card that
is manually turned.
• ADF Indicator (KI-227)

97-120. ADF (KR-87) RECEIVER — OPERATION

97-117. ADF RECEIVER (KR-87) — DESCRIPTION

On/Off/Volume Control. The on/off/volume control

The ADF receiver (Figure 97-18) is a digitally tuned, knob (Figure 97-18) (OFF VOL) is used to energize
microprocessor controlled, compact ADF receiver. The
the unit and to set the audio level.
ADF receiver provides reception for signals from
200 kHz to 1799 kHz. The ADF receiver power
consumption is only 12 watts, thus forced air cooling is ADF Button. The ADF button (Figure 97-18) is used
not necessary. The gas-discharge display brightness to set the mode of operation of the receiver. In the out
is controlled by an automatic dimming circuit. position, the receiver is set to the antenna (ANT)
Figure 97-5 shows the controls of the ADF receiver. mode. In the in position, the receiver is set to the ADF
The display of the ADF receiver supplies the following: mode.

• An indication of the active ADF frequency in BFO Button. The Beat Frequency Oscillator (BFO)
the left USE window button (Figure 97-18) is used to hear non-modulated
radio carriers. With the BFO button pushed in, a
• An indication of the standby (STBY) ADF 1000 Hz audio signal is heard when a non-modulated
frequency, total flight time (FLT), or elapsed radio carrier is received.
time (ET) in the right STBY/TIMER window
FRQ Button. The FRQ button (Figure 97-18) is used
97-118. ADF ANTENNA (KA-44B) — to display the standby frequency if it does not show. If
DESCRIPTION the standby frequency shows in the right STBY/TIMER
window, the FRQ button is used to change the active
(USE) frequency to the standby frequency. The
The ADF antenna (Figure 97-17) is used to receive
standby frequency, in turn, becomes the active
radio signals from NDB or broadcast stations between
frequency.
200 kHz to 1799 kHz and is installed under the
helicopter. The ADF antenna contains a loop antenna,
a sense antenna, RF preamplifiers, and modulators (to ET/FLT Button. The ET/FLT button (Figure 97-18) is
combine the two RF signals). The loop antenna inside used to change the flight timer (FLT) display and the
the ADF antenna is electronically tuned to keep the elapsed timer (ET) display with each other.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 83
BHT-407-MM-11

KI-227 INDICATOR

KR-87 RECEIVER

KA-44B ANTENNA

407_MM_97_0017
Figure 97-17. ADF System Components — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
Page 84 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3
TRQ 10
D S R 1000
FEE
FEE
T

2 40 T N 1000
0

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E M 299

SELECT CONTROL 12 120 1010

S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5

L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7

T
6

E
R E C
16 5
2 4 9
12
FUEL
AMPS
3
MGT
PSI 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120
NP GS
15 21 GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0

12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110

24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN

E
30

T
100

W
5 3
1 2

6
4 5 7 8 % RPM 40 NAV

30
6 9 90

R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL
8 3 NG KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3

6
30
FWD TANK

3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20

24
OVSPD HORN 10

E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG 21 FADEC
6
OIL ~C 10
OIL ~C 10 MODE

12
PSI PSI

24
ON

E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5 15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

LUBBER LINE

RELATIVE BEARING INDICATOR

HEADING SET KNOB

COMPASS CARD

STANDBY FREQUENCY
ACTIVE FREQUENCY
ON/OFF VOL CONTROL

CONCENTRIC
TUNING KNOBS

BFO FRQ

ADF BUTTON
LOCKING SCREW
BFO BUTTON
SET/RESET BUTTON
FREQUENCY DISPLAY
FLIGHT TIMER/ELAPSE TIMER BUTTON
407_MM_97_0018

Figure 97-18. ADF (KR-87) — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 85
BHT-407-MM-11

SET/RST Button. The SET/RST button two digits roll over from 17 to 02 and roll under from 02
(Figure 97-18) is used to set (SET) and reset (RST) to 17. Thus the frequency limits are in the range of
the timers. If the SET/RST button is pushed in for 200 kHz to 1799 kHz.
2 seconds, the unit is set to the elapsed timer mode
and the indication ET flashes. After a number is set, Standby Frequency. The standby frequency shows in
the timer stays in the ET set mode for 15 seconds or the right STBY/TIMER window when the FRQ
until the SET/RST or the FRQ button is pushed. If you indication is on. When the FRQ indication is on, you
push the SET/RST button after a number is set, the can change the standby frequency in the same way
timer starts to count down. that you change the active frequency.

Tuning Knobs. The tuning knobs (Figure 97-18) are To see the standby frequency when it does not show,
used to set the frequencies or the timers. push the FRQ button. If you push the FRQ button
when the standby frequency shows, the current
97-121. ADF (KR-87) ANTENNA MODE — standby frequency and the current active frequency
DESCRIPTION change places.

In the antenna (ANT) mode, the loop antenna is not 97-124. ADF (KR-87) TIMERS — DESCRIPTION
used by the receiver. When in the ANT mode, the
bearing pointer on the ADF indicator (KI-227) goes to ET/FLT Button. The flight timer (Figure 97-18) comes
the 90° position (parked position) and the indication into view the first time you energize the ADF. If the
ANT shows on the left side of the display. In this mode, elapsed timer (ET) shows, the flight timer (FLT) comes
only the audio is available. To set the receiver to the into view if you push the ET/FLT button. If you push
antenna mode, the ADF button (Figure 97-18) must be the ET/FLT button again, the two frequencies change
in the out position. places on the display. If the standby frequency shows,
the last timer to be in use comes into view if you push
97-122. ADF MODE — DESCRIPTION the ET/FLT button.

In the ADF mode, the loop and sense antennas are Flight Timer. The flight timer (Figure 97-18) is in the
used by the receiver. When in the ADF mode, the right STBY/TIMER window when the FLT indication is
indication ADF shows on the left side of the display on. The flight timer can count up to 59 hours,
and the bearing pointer on the indicator points to the 59 minutes, and 59 seconds. When you energize the
relative bearing of the received station. Push in the unit, the timer automatically starts to count from zero.
ADF button to set the receiver to the ADF mode. Only the minutes and seconds show for the first
59 minutes and 59 seconds: after that, only the hours
97-123. ADF (KR-87) FREQUENCY CONTROL — and minutes show.
DESCRIPTION
Elapsed Timer. The elapsed timer (Figure 97-18) has
Active Frequency. The ADF receiver (KR-87) two modes: count up and countdown. When you
(Figure 97-18) shows the active frequency in the energize the receiver, the timer is in the count up
left-hand USE window. You can change this frequency mode and starts to count up from zero. It counts up to
with the tuning knobs when the flight timer (FLT) or the 59 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds, or counts
elapsed timer (ET) mode shows in the right-hand down to zero from 59 hours, 59 minutes and
STBY/TIMER window. You cannot change the 59 seconds. This is a 4-digit timer. Minutes and
frequency when the ET message flashes. To set the seconds show for the first hour. When in the count up
10's digit, push the smaller tuning knob and turn it. mode, the timer can be reset to 0 if you push the SET/
When you turn it clockwise, you increment the digit. RST button. When you push the SET/RST button, it
The digit rolls over at 9 to 0. When you turn it resets the elapsed timer, whether it shows on the
counterclockwise, the digit decreases and rolls over at display or not.
0 to 9. To set the 1's digit, pull out the smaller tuning
knob. Its operation is the same as for the 10's digit. The countdown mode is entered when the SET/RST
button is pushed and held for approximately
To set the 100's digit and the 1000's digit, turn the 2 seconds, until the indication ET flashes. The timer is
larger tuning knob. The 100's digit carries to the in the ET set mode while the indication ET flashes. In
1000's digit from 9 to 10 and borrows from 10 to 9. The the ET set mode, a number up to 59 minutes,

97-00-00
Page 86 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

59 seconds can be set into elapsed timer with the two b. Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until
tuning knobs. the unit disengages from the rack.

To set the 10's of seconds digit, push the smaller c. Pull on the sides of the ADF and remove it
tuning knob and turn it. When you turn it clockwise, from the rack. Do not pull on the knobs.
you increment the digit. The digit rolls over at 5 to 0.
When you turn it counterclockwise, the digit decreases 2. Install the ADF as follows:
and rolls under at 0 to 5. To set the 1's of seconds
digit, pull out the smaller tuning knob. When you turn it
a. Put the ADF into the rack. Push it in until the
clockwise, you increment the digit. The digit rolls over
locking screw touches the rear of the rack.
at 9 to 0. When you turn it counterclockwise, the digit
decreases and rolls under at 0 to 9. The larger tuning
knob changes the minutes. The operation is the same
as for the smaller tuning knob. When you turn it CAUTION
clockwise, it rolls over from 59 to 0. When you turn it
counterclockwise, it rolls under from 0 to 59.
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW.
After a number is set, the timer stays in the ET set
mode and the indication ET flashes for 15 seconds b. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access
until the SET/RST, ET/FLT, or FRQ button is pushed. hole in the front panel.
The number stays the same until the SET/RST button
is pushed. When you push the SET/RST button, it c. Turn the Allen wrench clockwise until the rear
resets the elapsed timer, whether it shows on the lobe engages with the rack. Continue to turn until the
display or not. The elapsed timer starts to count down. locking screw is tight.
When the timer gets to 0 it changes to the count up
mode and continues up from 0. Also, the right-hand
d. Pull gently on the sides of the ADF to make
STBY/TIMER display flashes for 15 seconds and the
sure it is correctly installed.
timer alarm line supplies a ground for 1 second. When
the elapsed time counts down, if you push the SET/
RST button it has no effect unless it is held for 3. Return the helicopter to the standard
approximately 2 seconds. This causes the timer to configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
stop and enter the set mode. In the STBY/TIMER Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
window, the indication ET flashes.
97-126. ADF (KR-87) SYSTEM — COMPONENT
97-125. ADF (KR-87) — Replacement REPLACEMENT

To replace an electrical component, refer to the

Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
WARNING Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 97-127. ADF SYSTEM — OPERATIONAL CHECKS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
97-128. ADF (KR-87) — Operational Check
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

1. Remove the ADF (Figure 97-18) as follows: NOTE

For the best reception, do the check
a. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access outside the hanger.
hole in the front panel (refer to Figure 97-18 for the
location of the access hole). Engage the locking 1. Close the ADF circuit breaker (3406CB1) and set
screw. the receiver to ON.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 87
BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: RESULT:

• The display annunciators come on. • The indicator points to the station relative
bearing.
2. Press the FRQ button if the receiver is in one of
the timer modes. 9. Push the BFO button to go into the BFO mode.

RESULT: RESULT:

• The standby frequency shows in the right • You hear the BFO tone.
STBY/TIMER window. It replaces the
previously shown timer.
10. Set the receiver to OFF.

3. Turn the two tuning control knobs and make sure

the standby frequency changes. 97-129. ADF Timer — Operational Check

1. Set the receiver to ON.

4. Push the FRQ button a few times and make sure
that the active (USE) and the standby (STBY)
frequencies change places. 2. Push the ET/FLT button to set to the receiver to
the FLT mode (Flight Timer).
RESULT:
3. Set the receiver to OFF. Wait a few seconds and
• The standby frequency replaces the active set the receiver back to ON.
frequency and the active frequency replaces
the standby frequency. RESULT:

5. Set the ADF button to the out position. This • The flight timer is set to zero.
selects the antenna (ANT) mode.
4. Push the ET/FLT button to set the timer to the ET
RESULT: mode (Elapsed Timer).

• The ANT indication shows in the left window. RESULT:

• The bearing pointer on the ADF indicator • The timer is in the count up mode.
points to 90 ±3° relative to the nose of the
helicopter.
5. Push the SET/RST button to reset the timer.
6. Adjust the volume control to a comfortable level.
RESULT:
7. Tune to a nearby broadcast station or to an NDB
station. • The timer resets to zero and then counts up
again.

NOTE 6. Push and hold the SET/RST button for

Buildings, airplanes, cars, and power lines approximately 2 seconds to enter the countdown
that are near the helicopter can change the mode. Hold the SET/RST button until the indication ET
accuracy of the ADF. flashes.

8. Set the ADF button to the in position to select the 7. Use the tuning knobs and set the count time to
ADF mode. any value (up to 59 minutes and 59 seconds).

97-00-00
Page 88 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: right STBY/TIMER display flashes for

15 seconds.
• After the time is set, the timer remains in the
ET set mode and the indication ET flashes for 9. Push the ET/FLT button two or three times.
15 seconds.
• The two timers in the display change places
8. Push the SET/RST button. every time you push the ET/FLT button.

RESULT: 10. Set the receiver to OFF.

• The timer counts down to zero and then

counts up. When the counter gets to zero, the

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 89/90
 BHT-407-MM-11

TRANSPONDER SYSTEM (KT-70/KT-76A)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-130. TRANSPONDER SYSTEM (KT-70) is supplied with the transponder code. The altitude
data is transmitted to the ground in response to mode
There are two types of radar at each Air Traffic Control C interrogations.
(ATC) station. The first is the Primary Surveillance
Radar (PSR). The PSR operates on the normal radar The mode S function of the transponder permits the
principle. It transmits energy and receives energy that ground station to individually select an aircraft by its
reflects from the aircraft under surveillance. The aircraft address. The permanent aircraft address is
second type of radar is the Secondary Surveillance given by the applicable aviation authority.
Radar (SSR). The SSR operates on the coded reply
from the aircraft transponder. An analysis of the total
When the identification (IDT) button is pushed, the
air traffic situation is made with the data from the PSR
current 4096 code and an additional special
and SSR. A typical air traffic control station is shown in
identification pulse are transmitted by the transponder.
Figure 97-19.
This additional ident pulse is to make sure that the
identification data that the ground station receives is
The transponder operates as necessary for the correct.
requirements of the Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon
system (ATCRB) and basic mode S transponder
The transponder has a test mode. The test mode is to
functions. That includes ATCRB mode A, ATCRB
make sure that the transponder system operates
mode C, ATCRB mode A/mode S all-call, ATCRB
correctly and to program the aircraft address, the
mode C/mode S all-call plus the mode S formats 0, 4,
maximum airspeed, and the display adjust.
5, and 11. The transponder system has a solid state
transmitter with microprocessor control and Large
Scale Integrated circuit/Real Large Scale Integrated The transponder has a gas discharge display, a mode
circuit (LSI/RLSI) encoding circuitry. Mode and Code selector knob, a VFR pushbutton (PUSH VFR), an
selection is done with the rotary knobs. Indications ident pushbutton (IDT), and four ident selector knobs.
such as flight level altitude, identification code, and For checks and extensive troubleshooting, refer to the
aircraft address are shown on the gas discharge Bendix/King maintenance manual and use an ATC601
display. IFR Transponder/DME test set or equivalent.
Figure 97-20 shows the controls of the KT-70
When the transponder receives a mode A transponder.
interrogation from the ground radar facility, it transmits
a coded group of pulses that has a 4-digit identification 97-131. TRANSPONDER SYSTEM (KT-70) MODE S
number. The Air Traffic Controller gives the — DESCRIPTION
identification code to the flight crew. The flight crew
sets the transponder with the code. The transponder
Mode S is a cooperative surveillance and
then transmits the coded data to the ground as a mode
communication system for air traffic control. It uses
A reply. The coded data is shown on the ground radar
interrogators on the ground and airborne
display at the applicable range and azimuth. The air
transponders. Ground-air-ground datalink
traffic controller can identify each aircraft that has a
communications are done with surveillance
transponder by its applicable code.
interrogations and replies. Mode S is an addition to the
Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon system (ATCRB). It
The VFR code, aircraft address, maximum airspeed, supplies the surveillance and communication
and display adjust can be set from the front panel of capability necessary for the air traffic control
the transponder system and is kept in a non-volatile automation. To make the introduction of mode S into
memory. the ATCRB system easier, the ground and airborne
mode S installations include full ATCRB capability.
The transponder also supplies mode C or altitude Mode S interrogators permit surveillance of aircraft
data. When the transponder operates in the ALT mode with an ATCRB capability, and mode S transponders
and is interfaced to an altimeter, the flight level altitude can reply to ATCRB interrogations.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 91
BHT-407-MM-11

INDICATOR SITE

REPLY
INTERROGATION

SSR
COAXIAL LAND LINE

PSR

TRANSMITTER SITE

407_MM_97_0019

Figure 97-19. Typical Air Traffic Control Station

97-00-00
Page 92 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEET
L 150 I H 100
4
C N O 9 1
3
TRQ 10
D S R 1000
FEET
FEE
2 40 T N 1000
0

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E M 299
SELECT CONTROL 12 120 1010

S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5

L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7

T
6 R E C

E
16 5
2 4 9

FUEL
AMPS
12
3
MGT
PSI 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120
NP GS
15 21 GS 5 3
1000 FT
X 10 0

12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110

24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN

E
30

T
100

W
5 3
1 2

6
4 5 8 % RPM 40 NAV

30
7 90
6 9

R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL 8 3 NG KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3

6
FWD TANK

30
3
FADEC 2 MIN TURN
12 15
15
20

24
OVSPD HORN 10

E
6
8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC

21
6 10
~C 10 ~C MODE
OIL OIL

12
PSI PSI

24
ON

E
10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5 15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0 HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

LOCKING SCREW

MODE ANNUNCIATION REPLY INDICATION

ALTITUDE WINDOW IDENT WINDOW

IDENT PUSHBUTTON

VRF
PUSHBUTTON

MODE
FLIGHT LEVEL SELECTOR
INDICATION KNOB
IDENT SELECTOR KNOBS
TO SET MAXIMUM
KT-70 TRANSPONDER AIR SPEED
REPLY LAMP

MODE SELECTOR
KNOB

IDENT BUTTON CODE SELECTOR KNOBS

LOCKING SCREW
KT-76A TRANSPONDER
407_MM_97_0020

Figure 97-20. Transponders (KT-70 and KT-76A) — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 93
BHT-407-MM-11

Mode S and ATCRB transponders use the same refer to Bendix/King transponder system technical
frequencies (1030 MHz for interrogations and 1090 data.
MHz for replies). Mode S interrogations are
transmitted with binary Differential Phase Shift Keying Ground (GND). At this position the transponder is
(DPSK). With correct demodulation, the data content energized and replies to mode S interrogations. There
is detectable in the presence of ATCRB signals. The are no ATCRB interrogations from the unit in the GND
demodulation of the downlink transmission from the mode. The indication GND is shown in the mode
transponder is Pulse Position Modulation (PPM), annunciation window.
which is resistant to ATCRB random pulses. The data
content for uplink and downlink transmissions is also ON. At this position the transponder replies to all valid
protected by parity check bits. If a transponder mode A, mode C, and mode S interrogations. The
receives an ATCRB/mode S all-call interrogation, the altitude information of the mode C reply and the
transponder replies as follows: an ATCRB transponder altitude fields of the mode S replies are suppressed.
replies with a standard ATCRB format and a mode S The identification code 4096 is shown in the ident
transponder replies with a mode S format (including window.
the discrete mode S address). A file keeps the
address and location of the mode S aircraft (the Altitude (ALT). At this position the transponder replies
aircraft is put on a roll-call). On the next scan, the to valid mode A, mode C, and mode S interrogations.
aircraft mode S transponder is automatically The altitude information is sent in mode C and mode
addressed. As azimuth and range are known for all S. The identification code is shown in the ident window
aircraft on the roll-call, aircraft are interrogated on a on the right and the altitude is shown in the altitude
pre-computed schedule. In this schedule there are window on the left.
ATCRB/mode S all-calls. These calls permit the
tracking of ATCRB aircraft already on roll-call and 97-134. Transponder (KT-70) Ident (IDT) Button —
permit the acquisition of other ATCRB and mode S Operation
aircraft that enter the airspace.
The ident (IDT) button (Figure 97-20) causes the
97-132. TRANSPONDER SYSTEM (KT-70) — transponder to include in its mode A response the
OPERATION Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse. The
transponder replies for 18 seconds and the indication
97-133. Transponder (KT-70) Mode Selector Knob R is shown (Figure 97-20).
— Operation
97-135. Transponder (KT-70) Code Selector Knobs
The mode selector knob (Figure 97-20) has six — Operation
positions as follows:
There are four code selector knobs (Figure 97-20).
OFF. At this position the transponder is not energized. These knobs are used to select the identification code
(or aircraft address). The identification code is shown
Standby (SBY). At this position the unit is energized in the ident window. Five seconds after the
but does not reply to interrogations. The indication identification code is set with the code selector knobs,
SBY is shown in the mode annunciation window. it is automatically put into a non-volatile memory. It can
also be immediately put into memory if the IDT button
Test (TST). At the test position all the display is pushed. The code can be transmitted only when it is
annunciators come on for a minimum of 4 seconds. in memory.
While the test is in progress, the transponder does not
reply to interrogations. If the unit detects a hardware 97-136. Transponder (KT-70) VFR Button (PUSH
failure, the indication F04 is shown in the altitude VFR) — Operation
window. The indication F01 is shown if the unit fails the
squitter test. The indication F02 is shown if the unit The PUSH VFR button (Figure 97-20) is used to
has an internal EEPROM failure. The indication F03 is change the identification code with a programmed
shown if the unit has a remote EEPROM failure. When code. When the PUSH VFR button is pushed, the VFR
a hardware failure is detected, the transponder is code replaces the code that is in use. The VFR code is
locked in the standby mode. If the transponder test is immediately used in replies to interrogations (the
good, the unit stays in the test mode. For more data, transponder does not wait 5 seconds in this case). The

97-00-00
Page 94 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

previous code will be back in use if the PUSH VFR and the brightness compensation. To go into the
button is pushed and held for 2 seconds. Refer to display adjust mode, do the steps that follow:
Figure 97-20 for the PUSH VFR button location. To
program the VFR code, do the steps that follow: 1. Turn the mode selector knob to TST.

1. Set the transponder selector switch to SBY.

2. Push the IDT pushbutton for 5 seconds until the
indication dA1 is shown in the altitude window.
2. Turn the code selector knobs and select the
necessary VFR code.
3. Push the PUSH VFR button until the display
adjustment that you want to adjust is shown.
3. Push and hold the IDT button and then push the
PUSH VFR button. Release both buttons.
4. Set the new adjustment value in the ident window
97-137. Transponder (KT-70) Reply Indication — with the ident selector knob on the far right
Operation (Table 97-9).

The reply (R) indication comes on for approximately 5. Push the IDT button or turn the mode selector
3/4 of a second when the transponder replies to a valid knob to enter the new value and to exit the adjust
interrogation. It also comes on approximately mode.
18 seconds subsequent to the initiation of an ident.
Refer to Figure 97-20 for the location of the reply
indication. 97-140. Transponder (KT-70) Aircraft Address and
Maximum Airspeed — Program
97-138. Transponder (KT-70) Altitude Display —
Operation The aircraft address and the maximum airspeed must
be programmed when the unit is installed. To program
The Flight Level (FL) altitude is shown in the altitude the address and maximum airspeed do the steps that
window (Figure 97-20). The altitude indication is in follow:
hundreds of feet. An FL indication is shown when the
flight level altitude is shown. The range of the altitude 1. Turn the mode selector knob to TST.
window is 1000 to 99900 feet. If the encoding altimeter
information is invalid, dashes (----) are shown and the
altitude data is not transmitted with the replies. RESULT:

97-139. Transponder (KT-70) Display — • AA1 is shown in the altitude window.

Adjustment
2. Push the PUSH VFR button for 5 seconds until
The display adjust mode is used to program the the altitude window becomes empty and the ident
response time for dimming, the minimum brightness, window shows 0000.

Table 97-9. Transponder System (KT-70) Display Adjustment Table

PROGRAM ADJUSTMENT FACTORY

DESCRIPTION
MODE RANGE SET VALUE

dA1 1 to 8 Photocell response time (1 = fast, 8 = slow) 1

dA2 0 to 64 Display brightness (0 = dim, 64 = bright) 20

dA3 0 to 255 Vendor/Age compensation (0 = dim, 255 = bright) 0

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 95
BHT-407-MM-11

3. Enter AAAA with the code selector knobs and

Table 97-10. Transponder System (KT-70)
push the IDT button.
Maximum Airspeed Program — Maximum
Airspeed Ranges
RESULT:
MAXIMUM AIRSPEED RANGES
• AA1 is shown in the altitude window and the 0 to 75
four most significant digits of the aircraft
address are shown in the ident window. If the 75 to 150
aircraft address is not programmed, the
150 to 300
altitude window shows 0000.
300 to 600
4. Turn the code selector knobs and select the four 600 to 1200
most significant digits of the aircraft address.
---- to 1200 (for speed over 1200 knots)
5. Push the PUSH VFR button to enter the four
most significant digits of the aircraft address. 9. The ---- to 1200 range is used for a maximum
airspeed that is more than 1200 knots.

RESULT:
10. Push the PUSH VFR button to save the
maximum airspeed.
• AA2 is shown in the altitude window and the
four least significant digits of the aircraft
RESULT:
address are shown in the ident window. If the
aircraft address is not programmed, the
altitude window shows 0000. • The transponder goes out of the program
mode and goes through the test sequence.
This is similar to turning the code selector
6. Turn the code selector knobs and select the four knob to TST from the OFF position.
least significant digits of the aircraft address.
97-141. Transponder (KT-70) — Replacement
7. Push the PUSH VFR button to enter the four least
significant digits of the aircraft address.
WARNING
RESULT:

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

• The low end (smaller number) of the WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
maximum airspeed is shown in the altitude NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
window. The upper range (larger number) of EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
the maximum airspeed is shown in the ident
window. 1. Remove the transponder (Figure 97-20) as
follows:
• If the aircraft address is not programmed, the
altitude window shows 0000. a. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access
hole at the front of the unit (refer to Figure 97-20 for
8. Turn the code selector knob on the far right to the location of the access hole). Engage the locking
select the maximum airspeed range. The code screw.
selector knob on the far right is shown in Figure 97-6.
The maximum airspeed ranges that can be selected b. Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until
are as listed in Table 97-10: the transponder disengages from the rack.

97-00-00
Page 96 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

c. Pull on the sides of the transponder and A COMPLETE FUNCTIONAL CHECK

remove it from the rack. Do not pull on the controls. REFER TO THE APPLICABLE BENDIX/
KING MANUAL.
2. Install the transponder as follows:
1. Turn the mode selector knob to the TST position.
a. Put the transponder into the rack. Push it in
until the front lobe touches the rack. RESULT:

b. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access • All the display annunciators come on for
hole in the front panel. Engage the locking screw. approximately 4 seconds (Figure 97-20).

• No error codes are shown in the altitude

window.
CAUTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW. • If the indication F01, F02, or F04 is shown, the
transponder is defective and must be
c. Turn the locking screw clockwise until the rear
replaced.
lobe engages the rack.

d. Continue to turn until tight.

WARNING
e. Pull gently on the sides of the transponder to
make sure it is correctly installed.
DO NOT SET THE TRANSPONDER
3. Return the helicopter to the standard CODE TO 7500, 7600, OR 7700. THESE
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After CODES ARE USED FOR EMERGENCIES.
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
2. Set the code on the transponder to any code
97-142. TRANSPONDER (KT-70) SYSTEM — except 7500, 7600, or 7700.
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
3. Turn the mode selector knob to the ON position.
To replace an electrical component, refer to the
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
NOTE
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM. When the transponder replies to an
interrogation, the reply (R) indication
97-143. TRANSPONDER (KT-70) — SELF-TEST flashes.

The transponder self-test is done with the test (TST) 4. Make sure that no error codes are shown.
function of the unit. To test the transponder do the
steps that follow: 5. Make sure that the reply (R) indication flashes
intermittently. Intermittent replies are an indication of
correct operation of the transponder.
WARNING
6. Set the transponder to the OFF position.

THE SELF-TEST DOES A CHECK OF 97-144. TRANSPONDER SYSTEM (KT-76A) —

THE TRANSPONDER TRANSCEIVER. DESCRIPTION
THE SELF-TEST DOES NOT DO A
CHECK OF THE ANTENNA OR A CHECK There are two types of radar at each Air Traffic Control
O F T H E C A L I B R AT I O N O F T H E (ATC) station. The first is the Primary Surveillance
OPTIONAL ENCODING ALTIMETER. FOR Radar (PSR). The PSR operates on the normal radar

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 97
BHT-407-MM-11

principle. It transmits energy and receives energy Standby (SBY). At this position the transponder is
which reflects from the aircraft under surveillance. The energized but does not reply to interrogations. This
second is the Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR). permits the transponder to warm up, which makes the
The SSR operates on the coded reply from the aircraft frequency more stable.
transponder. An analysis of the total air traffic situation
is made with the data from the PSR and SSR. A ON. At this position the transponder is energized and
typical air traffic control station is shown in replies to mode A interrogations. Altitude data is not
Figure 97-19. transmitted.

The transponder is a panel mounted transponder that Altitude (ALT). At this position the transponder is
can operate in mode A and mode C. It is a energized and replies to mode A and mode C
radar-frequency radio transmitter/receiver that permits interrogations.
air traffic controllers to identify the helicopter. It is
compatible with the Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon Test (TST). At this position the transponder does a
system (ATCRB). self-test.

In mode A, the reply contains the aircraft identity code 97-147. Transponder (KT-76A) Code Selector
(4096 possible codes) and the special pulse Knobs — Description
identification. The mode A reply contains up to 15
pulses. Twelve of these pulses carry the identification There are four code selector knobs (Figure 97-20).
number. Two other pulses are framing pulses: one These code selector knobs are used to select the
comes before the 12 identification pulses and one identification code (or aircraft address).
comes after. The last pulse is a special identification
pulse to help the radar operator. A mode C reply 97-148. Transponder (KT-76A) Identification
contains altitude data in addition to the mode A data. Button (IDENT) — Description
The special pulse identification is not transmitted in a
mode C reply.
The IDENT button (Figure 97-20) causes the
transponder to include the Special Position
The transponder system consists of a transponder and Identification (SPI) pulse in its mode A response. The
an omnidirectional antenna. A 10 ohm/55 watt resistor pilot pushes the IDENT button when requested by the
(3410R1) is used to permit the transponder system to Air Traffic Controller.
use the 28 VDC electrical power. An encoding
altimeter is required to operate in mode C. 97-149. Transponder (KT-76A) Reply Lamp —
Description
The transponder receives 1030 MHz interrogations
from ATC ground stations and then decodes the The reply (R) lamp comes on when the transponder
interrogations. After the interrogations are decoded, replies to a valid interrogation. Refer to Figure 97-20
the transponder replies (transmits) at 1090 MHz. The for the location of the reply lamp.
reply signals include information appropriate to the
mode that is used. Figure 97-20 shows the controls of
97-150. Transponder (KT-76A) — Replacement
the KT-76A transponder system.

97-145. TRANSPONDER (KT-76A) — OPERATION

WARNING
97-146. Transponder (KT-76A) Mode Selector
Knob — Description
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
The mode selector knob (Figure 97-20) is used to set NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
the mode of operation of the transponder. It has five EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
positions as follows:
1. Remove the transponder (Figure 97-20) as
OFF. At this position the transponder is not energized. follows:

97-00-00
Page 98 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

a. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access 97-152. TRANSPONDER (KT-76A) — SELF-TEST
hole at the front of the transponder (refer to
Figure 97-20 for the location of the access hole).
NOTE
Engage the locking screw.
Because of the transponder high frequency
b. Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until of operation, it is necessary that coaxial
the unit disengages from the rack. connections are correct and that the
antenna is correctly installed and not
damaged. Before you replace a
c. Pull on the sides of the transponder and
transponder that fails the self-test, make
remove it from the rack. Do not pull on the knobs.
sure that the coaxial cables and the
antenna are correctly installed.
2. Install the transponder as follows:

a. Look at the bottom of the transponder and WARNING

make sure the front lobe is in a vertical position. If
necessary, use the 3/32 inch Allen wrench and turn the
locking screw. DO NOT SET THE TRANSPONDER
CODE TO 7500, 7600, OR 7700. THESE
b. Put the transponder into the rack. Push it in CODES ARE USED FOR EMERGENCIES.
until the front lobe touches the rack.
1. Set the code on the transponder to any code
except 7500, 7600, or 7700.

CAUTION 2. Set the mode selector knob to the SBY position

and wait at least 45 seconds.

DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW.

3. Set the mode selector knob to the ON position.
c. Turn the Allen wrench clockwise until the rear
4. Turn and hold the mode selector knob at the TST
lobe engages with the rack. Continue to turn until the
position.
locking screw is tight.

RESULT:
d. Pull gently on the sides of the transponder to
make sure it is correctly installed.
• The reply light comes on continuously.

3. Return the helicopter to the standard CORRECTIVE ACTION:

configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). • If the reply light does not come on
continuously, a faulty transponder should be
97-151. TRANSPONDER (KT-76A) SYSTEM — considered.
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
5. Release the mode selector knob.
To replace an electrical component, refer to the
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance 6. Make sure the light goes off.
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM. 7. Set the mode selector knob to the OFF position.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 99/100
 BHT-407-MM-11

SLAVED COMPASS SYSTEM (KCS-55A)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-153. SLAVED COMPASS SYSTEM commands from the slave control (KA-51B) switch and
(KCS-55A) meter unit.

If installed, the slaved compass system (KCS-55A) 97-156. SLAVED COMPASS FLUX VALVE
(Figure 97-21) supplies gyro-stabilized magnetic (KMT-112) — DESCRIPTION
heading information. This data is shown on the
navigation indicator (HSI) (KI-525A). The flux valve (KMT-112) (Figure 97-21) is made to
measure the direction of a magnetic field. It changes
The slaved compass system has four primary units: this data to a format that is used to control (slave) the
compass system.

• Navigation indicator (HSI) (KI-525A)

(3400DS1) 97-157. SLAVED COMPASS SLAVE CONTROL
(KA-51B) — DESCRIPTION

• Directional gyro (KG-102A) (3407MP1)

The slave control (KA-51B) (Figure 97-21) has internal
lighting, two toggle switches, and a slaving indicator.
• Flux valve (KMT-112) (3407TR1) The SLAVE/FREE switch engages the slave gyro
mode when in the SLAVE position and places the gyro
• Slave control (KA-51B) (3407CP1) in the free mode when in the FREE position. The
CCW/CW switch is a momentary left/right toggle
switch and supplies clockwise and counterclockwise
97-154. SLAVED COMPASS NAVIGATION
manual slewing when the system is in free gyro mode.
INDICATOR (HSI) (KI-525A) —
The slave indicator shows the slaving error between
DESCRIPTION
the flux valve (KMT-112) and the directional gyro
(KG-102A). The slave control also has a circuit to
The navigation indicator (HSI) (Figure 97-16) supplies compensate for hard iron effects on the flux valve.
a gyro-stabilized aircraft magnetic heading, selected Compensation is done by the adjustment of two
course, and selected heading. The navigation potentiometers. Access holes for the two
indicator (HSI) has internal lighting. A heading flag potentiometers (N/S and E/W) are on the side of the
(HDG) is shown if the compass system is not valid. unit.
The navigation indicator (HSI) can also be used as an
indicator for other navigational systems. 97-158. SLAVED COMPASS START-UP MODE —
OPERATION
97-155. SLAVED COMPASS DIRECTIONAL GYRO
(KG-102A) — DESCRIPTION When the compass system (KCS-55A) (Figure 97-22)
is energized, the directional gyro (KG-102A) supplies
The directional gyro (KG-102A) (Figure 97-21) is the power to the flux valve (KMT-112), slave control
most important part of the compass system (KCS-55A) (KA-51B), and the navigation indicator (HSI)
because it supplies the basic heading reference. It (KI-525A). The gyro starts to spin and the HDG flag on
also changes aircraft power to other voltages that are the navigation indicator stays in view until the
necessary for correct operation of the compass conditions that follow are all true:
system (including the gyro itself). It digitizes the flux
valve slaving error before it is summed with the digital • Gyro spin motor is at normal operation speed
gyro signal. The sum of the flux valve slaving error and
digital gyro signals are changed to a format necessary
to operate the stepper motor compass card of the • Normal system voltages are present
navigation indicator (HSI) (KI-525A). The directional
gyro also obeys the manual (free mode) slaving • System is not in the fast slave mode

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 101
BHT-407-MM-11

KA-51B SWITCH AND METER UNIT

SEE DETAIL C

SEE DETAIL B

DETAIL A

KMT-112
FLUX VALVE
SEE DETAIL A

KG-102A CONNECTOR
DIRECTIONAL GYRO

LOOKING DOWN

LOOKING FORWARD

DETAIL B DETAIL C

407_MM_97_0021

Figure 97-21. Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) Components — Description (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
Page 102 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

KA-51B SWITCH AND METER UNIT

KG-102A
GYRO

KMT 112A

FLUX DETECTOR

DC BUS
DG
(4CB6)
KI-525A HSI

407_MM_97_0022

Figure 97-22. Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) — Simplified Schematic (S/N 53000 Through 54299)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 103
BHT-407-MM-11

The fast slave mode comes on when the unit is 97-161. SLAVED COMPASS SYSTEM (KCS-55A)
energized. The unit is set to the slow slave mode when — COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
the error is reduced to zero. The error is reduced to
zero when the heading detected by the flux valve and To replace an electrical component, refer to the
the heading shown by the navigation indicator are the Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
same. The fast slave speed is 180°/minute and the Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
slow slave speed is 3°/minute. Figure 97-22 shows a procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.
simplified schematic of the slaved compass system.
97-162. SLAVED COMPASS — OPERATIONAL
CHECK
97-159. SLAVED COMPASS SLAVE MODE —
OPERATION 1. Make sure the directional gyro (KG-102A) is off
for a minimum of 10 minutes before you do the
When the HDG flag on the navigation indicator (HSI) operational check. This makes sure that the spin
motor is stopped.
(KI-525A) (Figure 97-16) is out of view and the
SLAVE/FREE switch on the slave control (KA-51B)
(Figure 97-22) is set to the SLAVE position, the 2. On the slave control (KA-51B) panel, set the
SLAVE/FREE toggle switch to the FREE position.
system is in its normal operating mode. In the normal
operating mode, the flux valve (KMT-112) supplies
heading data to the directional gyro (KG-102A). The 3. Close the DG circuit breaker (4CB6) to energize
the system.
directional gyro changes the flux valve slaving error to
the necessary digital format. The digital slaving error is
summed with the digital gyro signal, which operates a RESULT:
stepper motor. The stepper motor moves the compass
• On the HSI, the HDG flag stays in view until
card of the navigation indicator (HSI) in the slow slave
the spin motor of the directional gyro
mode. The slave meter on the slave control is in the
(KG-102A) has sufficient speed.
center when the error between the gyro and the flux
valve is zero. If the compass heading is not
4. On the slave control panel, set the CCW/CW
satisfactory, the HDG flag comes into view on the switch to the CCW position.
navigation indicator.
RESULT:
97-160. SLAVED COMPASS FREE MODE —
OPERATION • The compass card turns counterclockwise at 5
±1° per second.
When the SLAVE/FREE switch on the slave control
• On the HSI, the HDG flag comes into view.
(KA-51B) (Figure 97-22) is set to the FREE position,
the compass operates as a directional gyro indicator.
5. On the slave control panel, set the CCW/CW
The HDG flag on the navigation indicator (HSI)
switch to the CW position.
(KI-525A) is out of view when the slave control is in the
free mode. In the free mode, the flux valve signal is not
RESULT:
used and the compass card must be set with the
CCW/CW switch periodically to make allowance for
• The compass card turns clockwise (CW) at 5
gyro drift. The HDG flag is in view when the gyro ±1° per second.
speed is too low, the CW/CW switch is in use, or when
system voltages are not correct. The free mode is • On the HSI, the HDG flag comes into view.
used in environments where there is a significant
distortion in the magnetic field. Distortions in the 6. Use the CW/CCW switch and set the compass
magnetic field occur in places such as offshore card to a bearing that is the known helicopter heading
helicopter platforms, the magnetic north pole, or the minus 90°. For example, if the helicopter heading is
south pole. 135°, set the heading card to 45°.

97-00-00
Page 104 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT:
NOTE
The meter on the slave control panel shows • On the HSI, the HDG flag goes out of view
the error between the compass card when the directional gyro (KG-102A) reaches
indication and the signal from the flux valve. its normal operating speed.

7. On the slave control panel, set the SLAVE/FREE b. On the slave control (KA-51B) panel, set the
toggle switch to the SLAVE position. SLAVE/FREE toggle switch to the SLAVE position.

c. Turn the helicopter to a North heading.

RESULT:
d. Make a note of the error between the
• The compass card turns at 3 ±0.5° per second compass rose and the helicopter heading. Make sure
until it is at its final position. that the slaving meter needle is at the center before
you take note of the error.

• When the compass card stops, the HDG flag

goes out of view. NOTE
These readings have a plus (+) or a minus
• The slave meter on the slave control is in the (–) value. If the shown reading is greater
center. than the magnetic heading to which the
helicopter is aligned, it has a plus value. If
the shown heading is less than the
• The compass shows the helicopter heading magnetic heading, it has a minus value.
±2°.
e. Turn the helicopter to an East heading.
97-163. SLAVED COMPASS SYSTEM (KCS-55A)
— CALIBRATION f. Make a note of the error between the
compass and the helicopter heading. Make sure that
the slaving meter needle is at the center before you
Whenever the slave compass error is greater than 5°, take note of the error.
do a compass calibration.
g. Turn the helicopter to a South heading.
NOTE h. Make a note of the error between the
For the greatest accuracy, do the index compass and the helicopter heading. Make sure that
error adjustment, the N/S and E/W the slaving meter needle is at the center before you
compensation, and the final swing under take note of the error.
conditions that are as close as possible to
actual flight conditions. For general i. Turn the helicopter to a West heading.
information regarding compass calibration
index error adjustment, refer to Chapter 95. j. Make a note of the error between the
compass and the helicopter heading. Make sure that
1. Do the index error adjustment as follows: the slaving meter needle is at the center before you
take note of the error.

a. Close the DG circuit breaker (4CB6) to k. Add the four errors. Divide the sum by 4 to get
energize the system. the index error. Refer to Table 97-11.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 105
BHT-407-MM-11

g. On the slave control panel, set the CCW/CW

Table 97-11. Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) switch to the CW position and turn the compass card
Adjustments — Example of an Index Error to East.
Calculation
h. Put the screwdriver in the E/W opening. Turn
HELICOPTER INDICATOR DEVIATION the screwdriver and set the slave meter to its center
READING READING ERROR position.

0° 6° +6° i. Turn the helicopter to a South heading.

90° 88° 2°
j. On the slave control panel, set the CCW/CW
180° 184° +4° switch to the CW position and turn the compass card
to South.
270° 274° +4°

Index Error = (+6) + (2) + (+4) + (+4). k. Put the screwdriver in the N/S opening. Turn
the screwdriver and decrease the slave meter
4 + 8 = 12° deviation by one half.

12° x 1/4 = +3 l. Turn the helicopter to the West heading.

At the present time the helicopter is aligned on a
West 270° heading and the navigation indicator m. On the slave control panel, set the CCW/CW
reads 274°. The flux valve must be rotated to show switch to the CW position and turn the compass card
a compass reading of 271°. This is the +3° to West.
difference calculated above.
n. Put the screwdriver in the E/W opening. Turn
l. Loosen the mounting screws on the flux valve. the screwdriver and decrease the slave meter
deviation by one half.
m. Turn the flux valve a quantity equal to the
calculated index error. 3. Do the index error adjustment again to get
maximum precision (step b to step n).
n. Tighten the mounting screws.
4. Do the final swing procedure (paragraph 97-164).
2. Do the N/S and E/W compensation procedure
that follows: 97-164. SLAVED COMPASS SYSTEM (KA-51B) —
FINAL SWING
a. On the slave control panel, make sure that the
SLAVE/FREE toggle switch is set to the FREE 1. On the slave control (KA-51B) panel
position. (Figure 97-22), set the SLAVE/FREE toggle switch to
the SLAVE position.
b. Turn the helicopter to a North heading.
2. Set the helicopter on each of the 12 symmetrical
c. On the slave control panel, set the CCW/CW headings: 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270,
switch to the CW position and turn the compass card 300, 330, and 360°.
to North.
3. Make a note of the deviations for each of the
d. Put a screwdriver that has a non-magnetic
headings in the flight operation log.
blade into the N/S opening of the slave control panel
(Figure 97-23).
4. Make sure the headings are not more than ±2°
e. Turn the screwdriver and set the slave meter from the actual headings.
to its center position.
5. Open the DG circuit breaker (4CB6) to remove
f. Turn the helicopter to an East heading. electrical power.

97-00-00
Page 106 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

METER TEST JACK

PANEL (RED THIS SIDE,
BLACK OPPOSITE SIDE)

ACCESS TO N/S AND E/W

POTENTIOMETERS
(OPPOSITE SIDE)

407_MM_97_0023

Figure 97-23. Slaved Compass System (KCS-55A) Adjustments — Description

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 107/108
 BHT-407-MM-11

GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) (KLN-89B)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-165. GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM The Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)
(GPS) (KLN-89B) is a function that every IFR certified GPS receiver
must continuously perform to make sure of an
If installed, the GPS receiver (Figure 97-24) detects, accurate position. The word autonomous specifies that
processes, and displays the navigation data. The GPS the GPS receiver can detect an inaccuracy in the GPS
receiver also gives outputs to be used to drive system on its own. It does this with the use of distance
navigation indicators/displays and computers. Some measurements from as many GPS satellites as
GPS receivers can accept and process altitude, possible to verify the consistency of the position (this
heading, and fuel management data. Figure 97-25 is called an over-determined position solution). The
shows the GPS components. GPS receiver notifies the pilot if it cannot receive with
enough GPS satellites. Five measurements with good
The GPS data signal has a carrier frequency of geometry (relative position of the GPS satellites) are
1575.42 MHZ on which three digital modulations are required to provide RAIM. This means that at least five
transmitted. This data signal is circular polarized when GPS satellites or four GPS satellites and a pressure
it leaves the satellite. The modulation contains the altitude input from an altitude source are required to
GPS message, which is formatted into frames. Each make sure of the RAIM availability.
frame contains five sub-frames.
The GPS is a navigation receiver with a built-in
Two of the primary types of information that the GPS database. The GPS supplies the pilot with the present
satellites broadcast are Almanac and Ephemeris data. position and guidance information. The GPS uses its
This information enables the GPS receiver to quickly known present position to calculate crosstrack error,
lock on to the GPS satellites that it can communicate distance-to-waypoint, ground speed, track angle, time
with. Without this information, the GPS would have to to waypoint, bearing to waypoint, and advisory VNAV
search for each of the 24 GPS satellites to determine guidance. The GPS is completely automatic and does
which ones it can use. not require initialization.

The Almanac data is data that gives the approximate The GPS system has the following components:
position of the GPS satellites. Each GPS satellite
transmits the Almanac data for all of the GPS
satellites. From the Almanac data of one GPS satellite, • GPS antenna (3415E1)
the GPS receiver knows which satellites, among all
the GPS satellites, it can receive with at that specific • GPS navigation receiver (3415RE1)
time. The Almanac data can be used for a period of
6 months. So, even if the GPS receiver has been set • Cooling fan (KA33) (3415B1)
to off for a 1-month period, the GPS receiver knows
which satellites to search for once it is set to on again.
• Data loader port (3415J1)
Ephemeris data is very precise data that each satellite
transmits to tell the GPS receiver its exact position. It 97-166. GPS (KLN-89B) DATABASE —
also tells the GPS receiver what its orbital parameters DESCRIPTION
will be for the next 4 hours. Each GPS satellite
transmits its own Ephemeris data. The navigation information database contains
information about airports, VORs, NDBs, outer
A ground monitoring and control network keeps the markers, etc. The database can be updated when
correct operation of the GPS system. The master necessary. The database update only requires that the
control station is located in Colorado Springs, data card inserted in the GPS be replaced with a new
Colorado, USA. The master control station collects card. The database info can also be updated with a
and analyses all the data collected from all the ground laptop computer. For more data on how to update the
control stations. Based on the analysis of the data, database, refer to the Bendix/King GPS (KLN-89/89B)
corrections can be sent back to the GPS satellites. Installation Manual.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 109
BHT-407-MM-11

FLOAT FLOAT BAGGAGE L/FUEL R/FUEL FADEC FADEC ENGINE BATTERY BATTERY ENGINE C/W
GEN FAIL
TEST ARM DOOR BOOST BOOST FAULT FAIL CHIP RLY HOT OUT
ON
AUTO LITTER L/FUEL R/FUEL RESTART FADEC XMSN XMSN OIL XMSN OIL ENGINE PEDAL A
RELIGHT DOOR XFR XFR FAULT DEGRADED CHIP PRESS TEMP OVSPD STOP E
U
L
ENGINE HEATER FUEL FUEL FUEL FADEC T/R CHECK HYD CYCLIC T
START RPM T
ANTI-ICE OVERTEMP FILTER VALVE LOW MANUAL CHIP INSTR SYSTEM CENTERING LT TEST O
FLOAT RESET
TEST

6 7
8 0
5
O.A.T VOLTS
9 20 FEE
L 150 I H 100 T
4
C N O 9 1
3 TRQ 10
D S R 1000
FEE
FEE
T

2 40 T N 1000
0

1 % X 10
11 T AIRSPEED R 8 2
0 E
120 M 1010
299

SELECT CONTROL 12
S C U
KNOTS H
T T 7
DAVTRON K E
100 60
6 4
80 PU
L
5

L
3 FOR
8 QUICK
20 7

T
6

E
R E C
16 5
2 4 9

FUEL
AMPS
12
3 MGT
PSI 8 2 NR
1 1 0 1
4 0
~C X 100
10 10
NAV
S
HDG
2
120
NP GS
15 21 GS 5 1000 FT
3
X 10 0

12
PER MIN
20 UP PEDAL STOP
110

24
PTT
0
4
ENGAGED
DOWN

E
30

T
100

W
5 3
1 2

6
4 5 7 8 % RPM 40 NAV

30
6 9 90
R
3 6 3 33 GPS
7 5 10 80 50 N
2 4 70 60

FUEL 8 3 NG
KING
1 9 2
QTY LBS 10 1 RPM 11
FUEL CAPACITY FUEL QTY X100 % X 10
BASIC 869 LBS 0 11 0 AVOID CONT OPS 68.4% TO 87.1% NP
12
WITH AUX 1005 LBS
(JET A AT 15° C)
33 N
30 N 33 3
W

6
30
FWD TANK
3

FADEC 2 MIN TURN

12 15
15
20
24

OVSPD HORN 10
W

E
6

8 15
XMSN ENG FADEC
21

6
OIL ~C 10 OIL ~C 10 MODE

12
PSI PSI
24

ON
E

10
4
TEST TEST X 10
5
X 10
5 S 12 15 FUEL
2 5 15 21 AUTO VALVE
0 0 0
HDG OBS
S
FADEC SOFTWARE VERSION 5.358 0
MAN
WITH DIRECT REVERSION TO
MANUAL INSTALLED, REFER TO OFF
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR OPERATION. THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL

LOCK SCREW CURSOR BUTTON

DATA CARD

ON/OFF RIGHT OUTER

KNOB OBS NEAREST CLEAR KNOB
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
MESSAGE ALTITUDE DIRECT-TO ENTER
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
407_MM_97_0024

Figure 97-24. GPS (KLN-89B) — Description

97-00-00
Page 110 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

GPS ANTENNA
BLOWER COOLING AIR
(STA 26.00)

OPTIONAL
INSTALLATION

NAV/GPS
SWITCH
NAV/GPS
RELAY
GPS

DATA LOADING
PORT CONNECTOR 3415K1
3415K1

407_MM_97_0025

Figure 97-25. GPS (KLN-89B) Components — Description

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 111
BHT-407-MM-11

97-167. GPS (KLN-89B) CONFIGURATION — noise RF amplifier is built into the antenna. The
DESCRIPTION multi-stage low noise RF amplifier puts the GPS signal
to a high enough level to be transported by the GPS
Each GPS (KLN-89B) unit (Figure 97-24) includes a antenna coax cable to the GPS antenna system. DC
configuration module that is attached to the system power for the RF amplifier in the antenna system is
mount. The configuration module keeps in its memory transported by the GPS antenna coaxial cable to the
the following data: GPS antenna.

• Indication that the GPS can or cannot be used 97-170. GPS Switching and Annunciation —
for IFR operations Description

• Indication that the altitude alert function is on The GPS switching and annunciators are included in
or off most GPS installations to change and indicate the
mode of operation of the GPS system. NAV switching
• Indication that an external fuel management is included to display GPS navigational information on
system is connected or not the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) or the Horizontal
Situation Indicator (HSI).
• Indication that an external computer is
connected or not 97-171. GPS (KLN-89B) — OPERATION

• Conditions that the 28 VDC avionics bus must For complete data on the operation of the system,
have for the GPS alert function to come on refer to the GPS (KLN-89B) Pilot's Guide.

If the GPS detects a difference between the 97-172. GPS (KLN-89B) — REPLACEMENT
configuration data in the external module and its
internal configuration, the GPS) configuration is
automatically updated with the data in the external
WARNING
module. The only time the configuration data is
different is when the GPS is exchanged with another
unit.
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
97-168. GPS (KLN-89B) RECEIVING SYSTEM WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
COMPONENTS — DESCRIPTION NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
The GPS navigation system in the helicopter has the
1. Remove the GPS (Figure 97-24) as follows:
following components (Figure 97-25):

• Antenna system a. Put a 3/32 inch Allen wrench into the access
hole at the front of the GPS (refer to Figure 97-24 for
• Receiver the location of the access hole). Engage the locking
screw.
• External indication
b. Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until
• Remote switching the locking mechanism is loose. Carefully continue to
turn counterclockwise until you start to feel resistance.
• Annunciators
c. Pull on the sides of the GPS and remove it
97-169. GPS Antenna — Description from the panel. Do not pull on the controls.

The GPS antenna (Figure 97-25) is made to receive 2. Install the GPS as follows:
and amplify the (circular polarized) GPS signal.
Because of the high frequency of operation and low a. Look at the front lug of the GPS locking
signal level of the GPS signal, the antenna has a mechanism. Make sure that the front lug of the locking
multi-stage low noise RF amplifier. The multi-stage low mechanism is up.

97-00-00
Page 112 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

b. Install the GPS into the panel. RESULT:

c. Put 3/32 inch Allen key into the access hole. • The Self Test page replaces the Turn On page
Engage the locking screw. and ANNUN ON shows (if the internal self-test
is good).

CORRECTIVE ACTION:
CAUTION
• If TEST FAIL is shown, set the OFF/ON switch
to the OFF position and then set it to the ON
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW.
position. If the self-test fails again, replace the
GPS.
d. Turn the locking screw clockwise and tighten
gently.
2. If the navigation indicator (HSI) is installed, make
sure the NAV/GPS pushbutton on the navigation
e. Pull gently on the sides of the GPS to make
indicator is set to GPS and the OBS/LEG pushbutton
sure it is correctly installed.
on the GPS is set to OBS.

3. Return the helicopter to the standard

configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After 3. If the navigation indicator is installed, make sure
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96). its deviation bar shows a half scale deviation to the
right. Make sure the TO/FROM indicator shows
FROM.
97-173. GPS (KLN-89B) SYSTEM — COMPONENT
REPLACEMENT
4. If the navigation indicator is installed, make sure
that the course pointer shows the same bearing data
To replace an electrical component, refer to the
as the GPS.
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM. 5. If the navigation indicator is installed, make sure
that the bearing pointer shows 130°.
97-174. GPS (KLN-89B) — OPERATIONAL CHECK
6. On the GPS receiver, make sure the bottom line
of the Self Test page shows PASS and that the
NOTE indication OK? flashes.
It can take up to 15 minutes for the GPS to
find its present position when it is 7. Push the ENT button to approve the Self Test
energized. For more information on ways to page.
make the GPS find the present position
faster, refer to the GPS (KLN-89B) Pilot's RESULT:
Manual.
• The Initialization Page shows.
NOTE
• The date and time are correct and the
Each time a new baro correction is made to
indication OK? flashes.
the helicopter encoding altimeter (if
installed), the Altimeter Baro setting must
be updated on the GPS Altitude Page. CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. On the GPS, set the OFF/ON knob to the ON • If the date or time is not correct, refer to the
position. Make sure that the Operational Revision GPS Pilot’s Guide.
Status (ORS) that shows on the Turn On Page is the
same as the ORS that shows on the first page of the 8. Push the ENT button to approve the Initialization
GPS Pilot's Guide. Page.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 113
BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: 15. Set the OFF/ON knob to the OFF position.

• The indication ACKNOWLEDGE is shown

over the cursor. Table 97-12. GPS (KLN-89B) Pages

• The top line shows that the AMERICAS, PAGE PAGE PAGE
ATLANTIC, or PACIFIC database is used. ANNUNCIATION NUMBER NUMBER

• The database date of expiration is shown on APT Airport Wpt 1-6

the second line.
VOR VOR Wpt 1-2
9. Make sure the database is not expired. The date FPL Flight Plan 0-25
of expiration is shown on the second line.
NAV Navigation 1-4
10. Push the ENT button. CAL Calculator 1-8

11. Use the right outer knob and select the NAV NDB NDB Wpt 1-2
page. Use the right inner knob and select the NAV2 SET Setup 1-11
page.
OTH Other 1-6
12. Make sure that the present position that shows on
INT Intersection 1-2
the NAV 2 page is correct.
Wpt

13. Turn the right outer knob and make sure that you USR User Wpt 0
can select the pages in Table 97-12.
ACT Active Wpt *

14. Turn the right inner knob and make sure that the * Changes with the type of waypoints in the active
page number (lower right of page) changes as shown flight plan.
in Table 97-12.

97-00-00
Page 114 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) (POINTER 4000-10)

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-175. EMERGENCY LOCATOR 97-177. REMOTE ELT (POINTER 4000-10)

TRANSMITTER (ELT) SWITCH/MONITOR — DESCRIPTION
(POINTER 4000-10)
The remote switch/monitor (Figure 97-26) is installed
beside the caution/warning/advisory panel. The
If installed, the Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) remote switch/monitor can be used to switch the ELT
(POINTER 4000-10) (Figure 97-26) can be operated on and to reset the G switch in the ELT after it is
manually or automatically. The ELT can also be used activated. In the AUTO position, the ELT will stay in
as a portable unit. The ELT transmits an emergency the arm mode whenever the main switch on the ELT is
radio signal at the 121.5 and 243 MHz frequencies. in the AUTO position. When the ELT is activated, the
The ELT system consists of the following: monitor light of the remote switch comes on.

• ELT Pointer 4000-10 (2321TX1) 97-178. ELT (POINTER 4000-10) MONITOR LIGHT
— REPLACEMENT

• Remote control switch (2321S1)

WARNING
• Circuit breaker (2321CB1)

• ELT antenna (2321E1) OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
Figure 97-26 shows the location of the remote control EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
switch (2321S1) and the location of the ELT antenna
(2321E1). The ELT circuit breaker (2321CB1) is The light in the remote switch/monitor (Figure 97-26)
located in the overhead console. is a Light Emitting Diode (LED). The LEDs are
polarized devices and must be installed with the leads
97-176. ELT (POINTER 4000-10) — OPERATION in the same position as they were removed. It is not
possible to check a LED with a multimeter.

There are three methods to activate the ELT 97-179. ELT (POINTER 4000-10) MAINTENANCE
(Figure 97-26). The first method is to set the ELT PROCEDURES — BATTERY
master switch (located on the ELT) to the AUTO REPLACEMENT
position. The ELT will operate manually when you set
the remote control switch (2321S1) to the ON position. In accordance with FAA/TCCA regulations, batteries
The second method is to set the ELT master switch to must be replaced after 2 years of shelf or service life
the ON position. The ELT will operate (ELT transmits or for any of the following reasons:
distress signal). The third method is to set both the
ELT master switch and the remote control switch • After you used the transmitter in an
(2321S1) to the AUTO position: to activate the ELT, emergency situation including an inadvertent
the helicopter deceleration must be sufficient to activation of unknown duration
operate the inertia (G) switch inside the ELT. The ELT
will operate automatically during a crash. A hard • After you operated the transmitter for more
landing may activate the inertia switch. When this than 1 cumulative hour
happens, you must set the remote control switch
(2321S1) to the RESET position and then back to the Periodic maintenance on the ELT has to be carried out
AUTO position. This resets the inertia switch in the in accordance with the local airworthiness regulations.
ELT. When the ELT transmits, indication lights in the Carry out an operational check after you installed the
remote switch and on the ELT come on. ELT.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 115
BHT-407-MM-11

ELT REMOTE SWITCH

ELT ANTENNA

GLARESHIELD STA
84.50

MASTER SWITCH
ON - (OFF/RESET) - AUTO

INDICATOR LAMP

RF CONNECTOR

TELESCOPIC ANTENNA
(MODEL 4000-10 ONLY)

STA
21.50 REMOTE CABLE JACK

407_MM_97_0026

Figure 97-26. ELT (Pointer 4000-10) System Components — Location

97-00-00
Page 116 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-180. ELT (POINTER 4000-10) SYSTEM 2. Set the PHONE COM 1 pushbutton on the audio
— COMPONENT REPLACEMENT panel to the ON position.

To replace an electrical component, refer to the 3. Pull the PULL/TST knob to disengage the
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance squelch.
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.
4. Set the volume to a comfortable level.
97-181. ELT (POINTER 4000-10) — OPERATIONAL
CHECK 5. On the ELT, set the ELT master switch to the
ARM position.

WARNING 6. During the first 5 minutes of any UTC hour, set

the remote control switch on the instrument panel to
the ON position for no longer than 5 seconds. Look at
the indication lights on the ELT and on the ELT remote
DO THE CHE CK OF TH E E LT ONLY control switch.
DURING THE FIRST 5 MINUTES OF ANY
UTC HOUR. RESTRICT THE DURATION
OF THE CHECK TO NOT MORE THAN RESULT:
5 SECONDS. IN CASE OF AN
A CCI DE N TA L E LT T R A NS M IS S IO N , • The indication light on the ELT comes on.
CONTACT THE NEAREST FSS, ATS, OR
SAR UNIT. THIS STOPS UNNECESSARY • The indication light on the ELT remote control
SEARCH AND RESCUE MISSIONS. switch comes on.

• You hear the ELT signal on the VHF COM

WARNING radio.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:
DO NOT REPEAT THE CHECK WITHOUT
REASON. CALCULATE THE SUM OF ALL • If the indication light of the ELT remote control
THE ELT CHECKS DONE BEFORE THE switch does not come on and the ELT signal
REPLACEMENT DATE OF THE BATTERY on the VHF COM radio remains silent, refer to
PACK. IF THE SUM OF ALL THE ELT Trouble No. 1 (Figure 97-27).
CHECKS IS MORE THAN 1 HOUR,
REPLACE THE BATTERY PACK. • If the indication light of the ELT remote control
switch does not come on, refer to Trouble
1. Tune the VHF COM No. 1 radio to 121.50 MHz. No. 2 (Figure 97-28).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 117
BHT-407-MM-11

TROUBLE NO. 1
ELT TRANSMITTER (POINTER 4000-10)

DISCONNECT THE BATTERY AND THE EXTERNAL POWER BEFORE DOING A

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE ELT CIRCUIT.

DO AN OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE ELT ONLY DURING THE FIRST FIVE MINUTES OF ANY UTC HOUR.
RESTRICT THE DURATION OF TEST TO NOT MORE THAN FIVE SECONDS. IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL ELT
TRANSMISSION, CONTACT THE NEAREST FSS, ATS, OR SAR UNIT. THIS STOPS UNNECESSARY SEARCH AND
RESCUE MISSIONS.

DO NOT DO AN OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE ELT WITHOUT REASON. CALCULATE THE SUM OF ALL THE ELT
TESTS DONE BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT DATE OF THE BATTERY PACK. IF THE SUM OF ALL THE ELT TESTS
IS MORE THAN ONE HOUR, REPLACE THE BATTERY PACK.

WITH THE ELT REMOTE SWITCH

(2321S1) SET TO ON, THE
INDICATOR LIGHT ON THE ELT
AND ON THE REMOTE ELT
SWITCH DO NOT COME ON, AND
NO DISTINCT ELT SIGNAL IS
HEARD ON THE VHF COMM
TRANSCEIVER.

DISCONNECT THE ELECTRICAL

CONNECTOR 2321TX1P2 FROM
THE ELT (2321TX1)

DOES THE INDICATOR LIGHT ON

THE ELT COME ON, AND DISTINCT
ELT SIGNAL IS HEARD ON THE
VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER, WHEN
THE ELT SWITCH ON THE ELT IS
SET AND HELD ON THE ON
POSITION FOR SEVERAL
SECONDS?
YES NO

REPLACE/REPAIR THE WIRING

OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN THE
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR REPLACE THE ELT 2321TX1.
2321TX1P2 AND THE ELT REMOTE
SWITCH 2321S1.

407_MM_97_0027

Figure 97-27. ELT (Pointer 4000-10) System — Trouble No. 1

97-00-00
Page 118 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

TROUBLE NO. 2
ELT TRANSMITTER (POINTER 4000-10)

DISCONNECT THE BATTERY AND THE EXTERNAL POWER BEFORE DOING A

CONTINUITY CHECK OR MAINTENANCE ON THE ELT CIRCUIT.

DO AN OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE ELT ONLY DURING THE FIRST FIVE MINUTES OF ANY UTC HOUR.
RESTRICT THE DURATION OF TEST TO NOT MORE THAN FIVE SECONDS. IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL ELT
TRANSMISSION, CONTACT THE NEAREST FSS, ATS, OR SAR UNIT. THIS STOPS UNNECESSARY SEARCH AND
RESCUE MISSIONS.

DO NOT DO AN OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE ELT WITHOUT REASON. CALCULATE THE SUM OF ALL THE ELT
TESTS DONE BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT DATE OF THE BATTERY PACK. IF THE SUM OF ALL THE ELT TESTS
IS MORE THAN ONE HOUR, REPLACE THE BATTERY PACK.

THE LIGHT IN THE ELT REMOTE

SWITCH (2321S1) DOES NOT
COME ON.

IS THERE CONTINUITY BETWEEN

GROUND AND THE REMOTE ELT
SWITCH 2321S1-L2?
YES NO

REPAIR/REPLACE THE WIRING

DISCONNECT THE INSTRUMENT OR COMPONENTS BETWEEN
PANEL CONNECTOR 10P1. 2321S1-L2 AND TERMINAL BLOCK
WTB150-T.

IS THERE APPROXIMATELY 200

OHMS RESISTANCE BETWEEN
2321S1-L1 AND 2321S1-6?
YES NO

REPAIR/REPLACE THE WIRING

REPLACE THE REMOTE ELT
AND COMPONENTS BETWEEN
SWITCH 2321S1.
2321S1-6 AND 2321S1-L1.

407_MM_97_0028

Figure 97-28. ELT (Pointer 4000-10) System — Trouble No. 2

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 119/120
 BHT-407-MM-11

COMMUNICATION NAVIGATION AND SURVEILLANCE (CNS) SYSTEM (GIA 63H)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-182. VHF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
communicate directly with the PFD and MFD using a
The VHF communication system is used by the pilot to High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
talk to the ground or other aircraft. Software and configuration settings are sent from the
PFD and MFD through the integrated avionics units
The VHF communication system includes the No. 1 and No. 2 to the LRUs in the system.
components that follow:
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 contain
• Integrated avionics unit No. 1 and No. 2 the following sub-assemblies:
(GIA 63H) (3140A1 and 3140A2)
• A main processor that interfaces with all LRUs
• Multi-Function Display (MFD) and Primary in the G1000H sub-system
Flight Display (PFD) units (GDU 1040H)
(3160DS1 and 3160DS2) • A 12-channel parallel GPS receiver that
simultaneously tracks and uses up to 12
• COM1 antenna (3450E6) satellites

• COM/GPS/WAAS 2 antenna (3450E7) • A 15-channel WAAS certified GPS receiver

• COM1 and COM2 indicators on the PFD/MFD • A VHF COM transceiver that provides tuning
from 118.00 to 136.992 MHz in 25 kHz or
Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component 8.33 kHz spacing for 760 or 2280 channel
reference designator index table and location figure configuration respectively
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the
components. • A VOR/ILS localizer receiver that provides
tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz
To help clarify system or circuit operation, refer to the increments
simplified schematic (Figure 97-29) while reading
information about the VHF communication system. • An ILS glideslope receiver that provides tuning
from 328.6 to 335.4 MHz as paired with the
97-183. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS (GIA 63H) frequency tuned on the VOR/ILS localizer
receiver
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1
and 3140A2) are located behind the Primary Flight 97-184. DISPLAY UNITS (GDU 1040H)
Display (PFD) (3160DS2) and behind the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1) in the cockpit. The Display Units (DUs) are located in the cockpit on
the instrument panel.
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1
and 3140A2) are the central processors to the G1000H The DUs provide a central display and user interface
system. The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 for the Garmin integrated flight deck. The DUs are
function as the main communications hub, linking most mounted flush to the aircraft instrument panel using
Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) with the PFD and MFD. four captive screws. The DUs can be configured as
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 contain either a Multi-Function Display (MFD) or Primary Flight
the GPS receiver, VHF COM/NAV receivers, and Display (PFD). The DUs provide the three major
system integration microprocessors. functions that follow:

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 121
BHT-407-MM-11

INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1

3140A1 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2
GIA 1 COM (GIA 63H) 3140A2
3160CB5 3140A1P1 1 3140A1P1 (GIA 63H)
1 3140A2P1
28 VDC 7.5 A 17 AIRCRAFT POWER POWER GROUND 30
BUS 19 AIRCRAFT POWER POWER GROUND 31 COMM 1 ANTENNA POWER GROUND 30
POWER GROUND 31
3450E6
COMM/GPS/WASS 2 ANTENNA
3140A1P5 3450E7
GIA 1 SYS 3140A2P5
3140A1P5 POWER GROUND 76
3160CB3 POWER GROUND 76
28 VDC 3A 29 AIRCRAFT POWER
BUS 3450E6P1

COMM
3140A1P12
3450E7P1
COMM ANTENNA
3140A2P12

COMM ANTENNA
MFD (L-DU)
3160DS1
3140A1P3 3160DS1P1 (GDU 1040H)

ETHERNET IN 1A 76 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A PFD (R-DU)

ETHERNET IN 1B 77 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B 3160DS2
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 4 ETHERNET IN 1A
3140A2P3 3160DS2P1 (GDU 1040H)
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 5 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 1A 76 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET IN 1B 77 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 4 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 5 ETHERNET IN 1B

GIA 2 COM
3160CB6 3140A2P1

28 VDC 7.5 A 17 AIRCRAFT POWER

BUS 19 AIRCRAFT POWER

GIA 2 SYS
3160CB4 3140A2P5

28 VDC 3A 29 AIRCRAFT POWER

BUS

NOTE

1 FOR CONTINUATION, REFER TO PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND

MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) INTERFACE WIRING DIAGRAM (CHAPTER 98).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_97_0041_c01

Figure 97-29. VHF Communication System — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 122 Rev. 38 4 OCT 2013 Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

• Flight instrument functions: 97-185. COM1 ANTENNA

– Display of attitude (pitch and roll), rate of turn, The COM1 antenna (3450E6) is installed on the
slip/skid, heading, airspeed, altitude, and underside of the helicopter directly below the copilot
vertical speed information (PFD or seat.
reversionary modes only)
The COM1 antenna is a bent whip that has an
– Display of engine and airframe omnidirectional propagation pattern with vertical
instrumentation (MFD or reversionary modes polarization. It operates in the 118 to 137MHz range.
only)
97-186. COM/GPS/WAAS 2 ANTENNA
– Display of the command bars and modes
(PFD or reversionary modes only)
The COM/GPS/WAAS 2 antenna (3450E5) is installed
on the cabin roof, slightly ahead of the forward fairing.
• Navigation instrument functions:
The COM/GPS/WAAS 2 antenna (3450E5) is a dual
– Display of position and ground speed for use purpose antenna that contains both COM and GPS/
by the pilot/flight crew WAAS functions. For its COM functions, it has an
omnidirectional propagation pattern with vertical
– Display of stored navigation and map polarization. It operates in the 118 to 137MHz range.
databases for use by the pilot/flight crew
97-187. COM1 AND COM2 INDICATORS ON THE
– Control and display of the HSI, Selected
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)/
Heading, and Selected Course (PFD or
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)
reversionary modes only)

– Area navigation functions using the The COM1 and COM2 indicators and controls are
determined position/velocity and stored located on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
navigation data Multi-Function Display (MFD). Both indicators have
identical controls and can independently select and
change either COM1 or COM2 frequencies.
– Approach navigation functions and associated
databases
The main indicator for the COM system is the COM
– Baro-altitude vertical navigation frequency box (Figure 97-30). The COM frequency
box shows the active frequency (in green) and the
• System interface functions: standby frequency (in white) for both COM1 and
COM2 radios, the transmit indicator, the receive
indicator, and the frequency transfer box.
– Interfacing with the integrated avionics units
No. 1 and No. 2 and the PFD and MFD
Display Units (DU) The main controls for the COM system are the COM
knob, VOL adjust/Squelch knob, and the frequency
transfer key.
– Control and display of dual communications
transceivers operating in the 118.00 to
136.975 MHz range in 8.33 kHz or 25 kHz The COM knob is used for the functions that follow:
frequency spacing
• When turned, the large knob is used for
– Control and display of dual VOR/ILS receivers frequency adjustment (Megahertz range)
tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz
increments • When turned, the small knob is used for
frequency adjustment (Kilohertz range) or,
– Control and display of transponder, as well as when pressed, to change the frequency
datalink (if installed) and weather radar (if transfer box from COM1 to COM2 or
installed) vice-versa

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 123
BHT-407-MM-11

FREQUENCY
TRANSFER KEY
COM FREQUENCY BOX

VOLUME ADJUST
(PUSH TO SWITCH
AUTO-SQUELCH
ON/OFF)

COM KNOB
- LARGE KNOB FOR
MHz ADJUST
- SMALL KNOB FOR
kHz ADJUST
- PRESS TO CHANGE
FREQUENCY
TRANSFER BOX

PFD SHOWN
(MFD TYPICAL)

RECEIVE INDICATOR FREQUENCY TRANSFER BOX

STANDBY FREQUENCY
ACTIVE FREQUENCY (IN GREEN)
TRANSMIT INDICATOR

407gc_MM_97_0045
Figure 97-30. VHF Communication System — Indications and Controls

97-00-00
Page 124 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

When turned, the VOL knob is used to set the volume Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 2
of the selected radio. If pressed, it is also used to set COM (3160CB5) circuit breaker and is then directed to
auto squelch on or off. contacts 17 and 18 of electrical connector
(3140A2P1).
If pressed quickly, the frequency transfer key is used
to change the standby frequency in the frequency Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 2
transfer box to the active frequency. If pressed and SYS (3140A1CB3) circuit breaker and is then directed
held for at least 2 seconds, the active frequency will be to contact 29 of electrical connector (3140A1P5).
automatically set to the emergency frequency of
121.5 Mhz. The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) is always
powered as soon as the battery switch is set to ON or
97-188. VHF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM — external DC power is applied to the helicopter.
OPERATION
The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) contains
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 1 the electronics to do all of the tune, transmit, and
COM (3160CB6) circuit breaker and is then directed to receive functions of the COM2 system. The maximum
contacts 17 and 18 of electrical connector transmit power is 16 watts.
(3140A1P1).
The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) transmits
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 1 and receives through the COM/GPS/WAAS 2 antenna
SYS (3140CB5) circuit breaker and is then directed to (3450E6). Transmit (TX) and receive (RX) signals are
contact 29 of electrical connector (3140A1P5). routed to and from the antenna through a coaxial
cable.
The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) is always
powered as soon as the battery switch is set to ON or An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 76 and 77 of
external DC power is applied to the helicopter. electrical connector (3140A2P3) and leaves the
Primary Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2) at contacts 2
The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) contains and 3 of electrical connector (3160DS2P1).
the electronics to do all of the tune, transmit, and
receive functions of the COM1 system. The maximum An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 4 and 5 of the
transmit power is 16 watts. electrical connector (3160DS1P1) and leaves the
integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) at contacts 2
The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) transmits and 3 of electrical connector (3140A2P3).
and receives through the COM1 antenna (3450E6).
Transmit (TX) and receive (RX) signals are routed to These two busses make a transmit and receive bus
and from the antenna through a coaxial cable. that allows two-way communications between the
integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) and the PFD
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 76 and 77 of (3160DS2). This allows the controls to be made on the
electrical connector (3140A1P3) and leaves the PFD (3160DS2) to act on the integrated avionics unit
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1) at contacts 2 No. 1 (3140A1).
and 3 of electrical connector (3160DS1P1).
The MFD (3160DS1) and the PFD (3160DS2) have
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 4 and 5 of the their own transmit/receive busses that allow either
electrical connector (3160DS1P1) and leaves the radio (COM1 or COM2) to be controlled by either
integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) at contacts 2 display unit.
and 3 of electrical connector (3140A1P3).
97-189. VHF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM —
These two busses make a transmit and receive bus COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
that allows two-way communication between the
integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) and the MFD To replace an electrical component, refer to the
(3160DS1). This allows the controls to be made on the Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
MFD (3160DS1) to act on the integrated avionics unit Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
No. 1 (3140A1). procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 125
BHT-407-MM-11

97-190. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS (GIA 63H) NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC

NO. 1 AND NO. 2 — REMOVAL, EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
CLEANING, INSPECTION, AND
INSTALLATION 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter.
For the removal, cleaning, inspection, and installation
of the integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 2. Use a plastic scraper to remove any trace of
(3140A1 and 3140A2), refer to Chapter 95. sealant around the base of the antenna (3450E6) (3,
Figure 97-31) and the shim (1).
97-191. PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) 3. Remove the four screws (2) that secure the
DISPLAY UNITS (GDU 1040H) — antenna (3450E6) (3), and the shim (1) to the
REMOVAL, CLEANING, INSPECTION, helicopter skin (4).
AND INSTALLATION
4. Disconnect the antenna connector (3450E6P1)
For the removal, cleaning, inspection, and installation (5).
of the primary flight display (PFD) and multi-function
display (MFD) display units (3160DS2 and 3160DS1),
5. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on all
refer to Chapter 95.
the electrical connectors.
97-192. COM/GPS/WAAS ANTENNA — REMOVAL,
CLEANING, INSPECTION, AND 6. Remove the antenna (3450E6) (3) from the
INSTALLATION helicopter.

For the removal, cleaning, inspection, and installation 97-194. COM1 ANTENNA (CI-122) — CLEANING
of the COM/GPS/WAAS antenna (3450E7), refer to
paragraph 97-231 to paragraph 97-234.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
97-193. COM1 ANTENNA (CI-122) — REMOVAL
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
MATERIALS REQUIRED
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
C-516 Clean Cloth
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-136 Caps and/or Plugs 1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,
clean cloth (C-516).

2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a

WARNING clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385).

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3. Remove dirt from antenna connector(s) with a
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR soft bristle brush.

97-00-00
Page 126 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

1. Shim
2. Screw
3. Antenna (3450E6)
4. Helicopter skin
5. Electrical connector (3450E6P1)

SEALANT (C-251)

SEE DETAIL A

1 1
4

3 1

DETAIL A
(S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

NOTE
1 After installation, seal edges of the antenna (3), shim (1), and helicopter skin (4) with sealant C-251.

NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0006

Figure 97-31. COM1 Antenna (CI-122)— Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 127
BHT-407-MM-11

97-195. COM1 ANTENNA (CI-122) — INSPECTION 2. Make sure the mating surfaces of the antenna
(3450E6) (3, Figure 97-31), the shim (1), and the
helicopter skin (4) are clean and show no signs of
NOTE corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
The following inspection criteria are Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
primarily intended when the part or
component has been removed from the 3. Set the shim (1) and the antenna (3450E6) (3) on
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection the mounting surface with the antenna whip arrow
requirements, applicable criteria may also pointing to the rear of the helicopter.
be used when the part or component is
installed on the helicopter.
4. Connect the antenna connector (3450E6P1) (5)
1. Examine the antenna (3450E6) (3, Figure 97-31) to the antenna (3450E6) (3).
for damage.
5. Install the screws (2) to secure the antenna
2. Examine the condition of the antenna connector (3450E6) (3) in place.
(3450E6P1) (5).

3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface NOTE

and the attaching hardware. If the mating surfaces of the components
were clean and showed no signs of
4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for corrosion at the time of installation, the
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion following step is not required.
damage. Replace when necessary.
6. Make sure the bond resistance between the
5. Make sure the mounting surface is clean and antenna (3450E6) (3) and the helicopter skin (4)
shows no signs of corrosion. meets Class A-II electrical bonding requirements
(BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).

97-196. COM1 ANTENNA (CI-122) —

INSTALLATION 7. Apply a bead of sealant (C-251) around the edge
of the base of the antenna (3450E6) (3) and the
shim (1).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
8. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. helicopter.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
9. Do an operational check of the VHF
C-251 Sealant communication system (paragraph 97-197).

97-197. VHF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM —

OPERATIONAL CHECK
WARNING

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

David Clark 10-13 or Headset (Qty 3)

1. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
Equivalent
the connectors.

97-00-00
Page 128 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

6. On the audio panel, set the COM1, MIC 1, PILOT,

NOTE
COPLT, and PASS keys to ON (green arrow on).
Refer to the integrated avionics system
antenna interface wiring diagram 7. On the pilot cyclic grip, pull the trigger to the
(Chapter 98), as applicable, for additional second detent (COM transmit) and speak into the
information on troubleshooting the system. microphone.

NOTE RESULT:
Use an external power unit, if available, to
• Make sure a sidetone can be heard in the
prevent the battery from being drained of its
pilot, copilot, and passenger headsets.
stored electrical power.
• Make sure the COM1 transmit indicator
1. Install headsets in the pilot, copilot, and
shows.
passenger communication jacks.
• Make sure the MIC 1 annunciator flashes at a
2. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the rate of approximately 1 cycle per second.
external DC power unit to ON.
8. Do a radio check with the tower or other ground
3. On the Primary Flight Display (PFD), turn the station.
COM volume adjust knob to show approximately 50%.
RESULT:
4. Tune the COM1 transceiver to a ground or tower
frequency as follows: • The outgoing transmission is heard clearly.

a. Make sure the frequency transfer box is in the • The incoming transmission is heard clearly.
COM1 standby frequency; if not, press the COM knob.
• The receive indicator shows when the
incoming transmission is received.
b. Turn the large COM knob to set the MHz
range.
9. On the audio panel, press the MIC 2 key.
c. Turn the small COM knob to set the kHz
range. RESULT:

• The COM1 and MIC 1 indicators go off.

d. Press the frequency transfer key to set the
standby frequency to the active frequency.
• The COM2 and MIC 2 indicators come on.
5. Tune the COM2 transceiver to a ground or tower
10. On the pilot cyclic grip, pull the trigger to the
frequency as follows:
second detent (COM transmit) and speak into the
microphone.
a. Press the COM knob to set the frequency
transfer box to COM2. RESULT:

b. Turn the large COM knob to set the MHz • Make sure a sidetone can be heard in the
range. pilot, copilot, and passenger headsets.

c. Turn the small COM knob to set the kHz • Make sure the COM2 transmit indicator
range. shows.

d. Press the frequency transfer key to set the • Make sure the MIC 2 annunciator flashes at a
standby frequency to the active frequency. rate of approximately 1 cycle per second.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 129
BHT-407-MM-11

11. Do a radio check with the tower or other ground RESULT:

station.
• Make sure a sidetone can be heard in the
RESULT: pilot, copilot, and passenger headsets.

• The outgoing transmission is heard clearly. • Make sure the COM2 transmit indicator
shows.
• The incoming transmission is heard clearly.
• Make sure the MIC 2 annunciator flashes at a
• The receive indicator shows when the rate of approximately 1 cycle per second.
incoming transmission is received.
17. Do a radio check with the tower or other ground
12. On the audio panel, set the COM1 and MIC 1 station.
keys to ON (green arrow on).
RESULT:
13. On the copilot cyclic grip, pull the trigger to the
second detent (COM transmit) and speak into the • The outgoing transmission is heard clearly.
microphone.
• The incoming transmission is heard clearly.
RESULT:
• The receive indicator shows when the
• Make sure a sidetone can be heard in the incoming transmission is received.
pilot, copilot, and passenger headsets.
18. Remove the headsets from the pilot, copilot, and
• Make sure the COM1 transmit indicator passenger communication jacks.
shows.
19. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
• Make sure the MIC 1 annunciator flashes at a the external DC power unit to OFF.
rate of approximately 1 cycle per second.
20. Return the helicopter to the standard
14. Do a radio check with the tower or other ground configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
station. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

RESULT: 97-198. NAVIGATION SYSTEM

• The outgoing transmission is heard clearly. The navigation system is used by the pilot to guide the
helicopter to fly along a VHF Omnidirectional Radio
• The incoming transmission is heard clearly. Range (VOR) path or to use an Instrument Landing
System (ILS) approach by tuning the NAV radio to a
• The receive indicator shows when the Localizer (LOC) frequency.
incoming transmission is received.
The navigation system includes the components that
15. On the audio panel, press the MIC 2 key. follow:

RESULT: • Integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2

(GIA 63H) (3140A1 and 3140A2)
• The COM1 and MIC 1 indicators go off.
• Multi-Function Display (MFD) and Primary
• The COM2 and MIC 2 indicators come on. Flight Display (PFD) units No. 1 and No. 2
(GDU 1040H) (3160DS1 and 3160DS2)
16. On the copilot cyclic grip, pull the trigger to the
second detent (COM transmit) and speak in the • Left and right navigation antennas (3450E1
microphone. and 3450E2)

97-00-00
Page 130 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

• Antenna coupler (3450CP1) • A VOR/ILS localizer receiver that provides

tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz
• NAV1 and NAV2 indicators on the PFD/MFD increments

Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component • An ILS glideslope receiver that provides tuning
reference designator index table and location figure from 328.6 to 335.4 MHz as paired with the
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the frequency tuned on the VOR/ILS localizer
components. receiver

To help clarify system or circuit operation, refer to the 97-200. DISPLAY UNITS
simplified schematic (Figure 97-32) while reading
information about the navigation system. The Display Units (DUs) are located in the cockpit on
the instrument panel.
97-199. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS
The DUs provide a central display and user interface
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 for the Garmin integrated flight deck. The DUs are
and 3140A2) are located behind the Primary Flight mounted flush to the aircraft instrument panel using
Display (PFD) (3160DS2) and behind the four captive screws. The DUs can be configured as
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1) in the cockpit. either a Multi-Function Display (MFD) or Primary Flight
Display (PFD). The DUs provide the three major
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 functions that follow:
and 3140A2) are the central processors to the G1000H
system. The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 • Flight Instrument Functions:
function as a main communications hub, linking most
Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) with the PFD and MFD. – Display of attitude (pitch and roll), rate of turn,
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 contain slip/skid, heading, airspeed, altitude, and
the GPS receiver, VHF COM/NAV receivers, and vertical speed information (PFD or
system integration microprocessors. reversionary modes only)

The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 – Display of engine and airframe instrumentation
communicate directly with the PFD and MFD using a (MFD or reversionary modes only)
High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
Software and configuration settings are sent from the – Display of the AFCS flight director command
displays through the integrated avionics units No. 1 bars and modes (PFD or reversionary modes
and No. 2 to Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) in the only)
system.
• Navigation Instrument Functions:
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 contains
the following sub-assemblies: – Display of position and ground speed for use
by the pilot/flight crew
• A main processor that interfaces with all LRUs
in the G1000 sub-system – Display of stored navigation and map
databases for use by the pilot/flight crew
• A 12-channel parallel GPS receiver that
simultaneously tracks and uses up to 12 – Control and display of the HSI, Selected
satellites Heading, and Selected Course (PFD or
reversionary modes only)
• A 15-channel WAAS certified GPS receiver
– Area navigation functions using the determined
• A VHF COM transceiver that provides tuning position/velocity and stored navigation data
from 118.00 to 136.992 MHz in 25 kHz or
8.33 kHz spacing for 760 or 2280 channel
configuration, respectively

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 131
BHT-407-MM-11

INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1

3140A1 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2
GIA 1 COM (GIA 63H) 3140A2
3160CB5 3140A1P1 1 3140A1P1 (GIA 63H)
1 3140A2P1
28 VDC 7.5 A 17 AIRCRAFT POWER POWER GROUND 30
BUS 19 AIRCRAFT POWER POWER GROUND 31 POWER GROUND 30
POWER GROUND 31

3140A1P5
GIA 1 SYS 3140A2P5
3140A1P5 POWER GROUND 76
3160CB3 POWER GROUND 76
28 VDC 3A 29 AIRCRAFT POWER
BUS

MFD (L-DU)
3160DS1
(GDU 1040H) PFD (R-DU)
3140A1P3 3160DS1P1
3160DS2
ETHERNET IN 1A 76 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A
3140A2P3 3160DS2P1 (GDU 1040H)
ETHERNET IN 1B 77 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 4 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET IN 1A 76 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 5 ETHERNET IN 1B ETHERNET IN 1B 77 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 4 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 5 ETHERNET IN 1B

3140A1P13

NAV ANT

3140A1P14

GIA 2 COM GLIDESCOPE ANT

ANTENNA COUPLER
3160CB6 3140A2P1
3450CP1
28 VDC 7.5 A 17 AIRCRAFT POWER 3140A2P14 3450CP1P5
BUS 19 AIRCRAFT POWER
GLIDESCOPE ANT GLS 2
NAV ANTENNA RH
3450E2
GIA 2 SYS 3140A2P13 3450CP1P4
3160CB4 3140A2P5
NAV ANT NAV 2 3450CP3P2
3450CP1P3
28 VDC 3A 29 AIRCRAFT POWER 3450CP3P1
BUS ANT
3450CP1P1

NAV 1 3450CP3P3
AVIONICS CMPT
3450CP1P2 3450E1
NAV ANTENNA LH
GLS 1

NOTE

1 FOR CONTINUATION, REFER TO PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND

MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) INTERFACE WIRING DIAGRAM (CHAPTER 98).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_97_0043_c01

Figure 97-32. Navigation System — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 132 Rev. 38 4 OCT 2013 Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

– Approach navigation functions and associated The main indicator for the navigation system is the
databases NAV frequency box (Figure 97-33). The NAV
frequency box shows the active frequency (in green)
– Baro-altitude vertical navigation and the standby frequency (in white) for both NAV1
and NAV2 radios, the station identifiers, and the
• System Interface Functions: frequency transfer box.

– Interfacing with the integrated avionics units The main controls for the NAV system are the NAV
No. 1 and No. 2 and the other DU knob, VOL adjust/morse code ON/OFF, and the
frequency transfer key.
– Control and display of dual communications
transceivers operating in the 118.00 to The NAV knob is used for the functions that follow:
136.975 MHz range in 8.33 kHz or 25 kHz
frequency spacing • When turned, the large knob is used for
frequency adjustment (Megahertz range)
– Control and display of dual VOR/ILS receivers
tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz • When turned, the small knob is used for
increments frequency adjustment (Kilohertz range) or
when pressed to change the frequency
– Control and display of transponder, datalink (if transfer box from NAV1 to NAV2 or vice-versa
installed), and weather radar (if installed)
When turned, the VOL knob is used to set the volume
97-201. NAVIGATION ANTENNAS of the selected radio. If pressed, it is also used to set
morse code audio on or off.
The navigation antennas (3450E1 and 3450E2) are
installed on the aft fuselage, on both sides of the If pressed quickly, the frequency transfer key is used
helicopter. to change the standby frequency in the frequency
transfer box to the active frequency.
The navigation antennas (3450E1 and 3450E2) are
balanced loops that have an omnidirectional On the PFD, the CDI softkey switches between the
propagation pattern with horizontal polarization. They different navigation sources. When the CDI key is
operates in the 108 to 118 MHz range. pressed, the navigation source changes from NAV1,
NAV2, or GPS as the active navigation source.
97-202. ANTENNA COUPLER
97-204. NAVIGATION SYSTEM — OPERATION
The antenna coupler (3450CP1) is installed behind the
instrument panel in the cockpit of the helicopter. Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 1
COM (3160CB6) circuit breaker and is then directed to
The antenna coupler (3450CP1) splits the signal from contacts 17 and 19 of electrical connector
one set of navigation antennas to two independent (3140A1P1).
navigation receivers inside the integrated avionics
units No. 1 and No. 2. It operates in the 108 to 118 Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 1
MHz range and in the 329 to 335.3 MHz range. SYS (3140CB4) circuit breaker and is then directed to
contact 29 of integrated avionics unit No. 1 electrical
97-203. NAV1 AND NAV2 INDICATORS ON THE connector (3140A1P5).
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)/
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) is always
powered as soon as the battery switch is set to ON or
The NAV1 and NAV2 indicators and controls are external DC power is applied to the helicopter.
located on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
Multi-Function Display (MFD). Both indicators have The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) contains
identical controls and can independently select and the electronics to do all of the tune and receive
change either NAV1 or NAV2 frequencies. functions of the NAV1 system.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 133
BHT-407-MM-11

FREQUENCY
TRANSFER KEY

NAV FREQUENCY BOX

VOLUME ADJUST
(PUSH TO SWITCH
MORSE CODE
ON/OFF)

NAV KNOB
- LARGE KNOB FOR
MHz ADJUST
- SMALL KNOB FOR
kHz ADJUST
- PRESS TO CHANGE
FREQUENCY
TRANSFER BOX

CDI SOFTKEY
PFD SHOWN
(MFD TYPICAL)

STANDBY FREQUENCY

STATION IDENTIFIER

ACTIVE FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY TRANSFER BOX

407gc_MM_97_0048
Figure 97-33. Navigation System — Indications and Controls

97-00-00
Page 134 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) receives integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) at contacts 2
through the left and right antennas (3450E1 and and 3 of electrical connector (3140A2P3).
3450E2). Receive (RX) signals are routed from the
antenna through a coaxial cable. These two busses make a transmit and receive bus
that allows two-way communications between the
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 76 and 77 of integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) and the PFD
electrical connector (3140A1P3) and leaves the (3160DS2). This allows the controls to be made on the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1) at contacts 2 PFD (3160DS2) to act on the integrated avionics unit
and 3 of electrical connector (3160DS1P1). No. 1 (3140A1).

An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 4 and 5 of the The MFD (3160DS1) and the PFD (3160DS2) have
electrical connector (3160DS1P1) and leaves the their own transmit/receive busses, which allows either
integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) at contacts 2 radio (NAV1 or NAV2) to be controlled by either
and 3 of electrical connector (3140A1P3). display unit.

These two busses make a transmit and receive bus 97-205. NAVIGATION SYSTEM — COMPONENT
that allows two way communications between the REPLACEMENT
integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) and the MFD
(3160DS1). This allows the controls to be made on the To replace an electrical component, refer to the
MFD (3160DS1) to act on the integrated avionics unit Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
No. 1 (3140A1). Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 2
COM (3160CB5) circuit breaker and is then directed to 97-206. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS —
contacts 17 and 19 of electrical connector REMOVAL, CLEANING, INSPECTION,
(3140A2P1). AND INSTALLATION

Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 2 For the removal, cleaning, inspection, and installation
SYS (3140A1CB3) circuit breaker and is then directed of the integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
to contact 29 of integrated avionics unit No. 2 electrical (3140A1 and 3140A2), refer to Chapter 95.
connector (3140A1P5).
97-207. DISPLAY UNITS — REMOVAL,
The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) is always CLEANING, INSPECTION, AND
powered as soon as the battery switch is set to ON or INSTALLATION
external DC power is applied to the helicopter.
For the removal, cleaning, inspection, and installation
The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) contains of the display units No. 1 and No. 2 (3160DS1 and
the electronics to do all of the tune and receive 3160DS2), refer to Chapter 95.
functions of the COM2 system.
97-208. NAVIGATION ANTENNA (DMN48-1) —
The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) receives REMOVAL
through the left and right navigation antennas (3450E1
and 3450E6). Receive (RX) signals are routed from
the antenna through a coaxial cable.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 76 and 77 of
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
electrical connector (3140A2P3) and leaves the
Primary Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2) at contacts 2 NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
and 3 of electrical connector (3160DS2P1).
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 4 and 5 of the
electrical connector (3160DS1P1) and leaves the

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 135
BHT-407-MM-11

97-209. NAVIGATION ANTENNA (DMN48-1) —

WARNING CLEANING

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MATERIALS REQUIRED

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

NOTE C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

The procedure is provided for the left side C-516 Clean Cloth
antenna (3450E1). The procedure is the
same for the right side antenna (3450E2),
except where indicated. 1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,
clean cloth (C-516).
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter. 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
2. Remove the top access panel in the baggage bay (C-385).
to gain access to the NAV antenna (3450E1) (1,
Figure 97-34). 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
soft bristle brush.
3. Use a plastic scraper to remove any trace of
sealant around the base of the NAV antenna (3450E1) 97-210. NAVIGATION ANTENNA (DMN48-1) —
(1) and the helicopter skin (2). INSPECTION

4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3450CP3P3)

(4) (or the electrical connector (3450CP3P2) (3)). NOTE
The following inspection criteria are
5. Remove the antenna coaxial cable (6) from the primarily intended when the part or
four supports (5). component has been removed from the
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
6. Remove the eight screws (7) and the washers (8) requirements, applicable criteria may also
that secure the antenna (1) to the helicopter skin (2). be used when the part or component is
installed on the helicopter.
7. Remove the NAV antenna (3450E1) (1) and pull
the coaxial cable (6) and electrical connector 1. Examine the NAV antenna (3450E1) (1,
(3450CP3P3) (4) (or the electrical connector Figure 97-34) for damage.
(3450CP3P2) (3)) through the helicopter skin (2).
2. Examine the condition of the electrical
8. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on all connectors.
the electrical connectors.
3. Examine the condition of the helicopter skin (2)
wire mesh for corrosion and broken strands.

4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for

cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
damage. Replace when necessary.

5. Make sure the mounting surface of the NAV

antenna (3450E1) (1) is clean and prepared for
electrical bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).

97-00-00
Page 136 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

2
5
5
8
7 1

1 2

1. NAV antenna (3450E1)

5 2. Helicopter skin
3. Electrical connector (3450CP3P2)
4. Electrical connector (3450CP3P3)
3
5. Support
4 6. Coaxial cable
7. Screw
8. Washer

SEALANT (C-251)

5
NOTES
DETAIL A 1 Wet install eight screws (7) with sealant
LEFT SIDE SHOWN (C-251).
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE
2 After installation, apply sealant (C-251) to
the edges of the NAV antenna (1) base.
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0049
Figure 97-34. Navigation Antennas (DMN48-1) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 137
BHT-407-MM-11

97-211. NAVIGATION ANTENNA (DMN48-1) —

NOTE
INSTALLATION
If the mating surfaces of the components
MATERIALS REQUIRED were clean and showed no signs of
corrosion at the time of installation, the
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. following step is not required.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 8. Make sure the bond resistance between the

antenna (1) and the helicopter skin (2) meets Class
C-251 Sealant A-II electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8).

WARNING 9. Apply a bead of sealant (C-251) around the edge

of the base of the NAV antenna (3450E1) (1) and the
helicopter skin (2).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 10. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC helicopter.
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
11. Do an operational check of the navigation system
(paragraph 97-216).
CAUTION
12. Install the top access panel in the baggage bay.

MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT 97-212. ANTENNA COUPLER (DMH69-1) —

DAMAGE OR SA ND THROUGH THE REMOVAL
COPPER MESH ON THE HELICOPTER
SKIN (2, FIGURE 97-34). MATERIALS REQUIRED
1. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
the connectors.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
2. Make sure the mating surfaces of the NAV
antenna (3450E1) (1), and the helicopter skin (2) are C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
clean and show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer
to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface
preparation. WARNING

3. Insert the electrical connector (3450CP3P3) (4)

(or the electrical connector (3450CP3P2) (3)) and the OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
coaxial cable (6) through the helicopter skin (2). WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
4. Connect the electrical connector (3450CP3P3)
(4) (or the electrical connector (3450CP3P2) (3)). 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter.
5. Insert the antenna coaxial cable (6) in the four
supports (5). 2. Remove the shroud assembly from the left side of
the instrument panel (Chapter 95).
6. Apply sealant (C-251) on the screws (7).
3. Use a plastic scraper to remove any trace of
7. Install the NAV antenna (3450E1) (1) on the sealant around the base of the antenna coupler
helicopter skin (2) with the screws (7) and the washers (DMH69-1) (3450CP1) (1, Figure 97-35) and the
(8). Tighten the screws. firewall.

97-00-00
Page 138 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A
3
2

1 1 4

1. Antenna coupler (DMH69-1) (3450CP1)

2. Electrical connector (3450CP1P4) 7
3. Electrical connector (3450CP1P1)
4. Washer 6
5. Screw
6. Electrical connector (3450CP1P2)
7. Electrical connector (3450CP1P5)
8. Electrical connector (3450CP1P3)

SEALANT (C-251)
DETAIL A
NOTE
1 After installation, apply a bead of sealant (C-251) to the edges of the antenna coupler (1)
and the firewall.

407gc_MM_97_0046
Figure 97-35. Antenna Coupler (DMH69-1) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 139
BHT-407-MM-11

4. Disconnect the electrical connector 97-214. ANTENNA COUPLER (DMH69-1) —

(3450CP1P4) (2). INSPECTION

5. Disconnect the electrical connector NOTE

(3450CP1P1) (3).
The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or
6. Disconnect the electrical connector component has been removed from the
(3450CP1P2) (6). helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
7. Disconnect the electrical connector be used when the part or component is
(3450CP1P5) (7). installed on the helicopter.

1. Examine the antenna coupler (DMH69-1)

8. Disconnect the electrical connector (3450CP1) (1, Figure 97-35) for damage.
(3450CP1P3) (8).
2. Examine the condition of the connector.
9. Remove the two screws (5) and washers (4) that
secure the antenna coupler (DMH69-1) (3450CP1) (1) 3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface
to the firewall. and the attaching hardware.

10. Remove the antenna coupler (DMH69-1) 4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
(3450CP1) (1) from the helicopter. cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
damage. Replace when necessary.
11. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on all
the electrical connectors. 5. Make sure the mounting surface is clean and
prepared for bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM).
97-213. ANTENNA COUPLER (DMH69-1) —
CLEANING 97-215. ANTENNA COUPLER (DMH69-1) —
INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-251 Sealant
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth

WARNING
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,
clean cloth (C-516).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
(C-385).
1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the antenna
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a coupler (DMH69-1) (3450CP1) (1, Figure 97-35) and
soft bristle brush. the firewall are clean and show no signs of corrosion.

97-00-00
Page 140 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for 97-216. NAVIGATION SYSTEM — OPERATIONAL
surface preparation. CHECK

2. Install the two screws (5) and washers (4) that

secure the antenna coupler (DMH69-1) (3450CP1) (1) SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
to the firewall. Tighten the screws.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NOTE
David Clark 10-13 or Headset (Qty 3)
If the mating surfaces of the components Equivalent
were clean and showed no signs of
corrosion at the time of installation, the IFR 4000 or Equivalent Navigation/
following step is not required. Communications
Test Set
3. Make sure the bond resistance between the
antenna coupler (DMH69-1) (3450CP1) (1) and the
firewall meets Class R-II electrical bonding NOTE
requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). Refer to the integrated avionics system
antenna interface wiring diagram
4. Apply a bead of sealant (C-251) around the edge (Chapter 98), as applicable, for additional
of the base of the antenna coupler (DMH69-1) information on troubleshooting the system.
(3450CP1) (1) and the firewall.
NOTE
5. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from Use an external power unit, if available, to
the connectors. prevent the battery from being drained of its
stored electrical power.
6. Connect the electrical connector
(3450CP1P4) (2). 1. Install headsets in the pilot and copilot
communication jacks.

7. Connect the electrical connector 2. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the
(3450CP1P1) (3). external DC power unit to ON.

8. Connect the electrical connector 3. On the Primary Flight Display (PFD), turn the
(3450CP1P2) (6). NAV volume adjust knob to show approximately 50%.

9. Connect the electrical connector 4. Set up the test set and tune it to generate a VOR
(3450CP1P5) (7). signal of 108.00 MHz, going TO the station, and a
bearing of 0°.
10. Connect the electrical connector
(3450CP1P3) (8). 5. On the PFD, press the CDI softkey until VOR1 is
set as the primary NAV source on the PFD.

11. Connect the battery or external DC power to the

6. On the audio panel, set the NAV1 key to on
helicopter.
(triangle indicator on).

12. Do an operational check of the navigation system 7. Tune the NAV1 transceiver to the test set
(paragraph 97-216). frequency as follows:

13. Install the shroud assembly on the left side of the a. Make sure the frequency transfer box is in the
instrument panel (Chapter 95). NAV1 standby frequency; if not, press the NAV knob.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 141
BHT-407-MM-11

b. Turn the large NAV knob to set the MHz RESULT:

range.
• Make sure the command bar does not change
c. Turn the small NAV knob to set the kHz range. position when the test set is moved.

d. Press the frequency transfer key (slightly 13. Move the test set 10 feet (3 m) to the right of the
above the NAV knob) to set the standby frequency to helicopter.
the active frequency.
RESULT:
NOTE
If the station identifier is not shown in the • Make sure the command bar does not change
NAV frequency box, press the left volume position when the test set is moved.
adjust knob to enable morse code.
14. Remove the headsets from the pilot, copilot, and
RESULT: passenger communication jacks.

• Make sure a morse code audio can be heard 15. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
in the pilot and copilot headsets. the external DC power unit to OFF.

• The station identifier letters are visible in the

16. Return the helicopter to the standard
NAV frequency box.
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
8. Press the small NAV knob.

9. Tune the NAV 2 transceiver to the test set

97-217. GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
frequency as follows: (GPS)

a. Turn the large NAV knob to set the MHz The Global Positioning System (GPS) is used by the
range. pilot to guide the helicopter to fly along pre-established
waypoints of latitude and longitude.
b. Turn the small NAV knob to set the kHz range.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) includes the
c. Press the frequency transfer key (slightly components that follow:
above the NAV knob) to set the standby frequency to
the active frequency. • Integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
(GIA 63H) (3140A1 and 3140A2)
10. On the audio panel, set the NAV1 key to off
(triangle indicator off). • Multi-Function Display (MFD) and Primary
Flight Display (PFD) units No. 1 and No. 2
11. On the audio panel, set the NAV2 key to on (GDU 1040H) (3160DS1 and 3160DS2)
(triangle indicator on).
• GPS/WAAS antenna No. 1
RESULT:
• COMM/GPS/WAAS antenna No. 2
• Make sure a morse code audio can be heard
in the pilot and copilot headsets. • GPS status page on the Multi-Function
Display (MFD)
• The station identifier letters are visible in the
NAV frequency box. Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component
reference designator index table and location figure
12. Move the test set 10 feet (3 m) to the left of the (Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the
helicopter. components.

97-00-00
Page 142 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

To help clarify system or circuit operation, refer to the • An ILS glideslope receiver that provides tuning
simplified schematic (Figure 97-36) while reading from 328.6 to 335.4 MHz as paired with the
information about the global positioning system. frequency tuned on the VOR/ILS localizer
receive
97-218. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS
97-219. DISPLAY UNITS
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1
and 3140A2) are located behind the Primary Flight The Display Units (DUs) are located in the cockpit on
Display (PFD) (3160DS2) and behind the the instrument panel.
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1) in the cockpit.
The DUs provide a central display and user interface
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 for the Garmin integrated flight deck. The DUs are
and 3140A2) are the central processors to the G1000H mounted flush to the aircraft instrument panel using
system. The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 four captive screws. The DUs can be configured as
(3140A1 and 3140A2) function as a main either a Multi-Function Display (MFD) or Primary Flight
communications hub, linking most Line Replaceable Display (PFD). The DUs provide the three major
Units (LRUs) with the PFD and MFD. The integrated functions that follow:
avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 and 3140A2)
contain the GPS receiver, VHF COM/NAV receivers, • Flight instrument functions:
and system integration microprocessors.
– Display of attitude (pitch and roll), rate of turn,
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 slip/skid, heading, airspeed, altitude, and
and 3140A2) communicate directly with the PFD and vertical speed information (PFD or
MFD using a High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet reversionary modes only)
connection. Software and configuration settings are
sent from the displays through the integrated avionics – Display of engine and airframe instrumentation
units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 and 3140A2) to LRUs in (MFD or reversionary modes only)
the system.
– Display of the AFCS flight director command
The integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 bars and modes (PFD or reversionary modes
and 3140A2) contain the following sub-assemblies: only)

• A main processor that interfaces with all LRUs • Navigation instrument functions:
in the G1000 sub-system
– Display of position and ground speed for use
• A 12-channel parallel GPS receiver that by the pilot/flight crew
simultaneously tracks and uses up to 12
satellites – Display of stored navigation and map
databases for use by the pilot/flight crew
• A 15-channel WAAS certified GPS receiver
– Control and display of the HSI, Selected
• A VHF COM transceiver that provides tuning Heading and Selected Course (PFD or
from 118.00 to 136.992 MHz in 25 kHz or reversionary modes only)
8.33 kHz spacing for 760 or 2280 channel
configuration, respectively – Area navigation functions using the determined
position/velocity and stored navigation data
• A VOR/ILS localizer receiver that provides
tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz – Approach navigation functions and associated
increments databases

– Baro-altitude vertical navigation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 143
BHT-407-MM-11

INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1

3140A1 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2
GIA 1 COM (GIA 63H) 3140A2
3160CB5 3140A1P1 1 3140A1P1 (GIA 63H)
1 3140A2P1 COMM/GPS/WAAS 2 ANTENNA
28 VDC 7.5 A 17 AIRCRAFT POWER POWER GROUND 30 3450E7
BUS 19 AIRCRAFT POWER POWER GROUND 31 POWER GROUND 30
POWER GROUND 31
GPS/WAAS 1 ANTENNA
3140A1P5 3450E5
GIA 1 SYS 3140A2P5
3140A1P5 POWER GROUND 76
3160CB3 POWER GROUND 76
GPS
28 VDC 3A 29 AIRCRAFT POWER
BUS 3450E7P2

3450E5P1

3140A1P11

GPS/WAAS ANT 3140A2P11

GPS/WAAS ANT

MFD (L-DU)
3160DS1
3140A1P3 3160DS1P1 (GDU 1040H)

ETHERNET IN 1A 76 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A PFD (R-DU)

ETHERNET IN 1B 77 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B 3160DS2
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 4 ETHERNET IN 1A
3140A2P3 3160DS2P1 (GDU 1040H)
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 5 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 1A 76 2 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET IN 1B 77 3 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 2 4 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 3 5 ETHERNET IN 1B

GIA 2 COM
3160CB6 3140A2P1

28 VDC 7.5 A 17 AIRCRAFT POWER

BUS 19 AIRCRAFT POWER

GIA 2 SYS
3160CB4 3140A2P5

28 VDC 3A 29 AIRCRAFT POWER

BUS

NOTE

1 FOR CONTINUATION, REFER TO PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND

MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) INTERFACE WIRING DIAGRAM (CHAPTER 98).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_97_0042_c01

Figure 97-36. Global Positioning System (GPS) — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 144 Rev. 38 4 OCT 2013 Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

• System interface functions: has a gain of 26.5 to 30.5 dB and an impedance of

50 ohms. It operates in the 1575.42 ±2 MHz range.
– Interfacing with the integrated avionics unit
No. 1 and No. 2 and the other DU 97-222. GPS STATUS PAGE ON THE
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)
– Control and display of dual communications
transceivers operating in the 118.00 to NOTE
136.975 MHz range in 8.33 kHz or 25 kHz
frequency spacing For information to navigate to the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) GPS
STATUS page, refer to MFD Page Group
– Control and display of dual VOR/ILS receivers
Navigation within Chapter 95.
tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz
increments
The indicators and controls for the Global Positioning
System (GPS) are located on the Multi-Function
– Control and display of transponder, datalink (if Display (MFD) (Figure 97-37). The GPS STATUS
installed), and weather radar (if installed) page shows the available satellites and signal
strength, the satellite status, and the GPS status and
97-220. GPS/WAAS ANTENNA NO. 1 has active GPS softkeys.

The GPS/WAAS antenna No. 1 (3450E5) is installed The active GPS softkeys are used to select the active
on the forward fairing, on the top of the helicopter. The GPS for the navigation source. If GPS is selected as
location of the antenna changes if the Traffic Advisory the active NAV source, the GPS1 or GPS2 softkeys
System (TAS) kit is installed (BHT-407-II-28). When will select either GPS1 or GPS2 as the active GPS
the traffic advisory system is installed, the GPS/WAAS used by the NAV system.
antenna (3450E5) is installed on the lower part of the
forward fairing. If the traffic advisory system is not On the Primary Flight Display (PFD), the CDI softkey
installed, the antenna is installed on the top part of the switches between the different navigation sources.
forward fairing. When the CDI key is pressed, the navigation source
changes from NAV1, NAV2, or GPS as the active
The GPS/WAAS antenna No. 1 (3450E5) is a model navigation source. Refer to the navigation system
GA 36 antenna. It has a gain of 27 ±0.5 dB and an (paragraph 97-203) for more information on the CDI
impedance of 50 ohms. It operates in the 1575 softkey.
±10 MHz range.
97-223. GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
If the XM satellite weather and radio kit (GPS) — OPERATION
(BHT-407-II-36) is installed, the GPS/WAAS antenna
is changed to a model GA 37 antenna. This antenna Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 1
has the added features of detecting and transmitting COM (3160CB6) circuit breaker and is then directed to
the XM weather and radio signals. It has a gain of 24 contacts 17 and 19 of electrical connector
±2 dB and an impedance of 50 ohms. It operates in (3140A1P1).
the 2332.5 to 2345 MHz range.
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 1
97-221. COM/GPS/WAAS ANTENNA NO. 2 SYS (3140CB4) circuit breaker and is then directed to
contact 29 of electrical connector (3140A1P5).
The COM/GPS/WAAS antenna No. 1 (3450E5) is
installed slightly ahead of the forward fairing, on the The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) is always
roof of the helicopter. powered as soon as the battery switch is set to ON or
external DC power is applied to the helicopter.
The COM/GPS/WAAS antenna No. 2 (3450E7) is a
Comant model CI 2580-200 antenna. The antenna is a The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) contains
duaI-purpose type and feeds both the COM2 the electronics to do all of the tune and receive
transceiver and the GPS2 receiver. For the GPS, it functions of the GPS1 system.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 145
BHT-407-MM-11

SELECTED PAGE GROUP AND TITLE GPS SOLUTION INDICATOR

AUX-GPS STATUS PAGE

ACTIVE GPS SOFTKEY

No bar = Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite

Hollow bar = Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
Light blue bar = Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
Green bar = Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
Checkered bar = Receiver has excluded the satellite (fault detection and exclusion
“D” indication = Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations

407gc_MM_97_0050
Figure 97-37. Global Positioning System (GPS) — Indications and Controls

97-00-00
Page 146 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

– The integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) at contacts 2
receives through the GPS/WAAS antenna and 3 of electrical connector (3140A2P3).
No. 1 (3450E5). Receive (RX) signals are
routed from the antenna through a coaxial These two busses make a transmit and receive bus
cable. that allows two-way communication between the
integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) and the PFD
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 76 and 77 of (3160DS2). This allows the controls to be made on the
electrical connector (3140A1P3) and leaves the PFD (3160DS2) to act on the integrated avionics unit
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (3160DS1) at contacts 2 No. 2 (3140A2).
and 3 of electrical connector (3160DS1P1).
The MFD (3160DS1) and the PFD (3160DS2) have
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 4 and 5 of the their own transmit/receive busses that allow either
electrical connector (3160DS1P1) and leaves the receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) to be controlled by either
integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) at contacts 2 display unit.
and 3 of electrical connector (3140A1P3).

97-224. NAVIGATION SYSTEM — COMPONENT

These two busses make a transmit and receive bus
REPLACEMENT
that allows two-way communication between the
integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) and the MFD
(3160DS1). This allows the controls to be made on the To replace an electrical component, refer to the
MFD (3160DS1) to act on the integrated avionics unit Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
No. 1 (3140A1). Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM.
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 2
COM (3160CB5) circuit breaker and is then directed to 97-225. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS —
contacts 17 and 19 of electrical connector REMOVAL, CLEANING, INSPECTION,
(3140A2P1). AND INSTALLATION

Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the GIA 2 For the removal, cleaning, inspection, and installation
SYS (3140A1CB3) circuit breaker and is then directed of the integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2
to contact 29 of electrical connector (3140A1P5). (3140A1 and 3140A2), refer to Chapter 95.

The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) is always 97-226. DISPLAY UNITS — REMOVAL,
powered as soon as the battery switch is set to ON or CLEANING, INSPECTION, AND
external DC power is applied to the helicopter. INSTALLATION

The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) contains

For the removal, cleaning, inspection, and installation
the electronics to do all of the tune and receive
of the display units No.1 and No. 2 (3160DS1 and
functions of the GPS2 system.
3160DS2), refer to Chapter 95.

The integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) receives

through the COM/GPS/WAAS 2 antenna (3450E7). 97-227. GPS/WAAS ANTENNA (GA 36) —
Receive (RX) signals are routed from the antenna REMOVAL
through a coaxial cable.

An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 76 and 77 of MATERIALS REQUIRED

electrical connector (3140A2P3) and leaves the
Primary Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2) at contacts 2 Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
and 3 of electrical connector (3160DS2P1).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
An Ethernet input bus enters at contacts 4 and 5 of the
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
electrical connector (3160DS2P1) and leaves the

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 147
BHT-407-MM-11

97-228. GPS/WAAS ANTENNA (GA 36) —

WARNING CLEANING

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MATERIALS REQUIRED

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

NOTE
C-516 Clean Cloth
This procedure is for the GPS/WAAS
antenna (GA 36). If the XM satellite
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,
weather and radio kit (BHT-407-II-36) is
clean cloth (C-516).
installed, refer to the removal of the GPS/
WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37) (paragraph 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
97-328). clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385).
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter. 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
soft bristle brush.

2. Use a plastic scraper to remove any trace of 97-229. GPS/WAAS ANTENNA (GA 36) —
sealant around the base of the GPS/WAAS antenna INSPECTION
(GA 36) (3450E5) (2, Figure 97-38) and the forward
fairing assembly or support assembly (3).
NOTE
The following inspection criteria are
3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the GPS/ primarily intended when the part or
WAAS antenna (GA 36) (3450E5) (2) to the forward component has been removed from the
fairing assembly or support assembly (3). helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is
4. Remove the lockwire from the antenna connector installed on the helicopter.
(3450E7P2) (4).
1. Examine the GPS/WAAS antenna (GA 36)
(3450E5) (2, Figure 97-38) for damage.
5. Disconnect the coax connector (3450E5P1).
2. Examine the condition of the connector.
6. Remove the GPS/WAAS antenna (GA 36)
(3450E5) (2) and packing (5) from the forward fairing 3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface
assembly or support assembly (3). and the attaching hardware.

4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for

7. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on all cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
the electrical connectors. damage. Replace when necessary.

97-00-00
Page 148 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A
1

1 3

2 4

4 5

DETAIL A

NOTES
1 Antenna (GA 36) location if TAS antenna is not installed.
1. Screw
2. GPS/WAAS antenna (GA 36) (3450E5)
2 Antenna (GA 36) location if TAS antenna is installed
3. Forward fairing assembly or support assembly
(BHT-407-II-28).
4. Antenna connector (3450E5P1)
5. Packing
3 Wet install the screws with sealant (C-251).

4 After installation, apply sealant (C-251) to the mating

LOCKWIRE (C-508) edges of the GPS/WAAS antenna (GA 36) and the
forward fairing assembly or support assembly.
SEALANT (C-251)
5 Install lockwire (C-508) to secure antenna connector
(3450E5P1) (4).
407gc_MM_97_0051_c01

Figure 97-38. GPS/WAAS Antenna (GA 36) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 149
BHT-407-MM-11

97-230. GPS/WAAS ANTENNA (GA 36) — 7. Apply a bead of sealant (C-251) around the edge
INSTALLATION of the base of the GPS/WAAS antenna (GA 36)
(3450E5) (2) and the forward fairing assembly or
support assembly (3).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
8. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. helicopter.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
9. Do an operational check of the global positioning
C-251 Sealant system (paragraph 97-235).
C-508 Lockwire
97-231. COM/GPS/WAAS ANTENNA (CI-2580-200)
— REMOVAL

WARNING
MATERIALS REQUIRED
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
1. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
the connectors.

2. Make sure the mating surfaces of the GPS/WAAS WARNING

antenna (GA 36) (3450E5) (2, Figure 97-38) and the
forward fairing assembly or support assembly (3) are
clean. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
3. Connect the coax connector (3450E5P1) (4) to EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
the GPS/WAAS antenna (GA 36) (3450E5) (2).

1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power

4. Install lockwire (C-508) to secure the coax from the helicopter.
connector (3450E5P1) (4).

2. Use a plastic scraper to remove any trace of

5. Wet install the screws (1) with sealant (C-251) to sealant around the base of the antenna COM/GPS/
secure the GPS/WAAS antenna (GA 36) (3450E5) (2) WAAS 2 (3450E7) (1, Figure 97-39), shim (7), and
in place. Tighten the screws.
helicopter roof (6).

3. Remove the screws (8 and 9) that secure the

antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2 (3450E7) (1) to the
helicopter roof (6).

4. Disconnect the antenna connector

(3450E7P1) (4) from the antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2
6. Deleted (3450E7) (1).

97-00-00
Page 150 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

1 1

2 9

2 8

1. Antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2 (3450E7) 3

2. Antenna connector (VHF)
3. Antenna connector (GPS)
4. Antenna connector (3450E7P1)
5. Antenna connector (3450E7P2)
6. Roof 4
1 7
7. Shim
8. Screw
9. Screw
5

SEALANT (C-251)
6
NOTES
1 After installation, seal edges of antenna (1) and shim (7)
with sealant (C-251).

2 Intall screws (8 and 9) wet with sealant (C-251).

DETAIL A

407gc_MM_97_0047
Figure 97-39. COM/GPS/WAAS Antenna (CI 2580-200) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 151
BHT-407-MM-11

5. Disconnect the antenna connector (3450E7P2) 3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface
(5) from the antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2 (3450E7) and the attaching hardware.
(1).
4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
6. Remove the antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2 cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
(3450E7) (1) and the shim (7) from the helicopter damage. Replace when necessary.
roof (6).
5. Make sure the mating surface is clean and
7. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on all prepared for electrical bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
the electrical connectors. Chapter 8).

97-232. COM/GPS/WAAS ANTENNA (CI-2580-200) 97-234. COM/GPS/WAAS ANTENNA (CI-2580-200)

— CLEANING — INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol C-251 Sealant

C-516 Clean Cloth

WARNING
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,
clean cloth (C-516).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
(C-385). EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a 1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the antenna
soft bristle brush. COM/GPS/WAAS 2 (3450E7) (1, Figure 97-39), shim
(7), and helicopter roof (6) are clean and acceptable
for electrical bonding. Otherwise, refer to the
97-233. COM/GPS/WAAS ANTENNA (CI-2580-200)
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8.
— INSPECTION

2. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from

NOTE the connectors.
The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or 3. Insert the antenna connector (3450E7P1) (4) and
component has been removed from the the antenna connector (3450E7P2) (5) through the
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection helicopter roof (6) and the holes in the shim (7).
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is 4. Connect the antenna connector (3450E7P1) (4)
installed on the helicopter. to the connector (VHF) (2) on the antenna COM/GPS/
WAAS 2 (3450E7) (1).
1. Examine the antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2
(3450E7) (1, Figure 97-39) for damage. 5. Connect the antenna connector (3450E7P2) (5)
to the antenna connector (GPS) (3) on the antenna
2. Examine the condition of the connector. COM/GPS/WAAS 2 (3450E7) (1).

97-00-00
Page 152 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

6. Wet install the screws (8 and 9) with sealant 4. Turn the small FMS knob to select the
(C-251) to secure the antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2 AUX-SYSTEM STATUS page.
(3450E7) (1) to the helicopter roof (6). Tighten the
screws. RESULT:

7. Make sure the bond resistance between the • On the AUX - SYSTEM STATUS page, the
antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2 (3450E7) (1) and LRU INFO for GIA1 has a green check mark.
helicopter roof (6) meets Class R-II electrical bonding
requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). • On the AUX - SYSTEM STATUS page, the
LRU INFO for GIA2 has a green check mark.
8. Apply a bead of sealant (C-251) around the edge
of the base of the antenna COM/GPS/WAAS 2 5. Turn the small FMS knob and select AUX - GPS
(3450E7) (1), shim (7), and helicopter roof (6). STATUS to load the GPS STATUS page.

9. Connect the battery or external DC power to the 6. Press the GPS1 softkey.
helicopter.
RESULT:
10. Do an operational check of the global positioning
system (paragraph 97-235). • On the GPS STATUS page, the ACTIVE GPS
is GPS1.
97-235. GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) —
OPERATIONAL CHECK • Within 5 to 10 minutes of having electrical
power applied to the helicopter, the GPS
SOLUTION on the GPS STATUS page
NOTE changes to 3D NAV.
Refer to the integrated avionics system
antenna interface wiring diagram 7. Press the GPS2 softkey.
(Chapter 98), as applicable, for additional
information on troubleshooting the system. RESULT:

• On the GPS STATUS page, the ACTIVE GPS

NOTE
changes to GPS2.
Use an external power unit, if available, to
prevent the battery from being drained of its • Within 5 to 10 minutes of having electrical
stored electrical power. power applied to the helicopter, the GPS
SOLUTION on the GPS STATUS page
1. Move the helicopter outside to an area with no changes to 3D NAV.
obstructions to the GPS signals from the satellites.
8. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
2. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the the external DC power unit to OFF.
external DC power unit to ON.
9. Return the helicopter to the standard
3. On the Multi-Function Display (MFD), turn the configuration. Refer to the Standard Practices — After
FMS large knob to view the AUX menu. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 153/154
 BHT-407-MM-11

INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM (ICS) (GMA 350H)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-236. INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM The audio panel controls the systems that follow
(ICS) (Figure 97-40):

The Intercommunication System (ICS) allows the crew • COM1 and COM2
to communicate with each other through their
headsets, to listen to communications and navigation • NAV1 and NAV2
radios, and to select radios for reception and
transmission. • Telephone or entertainment

The ICS system includes the components that follow: • Intercom isolation

• Audio panel (GMA 350H) (2301A1) • Intercom volume and squelch

• Pilot cyclic switch (2303S1) • Digital clearance recorder and player

• Copilot cyclic switch (2303S2), if installed The GMA 350H is a high-fidelity digital audio panel
with circuitry that reduces the noise in the audio
• Copilot foot switch (2303S3), if installed signals. A digital signal processor cleans up the audio
with a filtering technique that removes the noise and
provides VOX control for the microphone inputs.
• Aft ICS kit, if installed
The audio outputs of the panel go through high quality
The audio panel is installed in the pedestal.
digital-to-analog converters and headset amplifier
circuits to reduce the noise and distortion.
Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component
reference designator index table and location figure
The audio panel does a self-test during power-up.
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the
During the self-test, all the annunciator lights come on
components.
for approximately 2 seconds. When the self-test is
completed, most of the settings go back to those in
To help clarify system operation, refer to the simplified use when the unit was last turned off.
schematic (Figure 97-41) while reading information
about the intercommunication system. The audio panel controls one stereo music input and
one stereo telephone/entertainment input. The
97-237. AFT INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM telephone/entertainment button controls a telephone
(ICS) — DESCRIPTION or entertainment device connected to the rear of the
audio panel, or to the front panel jack. The telephone/
The 5-place aft ICS kit (BHT-407-II-37) is an extension entertainment input is heard by the pilot, copilot, or
of the basic ICS system designed for the passengers passengers based on the configuration of the audio
in the cabin. Five ICS jacks are installed in the cabin at panel.
the forward left and right seats, and the aft left, right,
and center seats. The jacks are voice activated for The stereo music from the XM radio is controlled by
transmission and provide stereo reception. the MUSIC button. The music is heard by the pilot,
copilot, or passengers, based on the configuration of
97-238. AUDIO PANEL (GMA 350H) — the audio panel.
DESCRIPTION
The COM1 or COM2 transceivers are selected for
The audio panel (GMA 350H) (2301A1) collects, transmitting by the MIC1 or MIC2 buttons. The COM1
processes, and distributes audio signals between the and COM2 receivers are automatically selected when
radios, crew, and passengers. the MIC1 and MIC2 buttons are set.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 155
BHT-407-MM-11

1. MKR/MUTE – Stops the play of the recorded COM audio.

2. COM1 – When set, audio from COM1 transceiver is heard.
3. COM2 – When set, audio from COM2 transceiver is heard.
4. COM3 – Not used.
5. NAV1 – When set, audio from the NAV1 receiver is heard.
6. AUX – When set, audio from the AUX inputs are heard.
7. Telephone/music – When set, audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected to the front
panel jack is heard. Audio from a telephone connected to the rear of the audio panel is heard when the
front jack is not used.
8. MUSIC – When set, music entertainment audio is heard.
9. MAN SQ – When set, intercom squelch is controlled manually.
10. Volume Indicator – Shows the volume/squelch setting.
11. Front panel jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
12. MIC1 – When set, COM1 is automatically set for transmission. COM2 receive can be added when COM2
is set. If MIC1 and MIC2 are set together, Split-COM mode is started with COM1 and COM2. In
Split-COM mode, the pilot uses COM1 and the copilot uses COM2.
13. MIC2 – When set, COM2 is automatically set for transmission. COM1 receive can be added when COM1
is set. If MIC1 and MIC2 are set together, Split-COM mode is started with COM1 and COM2. In
Split-COM mode, the pilot uses COM1 and the copilot uses COM2.
14. MIC3 – Not used.
15. NAV2 – When set, audio from the NAV2 receiver is heard.
16. PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom isolation.
17. COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom isolation. Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
18. PASS – Controls the isolation of the aircraft audio to the passengers.
19. SPKR – Not used.
20. Cursor (CRSR) Control - Moves the green or blue annunciator cursor to the audio receiver that requires
adjustment of the volume or squelch.
21. Volume (VOL) Control – Adjusts the volume or squelch of the selected audio receiver.

NOTE
When a button is set to ON, a triangular annunciator above the button comes on.
407gc_MM_97_0020
Figure 97-40. Audio Panel (GMA 350H) Controls

97-00-00
Page 156 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

AUDIO PANEL
ICS 2301A1
2301CB11 2301A1P2 (GMA 350H) 2301A1P1
5A 8 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 1 HI 19 1
28 VDC NAV 2 AUDIO IN
LO 20 2
BUS
10 POWER GROUND HI 31 3
ALERT 1 AUDIO IN
LO 32 4
5 LIGHTING BUS LO HI 13 5
INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1 COM 2 AUDIO IN
LO 14 6
3140A1
1 (DISCRETE 1 IN) PILOT ICS KEY IN 16 7
(GIA 63H) 7 28 V LIGHTING HI
3140A1P3 PILOT MIC KEY IN 34 8

MAIN RS-232 OUT 7 62 17 RS-232 IN HI 27

MAIN RS-232 IN 7 59 18 RS-232 OUT XCVR 4 MIC OUT 3
LO 28
PASSENGER HEADSET AUDIO R OUT HI 41
3140A1P4 PASSENGER HEADSET AUDIO L OUT HI 40
15 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI PASSENGER HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 42
VOICE ALERT 500  AUDIO OUT HI 2 29 FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI 4
2301R2 RCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI 23 PILOT HEADSET DISC
VOICE ALERT 500  AUDIO OUT LO (GND) 3 270  23 MUSIC 1 IN LT 2301S1
XCVR 5 AUDIO IN LO 4
2 24 MUSIC 1 IN RT
25 MUSIC I LO HI 33 3
PILOT MIC AUDIO IN
LO 35 1

2301A1P1 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN 3 HI 29 5

INNER MARKER LAMP OUT 36 2
5 43 ALERT 2, 3, 4 AUDIO IN LO OUTER MARKER LAMP OUT 37 4
MIDDLE MARKER LAMP OUT 38
3 TEL AUDIO IN HI MIDDLE MARKER SENSE OUT 39
5 TEL AUDIO OUT HI

25 HI
3 XCVR 4 AUDIO IN
26 LO 2301A1P2

1 HI PILOT HEADSET AUDIO R OUT HI 31

MARKER ANTENNA IN PILOT HEADSET AUDIO L OUT HI 16
2 LO
3140A1P2 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO LO 1
HI 16 17 HI
VOR/LOC 500  AUDIO OUT NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI 35
LO 17 18 LO PASSENGER 1 MIC AUDIO IN
LO 36

21 HI HI 39
3140A1P1 AUX 1 AUDIO IN
22 LO PASSENGER 3 MIC AUDIO IN
LO 40
COM MIC AUDIO IN LO (GND) 8 4
COM 500  AUDIO OUT LO (GND) 10 10 LO HI 37
COM 1 AUDIO IN PASSENGER 2 MIC AUDIO IN
COM 500  AUDIO OUT HI 9 9 HI LO 38
2301R1
7 HI HI 41 COPILOT HEADSET DISC
270  AUX 2 AUDIO IN HI
8 LO PASSENGER 4 MIC AUDIO IN 2301S2
LO 42
44 ALERT 4 (TEL RING) AUDIO IN HI
HI 32 3
24 COMM ACTIVE OUT COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN
LO 34 1
COM MIC AUDIO IN HI 7 11 COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO R OUT HI 4 6
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO L OUT HI 3 2
COM MIC KEY IN 4 12 COM 1 MIC KEY OUT
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT 2 4
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK 11 30 COM 2 MIC KEY OUT
(DISCRETE 2 IN) COPILOT ICS KEY IN 6 9
15 COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI
COPILOT MIC KEY IN 33 10

11
12
13

407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_97_0022a

Figure 97-41. Intercommunication System (ICS) — Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 157
 BHT-407-MM-11

INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2

3140A2
3140A2P2 (GIA 63H)

1 16 HI
VOR/LOC 500  AUDIO OUT
2 17 LO

3
4

5
6
7
8 PILOT CYCLIC
3140A2P4
ICS TRIGGER
PILOT 2 VOICE ALERT 500  OUT HI
2303S1
CYCLIC DISC
6J3 6P3 3 VOICE ALERT 500  OUT LO (GND)

D 4

C 5 3140A2P1
B 6
9 COM 500  AUDIO OUT HI

10 COM 500  AUDIO OUT LO (GND)

8 COM MIC AUDIO IN LO (GND)

7 COM MIC AUDIO IN HI

11 TRANSMIT INTERLOCK
COPILOT ICS FOOT SWITCH
2303S3 4 COM MIC KEY IN

1
G
2

COPILOT CYCLIC

COPILOT COMM SWITCHES

CYCLIC DISC 2303S2
2303J3 2303P3 NOTES
ICS RADIO
V BLACK 1 TO LIGHTING AND MISCELLANEOUS 407-476-602.
T RED
S RED-BLACK 2 TO XM SATELLITE KIT BHT-407-II-36.

3 TO DATALINK KIT BHT-407-II-35.

4 TO AFT ICS KIT BHT-407-II-37.

6 5 TO TAS KIT BHT-407-II-28.

9
10
6 TO DUAL CONTROLS KIT BHT-407-II-09.

11
12
13

407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_97_0022b

Figure 97-41. Intercommunication System (ICS) — Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2 of 2)

97-00-00
Page 158 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Selection of two MIC buttons together selects (2301A1P1), pin 30, to the integrated avionics unit
Split-COM mode. The COM1, COM2, MIC1, and MIC2 No. 2 connector (3140A1P1), pin 4. The COM2 audio
annunciators come on to show Split-COM operation. output is from the audio panel connector (2301A1P1),
Split-COM operation is cancelled when the MIC1 or pin 15 to the integrated avionics unit No. 1 connector
MIC2 button is pushed. (3140A1P1), pin 7.

During Split-COM operation, the pilot transmits on When COM1 or COM2 microphones are keyed, a
COM1 and the copilot transmits on COM2 at the same signal is sent to the transmit interlocks in the
time. The pilot can still listen to the NAV1, NAV2, and integrated avionics unit No. 1 and integrated avionics
AUX audio as selected. The copilot can only listen to unit No. 2 connectors (3140A1P1 and 3140A2P1),
COM2 audio. pins 11.

It there is a failure in the audio panel. a fail-safe circuit Audio from NAV1 comes into the audio panel
connects the pilot headset, left ear only if stereo (2301A1P1), pins 17 and 18, from integrated avionics
headset, and microphone to the COM1 transceiver. unit No. 1 connector (3140A1P2), pins 16 and 17.
NAV2 audio comes into the audio panel connector
The audio panel has a digital clearance recorder that (2301A1P1), pins 19 and 20 from integrated avionics
records up to 2.5 minutes of the COM reception. unit No. 2 connector (3140A2P2), pins 16 and 17.
Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory
blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time has been The audio panel communicates with integrated
reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored avionics unit No. 1 via an RS-232 bus between the
memory blocks, starting from the oldest block. audio panel connector (2301A1P2), pins 17 and 18
and integrated avionics unit No. 1 connector
An optional Play button controls the play back of the (3140A1P3), pins 62 and 59.
recorded audio. The MKR/MUTE button will stop the
play back if pushed during the play back. The Play Aural alerts from the integrated avionics unit No. 1,
button, if pushed during play back, will play back the integrated avionics unit No. 2, and TAS are supplied to
previously recorded memory block. All memory blocks the audio panel. Aural alert 1 comes from the
are cleared when power is removed. integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) connector
(3140A2P4), pins 2 and 3 to the audio panel connector
97-239. AUDIO PANEL (GMA 350H) — (2301A1P1), pins 31 and 32.
OPERATION
Aural alert 2 comes from the integrated avionics unit
Electrical power from the 28 VDC BUS is supplied to No. 1 (3140A1) connector (3140A1P4), pins 2 and 3,
the audio panel (2301A1) electrical connector to the audio panel connector (2301A1P2), pin 15, and
(2301A1P2), pin 8, from the circuit breaker connector (2301A1P1), pin 43.
(2301CB11), as shown in Figure 97-41.

The COM1 audio input to the audio panel is from the NOTE
integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) connector The TAS is part of the optional traffic
(3140A1P1), pins 9 and 10, to the audio panel advisory system kit (BHT-407-II-28).
connector (2301A1P1) pins 9 and 10. The COM1 MIC
KEY output is from the audio panel connector Aural alert 3 comes from the TAS (3340A1) connector
(2301A1P1), pin 12, to the integrated avionics unit (3340A1P2), pins 58 and 59, to the audio panel
No. 1 connector (3140A1P1), pin 4. The COM1 audio connector (2301A1P1), pins 29 and 43.
output is from the audio panel connector (2301A1P1),
pin 11, to the integrated avionics unit No. 1 connector
(3140A1P1), pin 7. NOTE
The datalink receiver is part of the optional
The COM2 audio input to the audio panel is from the datalink kit (BHT-407-II-35).
integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) connector
(3140A2P1), pins 9 and 10, to the audio panel Audio from the datalink receiver (2320A2) is received
connector (2301A1P1), pins 13 and 14. The COM2 from connector (2320A2P1), pins 20 and 39, to the
MIC KEY output is from the audio panel connector audio panel connector (2301A1P1), pins 25 and 26.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 159
BHT-407-MM-11

Audio is sent from the audio panel connector second detent, a ground is supplied through the
(2301A1P1), pins 27 and 28, to the datalink receiver RADIO contacts of the switch to the audio panel
connector (2320A2P1), pins 19 and 38. connector (2301A1P2), pin 33. When the foot switch is
set, a ground is supplied through contact 2 of the foot
switch to the audio panel connector (2301A1P2), pin
NOTE 6. Sidetone is supplied to the audio panel connector
The XM satellite receiver is part of the (2301A1P2), pins 32 and 34.
optional XM satellite weather and radio kit
(BHT-407-II-36).
NOTE

The XM satellite receiver (2320A1) supplies music to The copilot intercom controls are part of the
the audio panel from connector (2320A1P1), pins 17, optional Dual Controls, Quick Disconnect
18, and 19, to the audio panel connector (2301A2), Kit (BHT-407-II-9).
pins 25, 24, and 23.
Audio is supplied from the audio panel to the copilot
headset (2301S2) from connector (2301A1P2), pins 2,
NOTE 3, and 4.
The aft passenger headsets are part of the
optional 5-place aft ICS kit (BHT-407-II-37). 97-240. AUDIO PANEL (GMA 350H) — REMOVAL

Audio from the audio panel is supplied to the aft

passenger headsets (Figure 97-42) from connector MATERIALS REQUIRED
(2301A1P1), pins 40, 41, and 42. Passenger 5
(2340S5) transmits audio to the audio panel connector Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
(2301A1P1), pins 23 and 4. Passengers 1 (2340S1), 2
(2340S2), 3 (2340S3), and 4 (2340S4) transmit audio NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
to the audio panel connector (2301A1P2), pins 35 and
36 for passenger 1, pins 37 and 38 for passenger 2, C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
pins 39 and 40 for passenger 3, and pins 41 and 42 for
passenger 4.

The pilot control for transmission is from the trigger WARNING

switch (2303S1) on the pilot cyclic. When the switch is
set to the first detent, a ground is supplied through the
upper contacts of the switch to the audio panel OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
connector (2301A1P1), pin 16. When the switch is set WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
to the second detent, a ground is supplied through the NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
lower contacts of the switch to the audio panel EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
connector (2301A1P1), pin 34. Sidetone is supplied to
the audio panel connector (2301A1P1), pins 33 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
and 35. from the helicopter.

Audio is supplied from the audio panel to the pilot

2. Turn the allen screw (2, Figure 97-43)
headset (2301S1) from connector (2301A1P2), pins
counterclockwise to unlock the audio panel
31, 16, and 1.
(GMA 350H) (2301A1) (1).

The copilot control for transmission is from the trigger

3. Remove the audio panel (GMA 350H) (2301A1)
switch (2303S2) on the copilot cyclic or the ICS foot
(1) from the pedestal (3).
switch (2303S3). When the switch is set to the first
detent, a ground is supplied through the ICS contacts
of the switch to the audio panel connector 4. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the
(2301A1P2), pin 6. When the switch is set to the electrical connectors.

97-00-00
Page 160 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

AUDIO PANEL
2301A1
(GMA 350H) 2301A1P2 2340J4 2340P4 2340S4J1

PASSENGER 4 MIC AUDIO IN HI 41 1 3 PASSENGER 4 HEADSET

PASSENGER 4 MIC AUDIO IN LO 42 2 1
2340S4
3

4 5
5 2
6 4
7

2340J5 2340P5 2340S5J1

1 3 PASSENGER 5 HEADSET
2 1
2340S5
3

4 5
5 2
6 4
7

2340J3 2340P3 2340S3J1

PASSENGER 3 MIC AUDIO IN HI 39 1 3

PASSENGER 3 MIC AUDIO IN LO 40 2 1 PASSENGER 3 HEADSET
3
2340S3
4 5
PASSENGER 2 MIC AUDIO IN HI 37 5 2
PASSENGER 2 MIC AUDIO IN LO 38 6 4
7

PASSENGER 1 MIC AUDIO IN HI 35

PASSENGER 1 MIC AUDIO IN LO 36

2340J2 2340P2 2340S2J1

1 3 PASSENGER 2 HEADSET
2301A1P1 2 1
2340S2
3
XCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI 23
XCVR 5 AUDIO IN LO 4 4 5
5 2
6 4
7
PASSENGER HEADSET AUDIO L OUT HI 40
PASSENGER HEADSET AUDIO R OUT HI 41
PASSENGER HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 42
2340J1 2340P1 2340S1J1

1 3
2 1 PASSENGER 1 HEADSET
3
2340S1
4 5
5 2
6 4
7

407-476-621-A 407gc_MM_97_0021

Figure 97-42. Aft ICS — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 161
BHT-407-MM-11

1. Audio panel (GMA 350H) (2301A1)

2. Allen screw
3. Pedestal

D
FW

VIEW A
407GC_MM_97_0011
Figure 97-43. Audio Panel (GMA 350H) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 162 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-241. AUDIO PANEL (GMA 350H) — CLEANING 97-243. AUDIO PANEL (GMA 350H) —
INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED
WARNING
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
C-516 Clean Cloth EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

1. Remove protective caps and/ or plugs from the

1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean electrical connectors.
cloth (C-516).
2. Make sure the allen screw (2, Figure 97-43) in the
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a audio panel (GMA 350H) (2301A1) (1) is turned fully
clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol counterclockwise.
(C-385).
3. Slide the audio panel (GMA 350H) (2301A1) (1)
3. Remove the dirt from electrical connectors with a
in the pedestal (3).
soft bristle brush.

97-242. AUDIO PANEL (GMA 350H) —

INSPECTION CAUTION

NOTE
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW.
The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or 4. Turn the allen screw (2) clockwise to lock the
component has been removed from the audio panel (GMA 350H) (2301A1) (1) in place.
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is NOTE
installed on the helicopter. The following step is not required if the
same component as that removed is being
1. Visually examine the audio panel (GMA 350H) reinstalled and repair of the component did
(2301A1) (1, Figure 97-43) for cracks, mechanical not take place.
damage, and corrosion damage. Replace if necessary.
5. If a new, repaired, or replacement audio panel
2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for (GMA 350H) (2301A1) (1) was installed, complete the
wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion Audio Panel (GMA 350H) Software and Configuration
damage. Replace if necessary. Loading Procedure (Chapter 95).

6. Connect the battery or external DC power to the

helicopter.

7. Do an operational check of the audio panel

(GMA 350H) (2301A1) (1) (paragraph 97-244).

8. Do the GMA Testing in Section 7 and the return to

service tests as specified in Section 8 of the G1000/
G1000H System Maintenance Manual (190-00907-00)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 163
BHT-407-MM-11

(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). Conduct the testing 2. On the audio panel, make sure the COM1, MIC1,
as specified for two display installations. PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons are set to ON.

97-244. AUDIO PANEL (GMA 350H) — 3. Pull the pilot cyclic ICS switch to the second
OPERATIONAL CHECK detent and do a radio check on COM1.

RESULT:
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
• COM1 transceiver transmits. Sidetone and
reception are clear in the pilot, copilot, and
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE passenger headsets.
David Clark H10-36 Headset (Qty 7)
4. On the audio panel, push the Play button to play
back the recorded COM1 message.
NOTE
RESULT:
Use an external power unit if available to
prevent the battery from being drained of its
stored electrical power. • COM1 recorded message is heard in the pilot,
copilot, and passenger headsets.
1. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the
external DC power unit to ON. 5. On the audio panel, set the MIC1 button to OFF
and the MIC2 button to ON. Make sure the COM2
2. Connect the headsets to the pilot, copilot, and the button is set to ON
five passenger ICS disconnect stations.
6. Pull the pilot cyclic ICS switch to the second
3. On the audio panel, push the VOL knob and turn detent and do a radio check on COM2.
the outer CRSR knob to the desired source as
indicated by the flashing green annunciator. Turn the RESULT:
inner VOL knob to a desired volume.
• COM2 transceiver transmits. Sidetone and
4. Complete paragraph 97-245 through paragraph reception are clear in the pilot, copilot, and
97-248, as applicable. passenger headsets.

5. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set 7. On the audio panel, push the Play button to play
the external DC power unit to OFF. back the recorded COM2 message and when the
message starts, push the MKR/MUTE key.
6. Return the helicopter to the standard
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After RESULT:
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
• COM2 recorded message is heard in the pilot,
97-245. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS NO. 1 AND copilot, and passenger headsets and is muted
NO. 2 COM TRANSCEIVERS — when the MKR/MUTE button is pushed.
OPERATIONAL CHECK
8. If installed, push the copilot ICS foot switch and
1. On the Primary Flight Display (PFD), tune the do a radio check on COM2.
COM1 and COM2 to local COM frequencies.
RESULT:
NOTE
• COM2 transceiver transmits. Sidetone and
When a button is set to ON, the triangular reception are clear in the pilot, copilot, and
annunciator above the button comes on. passenger headsets.

97-00-00
Page 164 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

9. If installed, pull the copilot cyclic ICS switch to the RESULT:

second detent and do a radio check on COM2.
• NAV2 audio is heard in the pilot, copilot, and
RESULT: passenger headsets.

• COM2 transceiver transmits. Sidetone and NOTE

reception are clear in the pilot, copilot, and
The fire test alert feature is available when
passenger headsets.
the engine fire detector kit (BHT-407-II-19)
is installed.
10. On the audio panel, set the MIC1 button and the
MIC2 button to ON. 5. On the instrument panel, push the FIRE TEST
switch (if installed).
11. Make sure the COM1, COM2, MIC1, and MIC2
buttons are set to ON. RESULT:

• Fire test alert is heard in the pilot and copilot

12. Pull the pilot cyclic ICS switch to the second
headsets.
detent and push the copilot foot switch at the same
time.
6. On the instrument panel, release the FIRE TEST
switch (if installed).
RESULT:
97-247. INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM —
• COM1 and COM2 transceivers transmit OPERATIONAL CHECK
together. Sidetone and reception are clear in
the pilot and copilot headsets. 1. On the audio panel, make sure the NAV2, PILOT,
COPLT, and PASS buttons are set to ON.
13. On the audio panel, set the MIC1 and MIC2
buttons to OFF. 2. Speak into the pilot, copilot, and passenger
microphones in sequence.
97-246. INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS NO. 1 AND
NO. 2 NAV RECEIVERS AND ALERTS — RESULT:
OPERATIONAL CHECK
• NAV2 and intercom audio are heard in the
1. On the PFD, tune the NAV1 and NAV2 to local pilot, copilot, and passenger headsets.
VOR frequencies.
3. Set the PILOT button to OFF.
2. Push the volume button to enable the Morse code
IDs for NAV1 and NAV2. 4. Speak into the pilot, copilot, and passenger
microphones in sequence.
3. On the audio panel, set the NAV1 button to ON
and the NAV2 button to OFF. RESULT:

• NAV2 is heard in the pilot, copilot, and

RESULT: passenger headsets.

• NAV1 audio is heard in the pilot, copilot, and • Intercom audio is heard on the copilot and
passenger headsets. passenger headsets.

4. Set the NAV2 button to ON and the NAV1 button 5. Set the PASS button to OFF and the PILOT
to OFF. button to ON.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 165
BHT-407-MM-11

6. Speak into the pilot, copilot, and passenger • Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
microphones in sequence.
13. Set the PASS button to OFF and the COPLT to
RESULT: ON.

• NAV2 is heard in the pilot and copilot 14. Speak into the pilot, copilot, and passenger
headsets. microphones in sequence.

• Passengers hear each other on the intercom. RESULT:

7. Set the PASS button to ON and the COPLT • NAV2 is heard in the pilot and copilot
button to OFF. headsets.

8. Speak into the pilot, copilot, and passenger • Passengers hear each other on the intercom.
microphones in sequence.
• Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
RESULT:
15. Set the COPLT button to OFF and the PILOT to
ON.
• NAV2 is heard in the pilot, copilot, and
passenger headsets.
16. Speak into the pilot, copilot, and passenger
microphones in sequence.
• Intercom audio is heard on the pilot and
passenger headsets.
RESULT:
• Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
• NAV2 is heard in the pilot and copilot
headsets.
9. Set the PILOT and PASS buttons to OFF.
• Passengers hear each other on the intercom.
10. Speak into the pilot, copilot, and passenger
microphones in sequence. • Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.

RESULT: 17. Set the NAV2 button to OFF.

• NAV2 is heard in the pilot and copilot 97-248. SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND MUSIC —
headsets. OPERATIONAL CHECK

• Passengers hear each other on the intercom.

NOTE
• Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode. Satellite telephone service is available
when the GDL 59H datalink kit is paired
11. Set the PASS button to ON. with the GSR 56H Iridium datalink kit
(BHT-407-II-35) and a subscription service
12. Speak into the pilot, copilot, and passenger has been activated with Garmin.
microphones in sequence.
XM radio entertainment (music) is available
when the GDL 69AH XM satellite weather
RESULT: and radio kit (BHT-407-II-36) is installed
and a subscription service has been
• NAV2 is heard in the pilot, copilot, and activated with Garmin.
passenger headsets.
1. Move the helicopter outside with an unobstructed
• Passengers hear each other on the intercom. view of the southern sky.

97-00-00
Page 166 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

2. On the audio panel, make sure the telephone and 6. On the audio panel, set the PILOT, COPLT, and
entertainment, PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons are PASS buttons to OFF.
set to ON.

3. Push the VOL knob and turn the outer CRSR RESULT:
knob to the desired source as indicated by the flashing
blue annunciator, and turn the inner VOL knob to a • Music is muted in the pilot, copilot, and
desired volume. passenger headsets.

NOTE
NOTE
For additional information to navigate to the
For additional information to navigate to the
required Multi-Function Display (MFD)
pages, refer to the XM Radio Entertainment required Multi-Function Display (MFD)
Section of the Garmin G1000H Integrated pages, refer to the Telephone
Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX Communication Section of the Garmin
(190-01255-00). G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s
Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).
4. On the MFD AUX/XM RADIO page, select an
available music station with the CHNL/CH-/CH+
softkeys. 7. On the MFD AUX/TELEPHONE page, place a
phone call via the Iridium network.
5. Select the VOL softkey and adjust the volume
with the VOL - / VOL + softkeys. RESULT:

RESULT:
• Phone call is satisfactory.
• Music is heard in the pilot, copilot, and
passenger headsets. 8. Push the HANGUP softkey to end the call.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 167/168
 BHT-407-MM-11

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM (AHRS)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-249. ATTITUDE AND HEADING magnetometer (GMU 44) (3407TR1). The AHRS unit
REFERENCE SYSTEM (AHRS) (3420A1) also utilizes GPS information sent from the
integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 and
3140A2).
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
combines attitude and heading information into a
single AHRS unit (3420A1) for display, control, and The AHRS unit (3420A1) provides the following
navigational use. information in ARINC 429 format:

The AHRS includes the components that follow: • Aircraft heading, pitch, and roll

• AHRS unit (GRS 77H) (3420A1) • Aircraft yaw, pitch, and roll rates

• Magnetometer (GMU 44) (3407TR1) • Aircraft body-axis accelerations

• Configuration module • Rates of change of heading, pitch, and roll

• Attitude and heading indicator on the Primary • Aircraft accelerations expressed in a local
Flight Display (PFD) level frame of reference

Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component Attitude and heading information is sent to both the
reference designator index table and location figure MFD and PFD (3160DS1 and 3160DS2) and
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the integrated avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 and
components. 3140A2) from the AHRS unit (3420A1) using ARINC
429 digital data
To help clarify system or circuit operation, refer to the
simplified schematic (Figure 97-44) while reading Arinc 429 data monitoring circuits verify the integrity of
information about the attitude and heading reference AHRS sensors and/or the data received from
system. the sensors. An invalid indication from the AHRS
sensors will result in the failure of the specific
97-250. ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE parameters which will be indicated on the PFD as
SYSTEM (AHRS) UNIT (GRS 77H) either a HEADING or ATTITUDE FAIL flag.

The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) 97-251. MAGNETOMETER (GMU 44)
unit (3420A1) is located behind the passenger seats in
the aft fuselage of the helicopter. The magnetometer (3407TR1) is located in the
tailboom of the helicopter, slightly aft of the tailboom
The AHRS unit (3420A1) is a Line Replaceable Unit attachment point.
(LRU) that provides aircraft attitude and flight
characteristics information to the Primary Flight The magnetometer (3407TR1) senses the Earth’s
Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD) magnetic field and converts it in digital information.
(3160DS2 and 3160DS1) and integrated avionics units Data is sent from the magnetometer (3407TR1) to the
No. 1 and No. 2 (3140A1 and 3140A2). The AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) unit
unit (3420A1) contains advanced tilt sensors, (3420A1) for processing to determine aircraft magnetic
accelerometers, and rate sensors. In addition, the heading. This unit receives power from the AHRS unit
AHRS unit (3420A1) interfaces with both the Air Data (3420A1) and communicates with the AHRS unit
Computer (ADC) (GDC 74H) (3410A1) and the (3420A1) using RS-485 and RS-232 digital data.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 169
BHT-407-MM-11

AHRS
3420CB1

28 V DC 3A
BUS AHRS
3420A1
3420A1P1 (GRS 77H) 3420A1P1
MFD (L-DU)
28V DC POWER IN 1 18 3160DS1

3160DS1P1 (GDU 1040H)

22 POWER GROUND

ARINC 429 OUT 3 A 12 18 ARINC 429 IN 1 A

ARINC 429 OUT 3 B 27 19 ARINC 429 IN 1 B

PFD (R-DU)
3160DS2

3160DS2P1 (GDU 1040H)

CONFIGURATION ARINC 429 OUT 3 A 33 18 ARINC 429 IN 1 A

MODULE ARINC 429 OUT 3 B 19 19 ARINC 429 IN 1 B

GROUND 1 BLK 1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND

VCC 4 RED 17 CONFIG MODULE POWER
DATA 3 YEL 16 CONFIG MODULE DATA INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1
CLOCK 2 WHT 31 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 3140A1
3140A1P3
(GIA 63H)
ARINC 429 OUT 1 A 14 14 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 6 A
1
ARINC 429 OUT 1 B 29 15 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 6 B

GPS 1 RS-232 OUT 26 56 GPS 1 MAIN RS-232 IN 6

SIGNAL GROUND 41 57 SIGNAL GROUND
GPS 1 RS-232 IN 11 58 GPS 1 MAIN RS-232 OUT 6

INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2

3140A2
3140A2P3
(GIA 63H)
ARINC 429 OUT 2 A 13 14 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 6 A
1
ARINC 429 OUT 2 B 28 15 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 6 B

MAGNETOMETER
3407TR1 GPS 2 RS-232 IN 6 58 GPS 2 MAIN RS-232 OUT 6
SIGNAL GROUND 35 57 SIGNAL GROUND
(GMU 44)
RS-485 OUT A 25 MAGNOMETER RS-485 IN A
RS-485 OUT B 39 MAGNOMETER RS-485 IN B
ADC
RS-232 IN 10 MAGNOMETER RS-232 OUT
3410A1
12 V DC POWER IN 9 MAGNOMETER POWER OUT 3410A1P1
AIRCRAFT GROUND 40 MAGNOMETER GROUND (GDC 74H)
ARINC 429 IN 1 A 15 41 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A
ARINC 429 IN 1 B 30 42 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B

NOTE

1 FOR CONTINUATION, REFER TO PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)

AND MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) INTERFACE WIRING DIAGRAM (CHAPTER 98).
407gc_MM_97_0037_c01

Figure 97-44. Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 170 Rev. 38 4 OCT 2013 Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-252. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AHRS) 97-254. ATTITUDE AND HEADING

REFERENCE SYSTEM (AHRS) —
The configuration module is located in the electrical OPERATION
connector (3420A1P1), at the Attitude and Heading
Reference System (AHRS) unit (3420A1) in the aft Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the
fuselage of the helicopter. Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
(3420CB1) circuit breaker and is then directed to
contact 18 of electrical connector (3420A1P1). At
The configuration module stores the information power up, the AHRS unit (3420A1) starts an
calculated from the alignment and calibration of the initialization process that lasts for approximately
AHRS unit (3420A1). This allows the AHRS unit 1 minute. In addition, an in-flight initialization can also
(3420A1) to be replaced without the need to redo the occur when there is a power interruption while
calibration of the unit. airborne.

97-253. ATTITUDE AND HEADING INDICATOR ON During the initialization process, the message “AHRS
THE PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) ALIGN: Keep Wings Level” is shown on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD). The AHRS unit (3420A1)
completes its orientation, and performs a self-test of
The attitude and heading indications are on the air, attitude, and heading data.
Primary Flight Display (PFD) (Figure 97-45). The
attitude functions of the Attitude and Heading Once the alignment is complete, the AHRS unit
Reference System (AHRS) unit (3420A1) are (3420A1) is dependent on inputs from GPS 1
indicated by the attitude indicator on the PFD and the (3140A1), GPS 2 (3140A2), and the Air Data
heading functions are indicated by the heading Computer (ADC) (GDC 74H) (3410A1).
indicator and compass card on the Electronic
Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI). The AHRS unit (3420A1) supplies 12 VDC to the
magnetometer (3407TR1) at contact 9 of electrical
For the attitude indicator, the horizon line is part of the connector (3407TR1P1). Digital magnetic heading
pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major information is sent to the AHRS unit (3420A1) via an
pitch marks and numeric labels are shown for every RS-485 bus at contacts 4 and 2 of the electrical
10°, up to 80°. Minor pitch marks are shown for connector (3407TR1P1). The information is received
intervening 5° increments, up to 25° below and 45° at contacts 25 and 39 of electrical connector
above the horizon line. Between 20° below to 20° (3420A1P1).
above the horizon line, minor pitch marks occur every
2.5°. When the synthetic vision system is activated, A configuration module is installed in the backshell of
the pitch scale is reduced to 10° up and 7.5° down. electrical connector (3420A1P1). The configuration
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll module stores the alignment and calibration
scale. Major tick marks at 30° and 60° and minor tick information. If the tray of the AHRS unit (3420A1) is
marks at 10°, 20°, and 45° are shown to the left and not moved, the AHRS unit (3420A1) can be replaced
right of the zero. The angle of bank is indicated by the without having to do the tray alignment or AHRS
position of the pointer on the roll scale. calibration. Calibration information will be transferred
to the new ARHS unit (3420A1) from the configuration
module when the new AHRS unit (3420A1) is
The heading indicator is part of the Horizontal powered.
Situation Indicator (HSI) and displays a rotating
compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters The AHRS unit (3420A1) supplies electrical power to
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur the configuration module at contacts 17 of the
every 30°. Major tick marks are at 10° intervals and electrical connector (3420A1P1). A data bus allows
minor tick marks at 5° intervals. The heading indicator the recording of the attitude and heading offsets by the
appears on top of the HSI. The HSI also presents turn configuration module or the AHRS unit (3420A1). The
rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation source data bus is at contact 3 of the configuration module
information. The HSI is available in two formats, a connector, and enters the AHRS unit (3420A1) at
360° compass rose and a 140° arc. contact 16 of electrical connector (3420A1P1).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 171
BHT-407-MM-11

PFD
HEADING INDICATOR
ATTITUDE INDICATOR

COMPASS CARD

407gc_MM_97_0038
Figure 97-45. Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) — Indications

97-00-00
Page 172 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

The AHRS unit (3420A1) receives GPS 1 information heading value set by the pilot. If either of these
from the integrated avionics unit No. 1 from an RS-232 external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the
duplex bus at contacts 26 and 11 of electrical AHRS unit (3420A1) uses air data information for
connector (3420A1P1). The bus is connected from altitude determination.
integrated avionics unit No. 1 at contacts 56 and 58 of
electrical connector (3160A1P3). Four AHRS modes of operation are available and
depend upon the combination of available sensor
The AHRS unit (3420A1) receives GPS 2 information inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
from the integrated avionics unit No. 2 from an RS-232 inputs is communicated to the pilot by message
simplex bus at contact 6 of electrical connector advisory alerts.
(3420A1P1). The bus is connected from integrated
avionics unit No. 2 at contacts 58 of electrical The four modes of operation are:
connector (3160A2P3).
• Normal operation
The AHRS unit (3420A1) receives ADC (3140A1)
information from an ARINC 429 bus at contacts 15 and
• ARHS no-magnetic
30 of electrical connector 3420A1P1. The bus is
connected from the ADC (3410A1) at contacts 41 and
• AHRS no-magnetic; no-air
42 of electrical connector (3410A1P1).

The AHRS unit (3420A1) transmits its attitude and • ARHS no-GPS
heading information to the PFD (3160DS2) via an
ARINC 429 bus at contacts 33 and 19 of electrical In normal operation, the AHRS unit (3420A1) must
connector (3420A1P1). The information is received at have valid magnetic information from the
contacts 18 and 19 of electrical connector magnetometer (3407TR1), valid GPS information from
(3160A2P1). the GPS (3140A1), and valid air data from the ADC
(3410A1). If any sensor input is missing, the AHRS
The AHRS unit (3420A1) transmits its attitude and unit (3420A1) will switch to an alternate mode,
heading information to the Multi-Function Display generate the respective CAS message, and display
(MFD) (3160DS1) via an ARINC 429 bus at contacts either an invalid heading or invalid attitude on the
12 and 27 of electrical connector (3420A1P1). The PFD.
information is received at contacts 18 and 19 of
electrical connector (3160DS1P1). When the AHRS unit (3420A1) loses the GPS
information, the AHRS switches to no-GPS mode. In
The AHRS unit (3420A1) transmits its attitude and this mode, the AHRS unit (3420A1) uses the magnetic
heading information to integrated avionics unit No. 1 information from the magnetometer (3407TR1) and
(3140A1) via the ARINC 429 bus at contacts 14 and the air data from the ADC (3410A1). In this mode, both
29 of electrical connector (3420A1P1). The the attitude indicator and the heading indicator will be
information is received at contacts 14 and 15 of unaffected.
electrical connector (3140A1P3).
When the AHRS unit (3420A1) loses the
The AHRS unit (3420A1) transmits its attitude and magnetometer information, the AHRS switches to
heading information to integrated avionics unit No. 2 no-magnetic mode. In this mode, the AHRS unit
(3140A2) via the ARINC 429 bus at contacts 13 and (3420A1) uses the air data information from the ADC
28 of electrical connector (3420A1P1). The (3410A1) and the GPS information. In this mode, the
information is received at contacts 14 and 15 of attitude indicator will be shown on the PFD but the
electrical connector (3140A2P3). heading indicator will show a HDG fail flag.

In addition to using internal sensors, the AHRS unit When the AHRS unit (3420A1) loses the magnetic
(3420A1) uses GPS information, magnetic field data, information and the air data information, the AHRS
and air data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. switches to no-magnetic; no-air mode. In this mode,
In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and the AHRS unit (3420A1) uses the GPS information.
magnetic field measurements. In Heading Preset The attitude indicator will be shown on the PFD but the
Mode, the magnetometer data is replaced by a heading indicator will show a HDG fail flag.

97-00-00
Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99 4 OCT 2013 Rev. 38 Page 173
BHT-407-MM-11

If all information sources are lost (GPS, air data, and 3. Move the slide lock tab to the side of the electrical
magnetic information), the AHRS unit (3420A1) will connector (3420A1P1) (4).
switch to a failed state. Both the attitude indicator and
the heading indicator will be shown on the PFD with
4. Disconnect electrical connector (3420A1P1) (4).
their fail flags.

For a list of AHRS advisory messages and possible 5. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on
maintenance actions, refer to Section 5 of the Garmin the connectors.
G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95).
NOTE
97-255. ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE
SYSTEM (AHRS) — COMPONENT Tray (3) requires special alignment
REPLACEMENT procedure. Do not loosen or remove the
tray unless necessary.
To replace an electrical component, refer to the
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance 6. Loosen the four screws (2) that secure the AHRS
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance unit (3420A1) (1) to the tray (3).
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM.
7. Remove the AHRS unit (3420A1) (1) out of the
97-256. ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE
tray (3).
SYSTEM (AHRS) UNIT (GRS 77H) —
REMOVAL
97-257. ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE
SYSTEM (AHRS) UNIT (GRS 77H) —
MATERIALS REQUIRED CLEANING

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

MATERIALS REQUIRED
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-136 Caps and/or Plugs Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

WARNING
C-516 Clean Cloth

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC clean cloth (C-516).
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
from the helicopter. clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385).
2. Gain access to the AHRS unit (3420A1) (1,
Figure 97-46) by removing the top access panel in the 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
baggage bay area. soft bristle brush.

97-00-00
Page 174 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

1. AHRS unit (3420A1)

2. Screw
3 1
3. Tray
4. Electrical connector (3420A1P1)
2 5. Aft avionics equipment shelf

SEALANT (C-251)

DETAIL A 22 TO 25 IN-LBS
(2.5 TO 2.8 Nm)
NOTES
1 Tray (3) requires special alignment procedure. Do not loosen or remove unless necessary.
2 After installation, apply a bead of sealant (C-251) to cover the mating edges of the electrical bonding areas.
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407_MM_97_0030

Figure 97-46. Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) Unit (3420A1) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 175
BHT-407-MM-11

97-258. ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE 2. Install the AHRS unit (3420A1) (1) in the tray (3).
SYSTEM (AHRS) UNIT (GRS 77H) — Torque the screws to 22 to 25 inch-pounds (2.5 to
INSPECTION 2.8 Nm).

NOTE NOTE
The following inspection criteria are If the mating surfaces of the components
primarily intended when the part or were clean and showed no signs of
component has been removed from the corrosion at the time of installation, the
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection following step is not required.
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is
3. Make sure the bond resistance between the tray
installed on the helicopter.
(3) and the AHRS unit (3420A1) (1) meets Class R-II
electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
1. Examine the Attitude and Heading Reference
Chapter 8).
System (AHRS) unit (3420A1) for damage.

2. Examine the condition of the electrical connector. 4. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs (C-136)
from the connectors.
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface
and the attaching hardware. 5. Connect electrical connector (3420A1P1) (4).

4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for 6. Move the slide lock tab to secure the electrical
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion connector (3420A1P1) (4).
damage. Replace when necessary.
7. Apply sealant (C-251) to seal the mating edges of
97-259. ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE the electrical bonding surfaces of the tray (3) and the
SYSTEM (AHRS) UNIT (GRS 77H) — AHRS unit (3420A1) (1).
INSTALLATION

8. Connect the battery or external DC power to the

MATERIALS REQUIRED helicopter.

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NOTE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE The following step is not required if the
same component as that removed is being
C-251 Sealant reinstalled and repair of the component did
not take place.

WARNING 9. If a new, repaired, or replacement AHRS unit

(3420A1) (1) was installed, complete the Attitude
Heading Reference System (GRS 77H) and
Magnetometer (GMU 44) Software and Configuration
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Loading Procedure (Chapter 95).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 10. If the mounting tray (3) attachment hardware was
loosened during the replacement of the AHRS unit
1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the tray (3, (3420A1) (1), do the pitch and roll offset,
Figure 97-46) and the AHRS unit (3420A1) (1) are magnetometer calibration, and engine run-up vibration
clean and show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer test. Refer to Section 7 of the Garmin G1000/G1000H
to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface System Maintenance Manual (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
preparation. Chapter 95).

97-00-00
Page 176 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

11. Do an operational check of the AHRS (paragraph 7. Remove the magnetometer (3407TR1) (1) from
97-268). the helicopter.

12. Do the return to service tests as specified in 97-261. MAGNETOMETER (GMU 44) — CLEANING
Section 8 of the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance
Manual (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
Chapter 95). Conduct the testing as specified for two
MATERIALS REQUIRED
display installations.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
97-260. MAGNETOMETER (GMU 44) — REMOVAL
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

WARNING
C-516 Clean Cloth

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry,
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
clean cloth (C-516).
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
from the helicopter. (C-385).

2. Gain access to the magnetometer (GMU 44) 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
(3407TR1) (1, Figure 97-47) by removing the access soft bristle brush.
panel near the attachment point of the tailboom
(Chapter 53).
97-262. MAGNETOMETER (GMU 44) —
INSPECTION
3. Remove the two screws (4), two washers (5), and
two clamps (6) that secure the wiring and electrical
connector (3407TR1J1) (7). NOTE
The following inspection criteria are
4. Disconnect electrical connector (3407TR1P1) (8) primarily intended when the part or
from electrical connector (3407TR1J1) (7). component has been removed from the
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is
CAUTION installed on the helicopter.

1. Examine the magnetometer (3407TR1) for

USE A NON-MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER damage.
TO REMOVE THE SCREWS. IF A
NON-MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER IS NOT
2. Examine the condition of the electrical connector.
USED, THE MAGNETOMETER CAN BE
DAMAGED.
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface
5. With an non-magnetic screwdriver, remove the and the attaching hardware.
three screws (2) that secure the magnetometer
(3407TR1) to the magnetometer rack (3). 4. Make sure the mounting surface is clean and
prepared for electrical bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
6. Discard the screws (2). Chapter 8).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 177
BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

1
8

6
5

9
7 3

4 6

1. Magnetometer
(GMU 44) (3407TR1)
2. Screw
3. Rack
4. Screw
5. Washer
6. Clamp DETAIL A
7. Electrical connector (3407TR1J1)
8. Electrical connector (3407TR1P1)
9. Dowel pins
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0039

Figure 97-47. Magnetometer — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 178 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

5. Visually examine the attaching hardware for 5. Install the two the screws (4), two washers (5),
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion and two clamps (6) that secure the wiring and
damage. Replace when necessary. electrical connector (3407TR1J1) (7). Tighten the
screws.
97-263. MAGNETOMETER (GMU 44) —
INSTALLATION 6. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
helicopter.

WARNING 7. Install the access panel near the attachment point

of the tailboom (Chapter 53).

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NOTE
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC The following step is not required if the
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). same component as that removed is being
reinstalled and repair of the component did
1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the not take place.
magnetometer (GMU 44) (3407TR1) (1, Figure 97-47)
and the rack (3) are clean and show no signs of 8. If a new, repaired, or replacement magnetometer
corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, (3407TR1) (1) was installed, complete the Attitude
Chapter 8 for surface preparation. Heading Reference System (GRS 77H) and
Magnetometer (GMU 44) Software and Configuration
Loading Procedure (Chapter 95).

CAUTION 9. If the magnetometer (3407TR1) (1) was replaced

by a new, repaired, or replacement unit, do the
magnetometer calibration. Refer to Section 7 of the
USE A NON-MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER Garmin G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual
TO INSTALL THE SCREWS. IF A (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95).
NON-MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER IS NOT
USED, THE MAGNETOMETER CAN BE
DAMAGED. 10. Do an operational check of the Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) (paragraph
97-268).
2. Install the magnetometer (3407TR1) (1) to the
magnetometer rack (3) with three new screws (2), with
the forward arrow pointing to the nose of the helicopter 11. Do the return to service tests as specified in
and the dowel pins (9) aligned. Tighten the screws. Section 8 of the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance
Manual (190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
Chapter 95). Conduct the testing as specified for two
3. Connect electrical connector (3407TR1P1) (8) to
display installations.
electrical connector (3407TR1J1) (7).

97-264. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AHRS

NOTE (GRS 77H)) — REMOVAL
If the mating surfaces of the components
were clean and showed no signs of
corrosion at the time of installation, the WARNING
following step is not required.

4. Make sure the bond resistance between the OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
magnetometer (3407TR1) (1) and the magnetometer WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
rack (3) meets Class R-II electrical bonding NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 179
BHT-407-MM-11

1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 97-266. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AHRS
from the helicopter. (GRS 77H)) — INSPECTION

2. Disconnect the electrical connector NOTE

(3420A1P1) (1, Figure 97-48).
The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or
3. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the component has been removed from the
cover (3) of the electrical connector (3420A1P1) (1). helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is
4. Slide the configuration module (6) out of the slot installed on the helicopter.
to remove it from the electrical connector body (5).
1. Examine the configuration module for damage.

2. Examine the condition of the electrical connector.

CAUTION
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface.
DO NOT USE TOOLS TO REMOVE THE
CONNECTOR FROM THE 4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
CONFIGURATION MODULE. THE cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
CONNECTOR IS FRAGILE AND MAY damage. Replace when necessary.
BREAK.
97-267. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AHRS
(GRS 77H)) — INSTALLATION
5. Carefully disconnect the electrical connector (4)
from the configuration module.

WARNING
97-265. CONFIGURATION MODULE (AHRS
(GRS 77H)) — CLEANING
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
MATERIALS REQUIRED NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
CAUTION
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth DO NOT USE TOOLS TO CONNECT THE

CONNECTOR TO THE CONFIGURATION
MODULE. THE CONNECTOR IS
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a dry, FRAGILE AND MAY BREAK.
clean cloth (C-516).
1. Connect the electrical connector (4,
Figure 97-48) to the configuration module (6).
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol 2. Slide the configuration module (6) in the slot to
(C-385). insert it in the electrical connector body (5).

3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a 3. Install the two screws (2) that secure the
soft bristle brush. cover (3) of the electrical connector (3420A1P1) (1).

97-00-00
Page 180 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

2
1 3

6
4

SEE DETAIL B

DETAIL A

5
1. Electrical connector (3420A1P1)
2. Screw
3. Cover
4. Electrical connector
5. Electrical connector body
6. Configuration module DETAIL B
7. AHRS unit (3420A1) (ROTATED 180°)
8. Aft avionics equipment shelf
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0040

Figure 97-48. Configuration Module (AHRS (GRS 77H)) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 181
BHT-407-MM-11

4. Connect the electrical connector (3420A1P1) (1) RESULT:

to the Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS) unit (3420A1). • On the Primary Flight Display (PFD), the
message “AHRS ALIGN: KEEP WINGS
LEVEL” is shown for approximately 1 minute
5. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
and then is removed from the PFD.
helicopter.
• After the AHRS unit (3420A1) has finished its
alignment process, the attitude indicator
NOTE
shows approximately zero pitch and zero roll.
If only the configuration module of the
Attitude and Heading Reference System • After the AHRS unit (3420A1) has finished its
(AHRS) (GRS 77H) was replaced, no alignment process, the heading indicator
software loading is required. However, shows the current heading.
AHRS (GRS 77H) and magnetometer
(GMU 44) calibration is required to be • The CALIBRATE AHRS/MAG G1000H
performed. Refer to the Garmin G1000/ system message is not shown.
G1000H System Maintenance Manual
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95) for the CORRECTIVE ACTION:
calibration procedure.
• If the PFD does not display the message
6. If the configuration module (6) was replaced by a “AHRS ALIGN: KEEP WINGS LEVEL”
new, repaired, or replacement unit, do the pitch and message, replace the AHRS unit (3420A1)
roll offset, the magnetometer calibration, and the (paragraph 97-256).
engine run-up vibration test. Refer to Section 7 of the
Garmin G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual • If the ATTITUDE FAIL flag is shown, verify the
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). the G1000H system messages to make sure
no AHRS or AHRS 1 messages are shown. If
AHRS advisory messages are shown, isolate
7. Do an operational check of the Attitude and between the communications to the other Line
Heading Reference System (AHRS) (paragraph Replaceable Units (LRUs) or replace the
97-268). AHRS unit (3420A1) (paragraph 97-256).
Refer to the Garmin G1000/G1000H System
97-268. ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE Maintenance Manual (BHT-407-CR&O-V,
SYSTEM (AHRS) — OPERATIONAL Chapter 95) for recommended maintenance
CHECK actions of specific G1000H system messages.

• If the HDG FAIL flag is shown, verify the

NOTE G1000H system messages to make sure no
AHRS or AHRS 1 messages are shown. If
Refer to the Attitude and Heading AHRS advisory messages are shown, isolate
Reference System (AHRS) interface (S/N between the communications to the other
54300 and subsequent) wiring diagram LRUs or replace the AHRS unit (3420A1)
(Chapter 98), as applicable, for additional (paragraph 97-256) or magnetometer
information on troubleshooting the system. (paragraph 97-260). Refer to the Garmin
G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual
NOTE (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95) for
recommended maintenance actions of
Use an external power unit, if available, to specific G1000H system messages.
prevent the battery from being drained of its
stored electrical power. • If the CALIBRATE AHRS/MAG message is
shown, verify the G1000H system messages
1. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the to make sure no AHRS or AHRS 1 messages
external DC power unit to ON. are shown. If AHRS advisory messages are

97-00-00
Page 182 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

shown, isolate between the communications 2. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
to the other LRUs or replace the configuration the external DC power unit to OFF.
module (paragraph 97-264). Refer to the
Garmin G1000/G1000H System Maintenance
Manual (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95) for 3. Return the helicopter to the standard
recommended maintenance actions of specific configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
G1000H system messages. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 183/184
 BHT-407-MM-11

TRANSPONDER MODE S WITH EXTENDED SQUITTER (GTX 33H ES)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-269. TRANSPONDER SYSTEM An analysis of the total air traffic situation is made with
the data from PSR and SSR. A typical Air Traffic
The function of the transponder system is to transmit a Control (ATC) station is shown in Figure 97-50.
coded reply after it receives an interrogation from the
Air Traffic Controller (ATC). A helicopter equipped with The three modes of operation of the transponder are
a transponder is identified and located in range and described below:
azimuth by the Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon
System (ATCRBS) radar site. • Mode A – A discrete transponder code is
assigned by air traffic controllers to uniquely
The transponder system includes the following identify an aircraft. The flight crew sets the
components: transponder with the code. When the
transponder receives a Mode A interrogation,
it transmits a four-digit octal code reply to the
• Transponder (GTX 33H ES) (3427TR1)
air traffic controller. The ATC station can
identify each aircraft by its applicable code
• Transponder antenna (KA-61) (3427E1) and show its applicable range and azimuth on
the radar display.
• Transponder controls and indicators on the
PFD • Mode C – When the transponder receives a
Mode C interrogation, it transmits the identity
Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component code and the aircraft altitude. The transponder
reference designator index table and location figure has to be set to ALT mode and interfaced to
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the an altimeter or data computer to transmit the
components. altitude. The Mode C transponder will operate
in Mode A if it is used without an altimeter or
air data computer.
To help clarify system operation, refer to the simplified
schematic (Figure 97-49) while reading information
• Mode S – The Mode S (selective) transponder
about the transponder system.
is designed to help air traffic control in busy
areas and allows automatic collision
The two classes of radar used by the Air Traffic avoidance. Mode S gives identification and
Control (ATC) station are Primary Surveillance Radar flight information to ground controllers and
(PSR) and Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR). other aircraft equipped with mode S
transponders.
The PSR operates on the normal radar principle. It
transmits energy and receives energy that reflects 97-270. TRANSPONDER (GTX 33H ES)
from the aircraft under surveillance. No equipment is
necessary on the helicopter for the radar to work.
The transponder (3427TR1) is a non-diversity Mode S
transponder that operates on radar frequencies. It
Unlike PSR, SSR relies on its targets being equipped receives ground radar or Traffic Collision Avoidance
with a radar transponder that replies to each System (TCAS) interrogations at 1030 MHz and it
interrogation (Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S) signal by replies to these interrogations with a coded response
transmitting its own response containing encoded of pulses to ground based radar on a frequency of
data. 1090 MHz.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 185
BHT-407-MM-11

TRANSPONDER
LCTN - INSTRUMENT PANEL
3427TR1
XPNDR
3427CB1 3427TR1P1 (GTX 33H ES) 3427TR1P1

28 V DC 5A 21 28V DC POWER IN 1
BUS POWER GROUND 27

INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1

LCTN - INSTRUMENT PANEL
3140A1
3140A1P3
(GIA 63H)

RS-232 IN 1 22 55 MAIN RS-232 OUT 5

RS-232 OUT 1 23 53 MAIN RS-232 IN 5
SIGNAL GROUND 51 54 SIGNAL GROUND

TRAFFIC ADVISORY
EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION I/O 31
SYSTEM (TAS) KIT

INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2

LCTN - BEHIND INSTRUMENT PANEL
3140A2
3140A2P3
(GIA 63H)

RS-232 IN 2 24 55 MAIN RS-232 OUT 5

RS-232 OUT 2 25 53 MAIN RS-232 IN 5
SIGNAL GROUND 58 54 SIGNAL GROUND

3427TR1P2

BOTTOM ANTENNA (XPDR)

3427E1P1

3427E1
LCTN - LOWER FUSELAGE

NOTE

1 FOR CONTINUATION, REFER TO PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD) AND

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) INTERFACE WIRING DIAGRAM (CHAPTER 98).
407-476-604-B 407gc_MM_97_0030

Figure 97-49. Transponder System — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 186 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

INDICATOR SITE

LAND LINE

SECONDARY
PRIMARY SURVEILLANCE
SURVEILLANCE RADAR (SSR)
RADAR (PSR)

GROUND STATION
(INTERROGATOR)

407_MM_97_0002

Figure 97-50. Typical Air Traffic Control Station

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 187
BHT-407-MM-11

The transponder (3427TR1) is equipped with IDENT helicopter and within the coverage volume.
capability that activates the Special Position Helicopters without an operating transponder are
Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds. invisible to TIS.

The transponder (3427TR1) replies to Air Traffic The transponder (3427TR1) provides a datalink for
Control Radar Beacon (ACTRB) Mode A, Mode C, and Traffic Information Service (TIS). ATC radar sends
Mode S All Calls interrogations. traffic pictures within a radius of 55 miles (88.5 km)
from select sites. The TIS protected area is a cylinder
of a 7.5 nautical mile (13.9 km) radius, extending
The transponder (3427TR1) has an Extended Squitter
3500 feet (1066.8 m) above and 3000 feet (914.4 m)
Enabled. This provides the capabilities of Automatic
below the helicopter.
Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B)
technology, which improves situational awareness and
flight safety. With ADS-B capabilities, position, velocity, The transponder system provides voice audio output
and heading information are automatically transmitted for the announcement of TIS traffic advisories. The
to other aircraft and ground stations. The current air audio alerts are as follows:
traffic control system depends on a transponder
request for pertinent aircraft information. ADS-B • “Traffic” – TIS traffic is received
provides automatic transmission of aircraft information
without a request.
• “Traffic Not Available” – TIS service is not
available or out of range
NOTE
97-271. TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (KA 61)
For additional information on Traffic
Information Service (TIS), refer to the
General TIS Information Section of the The transponder antenna (3427E1) (Figure 97-49) is
Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck installed under the cabin on the right side.
Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).
It is an L-band blade antenna with vertical polarization.
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) feature is The frequency range is between 960 and 1220 MHz. It
enabled on helicopters that do not have the Traffic is terminated with a bayonet Neill-Concelman (BNC)
Advisory System (TAS) kit installed (BHT-407-II-28) to connector. The Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR)
provide TIS surveillance data on both the of the transponder antenna (3427E1) is 1.5:1
Multi-Function Display (MFD) and Primary Flight maximum for 960 to 1220 MHz and 1.3:1 maximum for
Display (PFD). TIS provides a graphic display of traffic 1025 to 1150 MHz.
information on the PFD and MFD for helicopters that
do not have the TAS kit installed (BHT-407-II-28). TIS 97-272. TRANSPONDER INDICATOR AND
uses terminal Mode S ground interrogator using its CONTROLS ON THE PFD
datalink with a 5-second update rate and is dependant
on two-way line-of-sight communication between the
The transponder indications are on the PFD
host aircraft and the Mode S radar.
(Figure 97-51). Above the IDENT softkey are the
transponder code, the transponder mode of operation,
When the TAS kit is not installed, the transponder and the transponder reply indicator.
interfaces with both the PFD and MFD to provide a
graphic display of traffic advisory information on either
The IDENT softkey is always available in each
the Traffic or Map pages or to provide a traffic warning
transponder sub-menu. The IDENT softkey is used by
window on other pages.
the pilot when the control tower requests an
identification. Once the IDENT softkey is pressed, the
Transponder equipped aircraft can be displayed on radar tracking the helicopter will show highlighted
either the PFD or MFD, if they are within range of the target tracking information for 18 seconds.

97-00-00
Page 188 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

PFD XPDR REPLY

SOFTKEY INDICATOR
TRANSPONDER
IDENT CODE TRANSPONDER
SOFTKEY MODE

407gc_MM_97_0034
Figure 97-51. Transponder System — Indications and Softkeys

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 189
BHT-407-MM-11

The transponder controls are softkeys on the PFD. On transponder mode indicator will show ON and the
the main PFD view, the XPDR softkey opens a new transponder code in green text.
set of transponder specific softkeys to set the mode, or
the code transmitted (Figure 97-52). The STBY, ON, ALT:
ALT, and GND softkeys are used to set the
transponder to a specific mode. The VFR softkey is In this selection the transponder will reply to Mode A,
used to set the transponder to the Visual Flight Rules Mode S and Mode C interrogations. Replies to altitude
(VFR) code of 1200. The CODE softkey opens a new interrogations include the standard pressure altitude
set of softkeys for the octal digits (0 through 7) received from an external altitude source, which is not
(Figure 97-53). To change the code, the pilot presses adjusted for barometric pressure. When ALT is
the four softkeys in sequence. For example, to display selected, the transponder mode indicator will show
a code of 1234, the softkeys 1, then 2, then 3, and ALT and the transponder code in green text. ALT
then 4 must be pressed. After the last digit, the code Mode is automatically selected when the weight on
will be changed, and the new code will be displayed in gear switch changes from ground to air.
the transponder indicator.
GRD:
97-273. Transponder System — Mode Selection
Softkeys
In this selection the transponder does not respond to
The mode selection softkeys (Figure 97-52) are as Mode A and Mode C interrogations, but does respond
follows: to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations. When
GRD is selected, the transponder mode indicator will
show GRD and the transponder code in green text.
NOTE
Any time that the mode selection softkeys 97-274. Transponder System — Function Softkeys
(ON or ALT) are selected, the transponder
becomes an active part of the Air Traffic The function buttons (Figure 97-52) are as follows:
Control Radar Beacon System (ATCRBS).
The transponder also responds to IDENT:
interrogations from TCAS/TAS equipped
aircraft.
Pressing this softkey activates the Special Position
STBY: Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying
the helicopter’s transponder return from others on the
In this selection the unit is energized but does not air traffic controller’s screen. On the PFD, the word
reply to interrogations but new codes can be entered. IDENT will appear in the in the transponder mode
When STBY is selected, the transponder mode field. The IDENT function is unusable on the ground.
indicator will show STBY and the transponder code in
white text. VFR:

ON: Pressing this softkey sets the transponder code to the

pre-programmed VFR code selected during
In this selection the transponder will reply to Mode A installation configuration (this is set to 1200 at the
and Mode S interrogations, but the reply does not factory). Pressing the VFR softkey again restores the
include altitude information. When ON is selected, the previous identification code.

97-00-00
Page 190 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

PFD
MODE
SOFTKEYS
CODE
VFR SOFTKEY
SOFTKEY

407gc_MM_97_0035
Figure 97-52. Transponder System — Mode Select and Code Softkeys

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 191
BHT-407-MM-11

PFD
OCTAL DIGIT
SOFTKEYS

407gc_MM_97_0036
Figure 97-53. Transponder System — Octal Digit Softkeys

97-00-00
Page 192 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-275. Transponder System — Code Selection The transponder (3427TR1) is configured for
Buttons automatic transition to altitude mode through the
weight on gear switch. Normal operation begins when
takeoff is sensed (when the switch actuates to the
open circuit position). The transponder will change to
CAUTION ALT mode, and respond to ATCBS and TCACS/TAS
interrogations.

AVOID SELECTING CODES 7500, 7600,

When the helicopter is on the ground, the transponder
7700, AND 7777. THESE CODES
switches to GND mode. The transponder (3427TR1)
TRIGGER SPECIAL INDICATORS IN
does not respond to ATCBS interrogations when GND
AUTOMATED FACILITIES. A
mode is shown.
HELICOPTER TRANSPONDER CODE IS
USED FOR ATC TRACKING PURPOSES,
THEREFORE EXERCISE CARE WHEN The transponder (3427TR1) communicates with
MAKING ROUTINE CODE CHANGES. integrated avionics units No. 1 (3140A1) and No. 2
(3140A2) through a pair of RS-232 serial busses. For
integrated avionics unit No. 1, serial data leaves the
NOTE transponder at contact 23 of electrical connector
The selected identification code should be (3427TR1P1) of the transponder (3427TR1) and
entered carefully. enters integrated avionics unit No. 1 (3140A1) at
contact 53 of electrical connector (3410A1P3). Serial
Code selection (Figure 97-53) is done with eight data also leaves integrated avionics unit No. 1
softkeys (0 to 7) providing 4096 active identification (3140A1) at contact 55 of electrical connector
codes. Pushing one of these softkeys begins the code (3410A1P3) and enters the transponder (3427TR1) at
selection sequence. The new code is not activated contact 22 of electrical connector (3427TR1P1). For
until the fourth digit is entered. Pressing the BKSP integrated avionics unit No. 2, serial data leaves the
button cancels the last softkey selection. transponder at contact 25 of electrical connector
(3427TR1P1) of the transponder (3427TR1) and
enters integrated avionics unit No. 2 (3140A2) at
• Important Codes: contact 53 of electrical connector (3410A2P3). Serial
data also leaves integrated avionics unit No. 2
7500 – Hijack code (aircraft is subject to (3140A2) at contact 55 of electrical connector
unlawful interference) (3410A2P3) and enters the transponder (3427TR1) at
at contact 24 of electrical connector (3427TR1P1).
7600 – Loss of communications
An external suppression pulse is sent to the Traffic
7700 – Emergency Advisory System (TAS) (BHT-407-II-28), if installed, to
prevent the helicopter’s own transponder from being
7777 – Interception by military aircraft visible to the TAS. The suppression pulse leaves the
transponder (3427TR1) at contact 31 of electrical
97-276. TRANSPONDER SYSTEM — OPERATION connector (3427TR1P1) and is directed to the TAS
processor (3440A1).
Electrical power from the 28 VDC BUS feeds the
XPNDR circuit breaker (3427CB1) and is then directed Four G1000H system messages are associated with
to contact 21 of the electrical connector (3427TR1P1) the transponder (GTX 33H) (3427TR1P1):
of the transponder (3427TR1). As soon as electrical
power is applied to the 28 VDC bus, the transponder • XPDR1 CONFIG
will complete its self-test and then switch to standby
mode. • MANIFEST

The transponder (3427TR1) responds to • XPDR1 SRVC

interrogations through the transmit/receive antenna
(3427E1). • XPDR1 FAIL

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 193
BHT-407-MM-11

XPDR1 CONFIG shows when the configuration of the 3. At the lower area of the rack, loosen the screw
transponder (3427TR1P1) and the display units (8, Figure 97-54) to release the wedge on the bottom
(3160DS1 and 3160DS2) have different configurations of the transponder (GTX 33H ES) (3427TR1) (1) from
set. the wedge in the rack (2).

MANIFEST shows when the transponder 4. Pull the ring (9) on the front of the transponder
(3427TR1P1) has the incorrect software installed. (GTX 33H ES) (3427TR1) (1) and lift the transponder
0.75 inch (19.05 mm) to remove it from the rack (2).
XPDR1 SRVC shows when the transponder
(3427TR1P1) needs service. The transponder
(3427TR1P1) should be removed and returned for 5. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the
service as soon as possible. electrical connectors.

XPDR1 FAIL shows when either integrated avionics 6. If necessary, remove the rack (2) as follows:
unit No. 1 or integrated avionics unit No. 2 cannot
communicate with the transponder (3427TR1P1).
a. Remove the sealant from around the base of
the rack (2).
97-277. TRANSPONDER SYSTEM —
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
b. Pull on the spring clips (5) to unlock the
backplate (3) from the rack (2).
To replace an electrical component, refer to the
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance c. Remove the screws (4) from the rack (2).
procedures, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM.
d. Remove the rack (2) from the supports (6
97-278. TRANSPONDER (GTX 33H ES) — and 7).
REMOVAL
97-279. TRANSPONDER (GTX 33H ES) —
CLEANING
MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

MATERIALS REQUIRED
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

WARNING
C-516 Clean Cloth

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR cloth (C-516).
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
from the helicopter. (C-385).

2. If installed, remove the Multi-Function Display 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
(MFD) (Chapter 95). soft bristle brush.

97-00-00
Page 194 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
DETAIL A
1. Transponder (GTX 33H ES) (34277R1) (S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)
2. Rack
3. Back plate
4. Screw 3
5. Spring clips SEALANT (C-251)
6. Support
7. Support 13 TO 17 IN-LBS
8. Screw (1.5 TO 1.9 Nm) 2
9. Ring

NOTE 1

1 After installation of rack (2),

apply sealant (C-251) to cover
the electrical bonding area. 4 PLACES
4
WEDGE

1 6

FOOT
WEDGE
8
7

DETAIL B
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0033

Figure 97-54. Transponder (GTX 33H ES) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 195
BHT-407-MM-11

97-280. TRANSPONDER (GTX 33H ES) — of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
INSPECTION Chapter 8 for surface preparation.

b. Install the rack (2) with screws (4) on the

NOTE supports (6 and 7). Tighten the screws.
The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or
component has been removed from the NOTE
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection If the mating surfaces of the components
requirements, applicable criteria may also were clean and showed no signs of
be used when the part or component is corrosion at the time of installation, the
installed on the helicopter. following step is not required.

1. Examine the transponder (GTX 33H ES) c. Make sure the electrical bonding between the
(3427TR1) (1, Figure 97-54) for damage. supports (6 and 7) and the rack (2) meets Class R-I
electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8).
2. Examine the condition of the connectors.

d. Apply sealant (C-251) to the mating edges of

3. Examine the condition of the rack (2). the supports (6 and 7) and the rack (2) to cover the
electrical bonding area.
4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion e. Put the backplate (3) in position at the back of
damage. Replace when necessary. the rack (2) and make sure the spring clips (5) are
engaged and lock the backplate in place.
97-281. TRANSPONDER (GTX 33H ES) —
INSTALLATION 2. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from all the
electrical connectors.

MATERIALS REQUIRED 3. Put the transponder (GTX 33H ES) (3427TR1)

(1) in the rack (2). Lift the receiver 0.75 inch (19.05
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. mm) to position the foot on the receiver forward of the
wedge on the rack.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-251 Sealant
CAUTION

WARNING MAKE SURE THE THREADS OF THE

SCREW (8) PROPERLY ENGAGE THE
MATING THREADS OF THE RACK (2).
CONFIRM PROPER ALIGNMENT
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
BETWEEN THE SCREW AND THE
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
THREADED HOLE OF THE RACK
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
DURING INSTALLATION. DO NOT USE
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
FORCE WHILE INSTALLING THE
SCREW OR CROSS THREADING AND
1. If previously removed, install the rack (2,
DAMAGE TO THE PARTS CAN OCCUR.
Figure 97-54) as follows:
4. Ensuring proper thread engagement, start the
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the supports screw (8) into the mating threaded hole of the rack (2).
(6 and 7) and the rack (2) are clean and show no signs Do not tighten the screw at this time.

97-00-00
Page 196 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-282. TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (KA-61) —

REMOVAL
CAUTION

DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW. A MATERIALS REQUIRED

TORQUE OF MORE THAN
17 INCH-POUNDS (1.9 NM) CAN Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
DAMAGE THE RACK.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
5. Tighten the screw (8) until the connectors are
mated and the retaining wedge in the rack (2) is fully C-156 Caps and/or Plugs
engaged with the wedge on the bottom of the
transponder (GTX 33H ES) (3427TR1) (1). Torque the
screw to between 13 and 17 inch-pounds (1.5 to
1.9 Nm). WARNING

6. Install the Multi-Function Display (MFD)

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Chapter 95).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
7. Connect the battery or external DC power to the EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
helicopter.
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter.
NOTE
The following step is not required if the 2. Use a plastic scraper to remove any trace of
same component as that removed is being sealant around the base of the transponder antenna
reinstalled and repair of the component did
(KA-61) (3427E1) (4, Figure 97-56).
not take place.

8. If a new, repaired, or replacement transponder 3. Remove the pilot seat and seat cover
(3427TR1) (1) was installed, complete the (Chapter 25) to gain access to the transponder
Transponder (GTX 33H ES) Software and antenna (KA-61) (3427E1) (4).
Configuration Loading Procedure (Chapter 95).
4. Remove the self-locking nuts (1) and
washers (2).
NOTE
Information to access the configuration
pages is provided in Configuration Page 5. Pull gently on the transponder antenna (KA-61)
Group Navigation (Chapter 95). (3427E1) (4) and disconnect the antenna electrical
connector (3427E1P1) (3).
9. After loading the software and configuration files,
turn to the TRANSPONDER CONFIGURATION page 6. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on all
(Figure 97-55) and enter the helicopter registration the antenna connectors.
(address) and flight ID numbers, as applicable. Refer
to the Final Configuration Items per Section 10 of the
G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual 7. Remove the transponder antenna (KA-61)
(190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). (3427E1) (4).

10. Do an operational check of the transponder 8. If required, remove the backing plate (6) from the
system (paragraph 97-286). lower shell (5).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 197
BHT-407-MM-11

TRANSPONDER CONFIGURATION PAGE

407gc_MM_97_0054
Figure 97-55. Transponder Configuration Page

97-00-00
Page 198 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

6 1
1 1

2 1

2 4

1. Self-locking nut
2. Washer
3. Antenna connector (3427E1P1)
4. Transponder antenna (KA-61) (3427E1)
5. Lower shell
6. Backing plate

SEALANT (C-251)

NOTE
1 Backing plate (6) is supplied with the transponder antenna (4). Trim as required.

2 After installation, apply sealant (C-251) to the mating edges of the antenna and the lower shell
mounting surface.

NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0032_c01

Figure 97-56. Transponder Antenna (KA-61) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 199
BHT-407-MM-11

97-283. TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (KA-61) — 97-285. TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (KA-61) —

CLEANING INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-251 Sealant
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth

WARNING

1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean

cloth (C-516). OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385). 1. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from all the
electrical connectors.

3. Remove dirt from antenna connector(s) with a 2. Make sure the mating surfaces of the
soft bristle brush. transponder antenna (KA-61) (3427E1) (4,
Figure 97-56) and the helicopter skin are clean and
show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
97-284. TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (KA-61) —
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
INSPECTION
3. If previously removed, install the backing plate (6)
on the inside of the lower shell (5).
NOTE
The following inspection criteria are 4. Position the transponder antenna (3427E1) (4) on
primarily intended when the part or the mounting surface.
component has been removed from the
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection 5. Install the washers (2) and self-locking nuts (1) to
requirements, applicable criteria may also secure the transponder antenna (KA-61) (3427E1) (4)
be used when the part or component is in place.
installed on the helicopter.
6. Connect the antenna connector (3427E1P1) (3)
to the transponder antenna (KA-61) (3427E1) (4).
1. Examine the component for damage.

NOTE
2. Examine the condition of the antenna connectors.
If the mating surfaces of the components
were clean and showed no signs of
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface corrosion at the time of installation, the
and the attaching hardware. following step is not required.

7. Make sure the bond resistance of the

4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for transponder antenna (KA-61) (3427E1) (4) to the
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion helicopter skin meets Class A-II electrical bonding
damage. Replace when necessary. requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).

97-00-00
Page 200 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

8. Seal the edges of the transponder antenna • After the transponder completes its self-test,
(KA-61) (3427E1) (4) with sealant (C-251). the XPDR1 SRVC message is not shown on
the PFD.
9. Install the seat cover and the pilot seat
(Chapter 25). • After the transponder completes its self-test,
the XPDR1 CONFIG message is not shown
on the PFD.
10. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
helicopter.
• After the transponder completes its self-test,
the MANIFEST message is not shown on the
11. Do an operational check of the transponder PFD.
system (paragraph 97-286).
• After the transponder completes its self-test, a
97-286. TRANSPONDER SYSTEM — GND indication is shown on the bottom right
OPERATIONAL CHECK side of the PFD.

2. On the PFD, press the XPDR softkey.

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
3. Press the CODE softkey.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

Barfield Type 1811G or Pitot-static Field Tester WARNING

Equivalent

Commercial Headset DO NOT SET THE TRANSPONDER

CODE TO 7500, 7600, 7700, OR 7777.
IFR Type ATC-601 or Transponder Test Set THESE CODES ARE USED FOR
Equivalent EMERGENCIES.

4. Pressing the octal digit softkeys, enter a code of

NOTE 2300. Using the numeric keys (0-7) enter a code of
Refer to the transponder interface system 2300.
(S/N 54300 and subsequent) wiring
diagram (Chapter 98), as applicable, for RESULT:
additional information on troubleshooting
the system. • On the PFD, the code 2300 is shown in the
transponder code box.
NOTE
5. Deactivate the weight on gear ground input to the
Use an external power unit if available to transponder (3427TR1) by temporarily installing a
prevent the battery from being drained of its tapered shim to move the weight on gear switch
stored electrical power. plunger upward. Move the plunger upward until an
audible click is heard and the WOG CAS message is
1. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or apply extinguished.
external DC power.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• On the PFD, the GND indication changes to
• After the transponder completes its self-test, ALT.
the XPDR1 FAIL message is not shown on the
Primary Flight Display (PFD). 6. On the PFD, press the IDENT softkey.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 201
BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: 13. Set the IFR Type ATC-601 test set mode switch
to A/C CODE. Set the function selector switch to
• The IDENT indication is displayed on the STANDBY and allow the test set to warm up for
lower right of the PFD for approximately approximately 2 minutes.
20 seconds.
14. When the test set F2 light is off, on the PFD,
press the XPDR softkey.

CAUTION 15. Press the CODE softkey.

16. Press the 7, 4, 7, 4 softkeys to set the code to set

NEVER PUT THE REMOTE TEST
code 7474 on the transponder (3427TR1).
ANTENNA CLOSER THAN 1 FOOT
(30.48 CM) FROM THE HELICOPTER
ANTENNA WITH THE IFR TYPE ATC-601 RESULT:
TURNED ON OR DAMAGE TO THE TEST
SET WILL RESULT. • The PFD shows 7474 in the transponder code
box.

NOTE • The REPLY symbol (Figure 97-51) on the

The transponder test set is used to transmit PFD comes on when the transponder is
a coded RF interrogation to do a test of the interrogated by the test set.
transponder receiver and decoder. It is also
used to make sure the coded RF replies NOTE
from the transmitter and coder are valid.
Make sure that the software version is 1.3
(MPU Version 1.3) or higher.
NOTE
17. Repeat step 16 for codes 6563, 5226, 2315,
For more information on the IFR Type
0023, and 2300.
ATC-601 test set, refer to the IFR Type
ATC-601 Test Set Operation Manual.
18. On the transponder test set, push the SETUP key
to enter the SETUP menu.
7. Set up the tripod, the remote test antenna
(Figure 97-57), and the ATC-601 test set
(Figure 97-58). NOTE
Push the SLEW key to replace a value.
8. Adjust the height of the test antenna to the same Push the SELECT key to replace an item.
height as the helicopter transponder antenna.

NOTE
9. Install the test antenna approximately 21 inches
(53 cm) horizontally from the helicopter transponder Push and release the SLEW key to change
antenna. the value by a 1-foot increment.

10. Connect the test antenna coaxial cable to the test NOTE
set. Push and hold the SLEW key to change the
RANGE value by 10-foot increments and
11. Set the IFR Type ATC-601 test set PWR switch to the height value by 5-foot increments.
ON.
19. Push the SELECT key until the display shows
BOTTOM RANGE. Set the horizontal distance
12. Set the IFR Type ATC-601 test set INTERR and between the test set and the Mode S antenna (located
FRAMING controls to zero. at the bottom of the helicopter).

97-00-00
Page 202 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

407gc_MM_97_0052

Figure 97-57. ATC-601 Transponder Antenna Placement

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 203
BHT-407-MM-11

407gc_MM_97_0053

Figure 97-58. ATC-601 Transponder Test Set Position Limits

97-00-00
Page 204 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

20. Push the SELECT key until the display shows measurements, and diversity channel isolation
BOTTOM HEIGHT. Set the vertical height from the (not necessary) are also shown.
ground to the bottom of the Mode S antenna.
• The reply frequency is 1090 ±3 MHz.
21. Push the SELECT key until the display shows
GAIN (gain of the test set antenna). Set the gain of the 27. Push the RUN/STOP switch.
test set antenna (written on the antenna).
28. Push the AUTO TEST switch.
22. Push the SELECT key until the display shows
LOSS (loss of the test set coaxial cable). Set the loss 29. Push the select key until you see the ATCRBS
of the coaxial cable (written on the cable). reply test screen.

23. Push the SELECT key until the display shows 30. On the PFD, turn the large BARO knob, until the
BOTTOM ANTENNA. BARO setting shows 29.92 inches of mercury (1013.2
millibars).
24. Push the SETUP key to exit the SETUP menu.
31. Connect a pitot-static test set to the pitot-static
system of the helicopter (Chapter 95).

WARNING 32. Push the RUN/STOP switch.

DO NOT SET THE TRANSPONDER

CODE TO 7500, 7600, 7700, OR 7777. CAUTION
THESE CODES ARE USED FOR
EMERGENCIES.
THE RATE OF CHANGE OF ALTITUDE
MUST BE LESS THAN 750 FEET (228 M)
NOTE FOR EACH MINUTE (750 FEET/MIN) OR
The ATC-601 shows Test Passed if the DAMAGE TO THE AIR DATA COMPUTER
radio frequency reply is within O R S TA N D B Y I N S T R U M E N TS M A Y
1090 ±3 MHz. For Mode S, the necessary RESULT.
range is 1090 ±1 MHz.
33. Increase the test altitude until the transponder
It is not necessary to do a test for Mode S (3427TR1) output changes and indicates the first test
diversity isolation because there is only one point in Table 97-13.
antenna in this configuration.
Table 97-13. Transponder Test Points (Feet)
25. Push the AUTO TEST switch on the test set.
-800
RESULT:
0
• You see the auto test screen (Figure 97-59). 5000
The results of the last tests are seen on the
screen. 15000

20000
26. Push the RUN/STOP switch.
15000
RESULT: 5000

• The DISPLAY shows the modes under test, 0

the modes that passed, and the modes that
failed. The radio frequency used, power -800

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 205
BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-59. Sample Mode S UF20 Test Screen

97-00-00
Page 206 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

34. Make a note of the altitude indications of the 38. Push the RUN/STOP switch on the ATC 601 test
pitot-static test set at the above test points. set.

RESULT:
39. Remove the shim, and make sure the weight on
• The altitude shown on the PFD altitude gear switch is set to its normal state. The transponder
indicator and on the transponder test set is indication should show GND on the PFD and the WOG
within ±125 feet of the altitude shown on the CAS message should be displayed.
pitot-static test set.

35. Change the altitude to the next test point at a rate 40. Remove the test equipment.
of change that is less than 750 feet (228 m) per
minute. 41. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
the external DC power unit to OFF.
36. Repeat step 33 and step 35 for each test point of
Table 97-13.
42. Return the helicopter to the standard
37. Decrease the test altitude slowly and do step 33 configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
and step 35 for each test point in Table 97-13. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 207/208
 BHT-407-MM-11

TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM (TAS) (GTS 800) (OPTIONAL KIT)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-287. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM

NOTE
If you install Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT)
NOTE optional equipment for the first time, do this
The TAS is part of the optional traffic in accordance with the instructions provided
advisory system kit (BHT-407-II-28). in the applicable Installation Instruction (II).
Follow the instructions provided in this
The optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) kit is used chapter for any subsequent installation.
to warn that the helicopter is on a potential collision
course with another aircraft. 97-288. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
PROCESSOR (GTS 800)
The GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) increases
flight crew situational awareness by displaying traffic The traffic advisory system processor (GTS 800)
information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The (3440A1) is installed in the aft avionics shelf above the
system also provides visual and aural Traffic Advisories baggage bay area of the helicopter.
(TAs) including voice announcements to assist in
visually acquiring traffic. The system is capable of Using a top mounted directional antenna and a bottom
tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode mounted monopole antenna system, the Traffic
A or C transponders, and up to 30 intruders equipped Advisory System (TAS) processor computes relative
with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft altitude, range, and bearing of threats from Mode C
with the highest threat potential can be displayed transponder-equipped aircraft up to a range of 20NM.
simultaneously. No traffic surveillance is provided for Vertical separation of the host and intruder aircraft is
aircraft without operating transponders. determined by comparing the decoded altitude replies
to the host aircraft altitude. Range is determined using
TAS includes the following components: radar time of arrival technique, while bearing is
determined using the dual blade directional antenna
• Traffic Advisory System (TAS) processor (GTS system.
800) (3440A1)
97-289. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM ANTENNAS
• Upper mount (GA 58 dual blade) directional
antenna (3440E1) Two antennas are used with the Traffic Advisory
System (TAS). The top mounted antenna (3440E1) is a
• Lower mount (KA-61 single blade) monopole dual blade directional antenna and is installed on the
antenna (3440E2) forward fairing assembly. The lower mounted antenna
(3440E2) is a single blade monopole antenna and is
• TAS indication on the Primary Flight Display installed on the lower aft fairing.
(PFD) inset and on the Multi-Function Display
(MFD) Traffic Map page The transmitting frequency is 1030 MHz and the
receiving frequency is 1090 MHz. The polarization of
Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component the antennas is vertical. They are terminated with a
reference designator index table and location figure Threaded Neill-Concelman (TNC) connector. The
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) is 2.0:1 at 1030
components. MHz and 2.3:1 at 1090 MHz.

To help clarify system operation, refer to the simplified

schematic (Figure 97-60) while reading information
about the TAS.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 209
BHT-407-MM-11

AUDIO PANEL
TAS PROCESSOR 2301A1
LCTN - AFT AVIONICS SHELF (GMA 350H)
2301A1P1
3340A1
TAS (GTS 800) 29 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN 3 HI
3340CB1 3340A1P3 P8003

28 VDC 7.5 A 2 +28 VDC PWR IN P8002 3340A1P2

BUS 3 +28 VDC PWR IN
18 TAS REMOTE PWR ON AUDIO ALERT OUT HI 58
INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1
INTERCOMMUNICATION 3140A1
21 POWER GROUND AUDIO ALERT OUT LO 59
SYSTEM
3140A1P4 (GIA 63H)
22 POWER GROUND
TA INHIBIT 2 12 24 DISCRETE IN 12
TA INHIBIT 11 27 ANNUNCIATE 4

3140A1P5
TAS TOP DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA 43 DISCRETE IN 7A
LCTN - FWD ROOF COWLING TRFC ALERT MUTE SW
3340E1 3150S3

3340E1P1 3340A1-P1T P1T NC NC

DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (YEL) DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (YEL)

NO NO
TRANSPONDER
3340E1P2 3340A1-P2T P2T 3427TR1
AURAL TA ALERT 51
DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (BLK) DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (BLK) 3427TR1P1 (GTX 33H ES)

SUPPRESSION I/O 48 31 EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION I/O

3340E1P3 3340A1-P3T P3T

DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (BLU) DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (BLU)

3340E1P4 3340A1-P4T P4T

DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (RED) DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (RED) PFD (R-DU)
3160DS2
P8001 3340A1P1 3160DS2P1 (GDU 1040H)

TAS BOTTOM MONOPOLE ANTENNA ETHERNET IN A 54 10 ETHERNET OUT 3A

LCTN - UNDER BELLY FUSELAGE ETHERNET IN B 55 11 ETHERNET OUT 3B
3340E2 ETHERNET OUT A 52 12 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT B 53 13 ETHERNET IN 3B
3340E2P1 3340A1-P1B P1B
MONOPOLE ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (YEL)

3340A1-P2B P2B
INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2
DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (BLK)
3140A2
50 
3140A2P5 (GIA 63H)
3340A1-P3B P3B
27 ANNUNCIATE 4
DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (BLU)
50  3140A2P5

3340A1-P4B P4B 43 DISCRETE IN 7A

DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (RED)

50 

407-476-615-A 407gc_MM_97_0009_c01

Figure 97-60. Traffic Advisory System — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 210 Rev. 35 10 DEC 2012 Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-290. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM aircraft. When the softkey is set, the identification of
INDICATION ON DISPLAY UNITS the aircraft being tracked will be shown (N4450C).
Flight IDs will be shown when available from the
Display data is transmitted from the Traffic Advisory tracked aircraft’s transponder.
System (TAS) processor (3340A1) to the Primary
Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2) via an Ethernet The ALT MODE softkey is used to set the altitude
10 base T bus. Traffic indications are displayed on the tracking mode of the TAS processor. Once the softkey
PFD and on the Multi-Function Display (MFD). is pressed, four additional softkeys appear:

On the PFD, when a traffic advisory is generated, a • ABOVE

TRAFFIC indicator appears to the right of the airspeed
bar (Figure 97-61). The traffic inset map also appears
to the bottom right of the PFD. • NORMAL

On the MFD, the traffic map page is the main indicator • BELOW
for the TAS (Figure 97-62). The traffic map page
displays the traffic information and uses different • UNREST
symbols to warn the pilot of incoming traffic, its vertical
separation, altitude trend, and bearing (if available)
(Figure 97-63). The traffic map page also has five Pressing a softkey will set the altitude mode to the
softkeys used to set the system on or off, and to desired setting. This selection will vary depending on
change the display information. The softkeys are as the phase of the flight (climbing, straight and level, or
follows: descending).

• STANDBY The map range can be varied from 2 to 12 nautical

miles (3.7 to 22.2 km) by turning the RANGE knob on
the MFD.
• OPERATE

• TEST Traffic information can also be displayed on the

navigation map.

• FLT ID
97-291. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM —
OPERATION
• ALT MODE

Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the Traffic

The STANDBY softkey is used to set the TAS
Advisory System (TAS) circuit breaker and is then
processor in the standby mode. In standby mode the
directed to contacts 2 and 3 of electrical connector
TAS will not display traffic information.
(3440A1P3). A ground potential is present at contact
18 of electrical connector (3340A1P3); with these
The OPERATE softkey is used to set the TAS conditions, the TAS processor will always be on as
processor in the operating mode. In operating mode soon as the 28 VDC bus is powered. Power ground for
the TAS will display traffic information. the TAS processor (3340A1) is at contacts 21 and 22
of electrical connector (3340A1P3).
The TEST softkey is used to run the TAS through a
self-test. The test takes 10 seconds to complete and A directional antenna (3340E1) is installed the top of
will end with an aural message to warn the pilot that the helicopter and connects into the TAS processor
the TAS has passed (or failed) the self-test. After the (3340A1). A monopole antenna (3340E2) is installed
test, the TAS will be in standby mode. on the aft fuselage to help detect intruders that might
be shaded from the top antenna. Three attenuators
The FLT ID softkey is used to toggle the flight are installed in the unused channels of directional
identification on or off of the traffic information of an antenna outputs P2B, P3B, and P4B.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 211
BHT-407-MM-11

TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATOR
(FLASHES FOR 5 SECONDS THEN REMAINS SOLID)

RANGE
SELECTOR

PFD
TRAFFIC INSET MAP
(AUTOMATICALLY APPEARS ON
A TRAFFIC ADVISORY (TA)

407gc_MM_97_0024
Figure 97-61. Traffic Advisory System — PFD Indications

97-00-00
Page 212 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RANGE
SELECTOR

MFD

STANDBY SOFTKEY TEST SOFTKEY

ALT MODE SOFTKEY
OPERATE SOFTKEY
FLT ID SOFTKEY

407gc_MM_97_0023
Figure 97-62. Traffic Advisory System — MFD Indications

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 213
BHT-407-MM-11

Symbol Description
Traffic Advisory (TA) arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the
intruder aircraft track. (Not available in all installations.)

Traffic Advisory without ADS-B directional information.

Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.

Proximity Advisory (PA) arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the
aircraft track. (Not available in all installations.)

Proximity Advisory without ADS-B directional information.

Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the
intruder aircraft track. (Not available in all installations.)

Non-Threat Traffic without ADS-B directional information.

PA or Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy is
degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. (Not available in all installations.)
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow

Vector Line indicates intruder aircraft track.

407gc_MM_97_0025
Figure 97-63. Traffic Advisory System — Symbols

97-00-00
Page 214 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Communications to the Primary Flight Display (PFD) intruder is determined by comparing the decoded
(3160DS2) are done through an Ethernet bus. altitude replies to the host's altitude (from the altitude
Ethernet transmit data leaves the TAS processor encoder). The altitude data from the intruder is
(3340A1) at contacts 52 and 53 of electrical connector referenced to pressure altitude (29.92 inches or
(3340A1P1) and enter the PFD (3160DS2) at contacts 1013mb), as is the onboard encoder, providing
12 and 13 of electrical connector (3160DS2P1). meaningful separation information. For non-mode C
Ethernet transmit data leaves the PFD (3160DS2) at transponder equipped aircraft, the receiver computes
contacts 10 and 11 of electrical connector (3340A1P1) range and bearing. The range is determined using
and enters the TAS processor (3340A1) at contacts 52 radar time of arrival technique. The bearing of the
and 53 of electrical connector (3340A1P1). traffic is determined using the directional antenna
(3340E1), installed on the top of the helicopter.
Audio alerts are connected to the audio input channel Intruders sensed by the bottom antenna (3340E2) will
3 and leave the TAS processor (3340A1) at contact 58 not have bearing information. The TAS processor
of electrical connector (3340A1P2) and enter the (3440A1) monitors the altitude and range difference,
intercommunications system at contact 29 of electrical and warns the flight crew when the calculated time to
connector (2301A1). closest approach (CPA) of the intruder meets a
threshold of 15 seconds or less separation. The TAS
A traffic alert mute switch (3150S3) is used to mute the processor (3440A1) will alert the pilot to intruders to a
audio alerts associated with the TAS. When the mute range of 12 nautical miles (22.2 km).
switch (3150S3) is pressed, a ground potential signal
is sent to contact 12 of electrical connector There are three advisory levels: Traffic Advisories
(3340A1P2); this will prevent aural traffic alerts from (TAs), Proximity Advisories (PAs), and Non-threat
being heard through the audio system. advisories.

A traffic alert inhibit input is used to mute the audio A TA is generated if the TAS processor (3440A1)
alerts associated with the TAS when a higher priority detects that the current track of the intruder could
aural caution or warning is active. Both integrated result in a near miss or collision.
avionics units No. 1 and No. 2 are connected to the TA
Inhibit input at contact 11 of electrical connector The TAS processor (3440A1) normally uses the Time
(3340A1P2). When integrated avionics unit No. 1 or to Closest Approach (TCA) and the time to co-altitude
No. 2 has an active output at contact 11 of electrical to calculate traffic advisories. A TA is generated when
connector (3340A1P2). Traffic advisories will also be the TCA meets a threshold of between 15 to 30
muted. seconds. A TA is also generated when an intruder's
range and altitude separation are both below the TA
A discrete output is sent to integrated avionics units threshold.
No. 1 and No. 2 from contact 51 of electrical connector
(3340A1P2) when an aural traffic advisory is
When the helicopter comes in close proximity of
generated by the TAS.
another aircraft, the actions that follow occur:
When the transponder (3427TR1) is transmitting, a
suppression pulse is sent at contact 48 of electrical • A “Traffic” voice alert is heard, followed by a
connector (3340A1P2). This is to prevent the TAS bearing (12 o’clock), altitude reference (high),
from displaying its own transponder transmissions as and distance (4 miles)
traffic information.
• A TRAFFIC annunciation appears that flashes
When the OPERATE softkey is selected from the for 5 seconds (then remains solid) at the top
traffic map page on the Multi-Function Display (MFD), right of the airspeed tape on the PFD
the TAS processor (3340A1) will switch to operate
mode. On the ground, Traffic Advisories (TAs) are • The PFD inset map appears at the lower right
inhibited. of the PFD and displays all of the traffic
information within range of the helicopter
In flight, the TAS processor (3440A1) interrogates
transponders from nearby aircraft to identify and track The TAS system also displays Proximity Advisories
intruders. The vertical separation of the host and (PAs) and non-threat advisories.

97-00-00
Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99 10 DEC 2012 Rev. 35 Page 215
BHT-407-MM-11

Two G1000H system messages are associated with 3. Disconnect the electrical connector
the GTS 800 TAS: (3440A1-P1T) (8) from the TAS processor (GTS 800)
(3340A1) (2).
• GTS CONFIG
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
• MANIFEST (3440A1-P2T) (6) from the TAS processor (GTS 800)
(3340A1) (2).

GTS CONFIG shows when the configuration of the

TAS processor (3340A1) and the right display unit 5. Disconnect the electrical connector
(3160DS2) have different configurations set. (3440A1-P3T) (4) from the TAS processor (GTS 800)
(3340A1) (2).
MANIFEST shows when the TAS processor (3340A1)
has the incorrect software installed. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector
(3440A1-P4T) (17) from the TAS processor (GTS 800)
(3340A1) (2).
97-292. TRAFFIC ADVISORY AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM — COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
7. Disconnect the electrical connector
To replace an electrical component, refer to the (3340A1-P1B) (7) from the TAS processor (GTS 800)
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance (3340A1) (2).
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM. 8. Disconnect the electrical connector
(3340A1P1) (9) from the TAS processor (GTS 800)
97-293. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM (3340A1) (2).
PROCESSOR (GTS 800) — REMOVAL
9. Disconnect the electrical connector
(3340A1P2) (12) from the TAS processor (GTS 800)
MATERIALS REQUIRED (3340A1) (2).

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

10. Disconnect the electrical connector
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE (3340A1P3) (10) from the TAS processor (GTS 800)
(3340A1) (2).
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
11. Rotate the thumbwheel (11) counterclockwise to
release the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2)
and remove it from the mounting tray (13).
WARNING

12. If the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2) is to

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS be replaced, remove the three attenuators (3 and 5)
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR from the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1).
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 13. If the mounting tray (13) needs to be removed,
remove the six screws (16), lockwashers (15), and
1. From the baggage bay, gain access to the aft washers (14) that secure the mounting tray, and
avionics equipment shelf (1, Figure 97-64). remove it from the helicopter.

2. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 14. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on
from the helicopter. the connectors.

97-00-00
Page 216 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

1. Aft avionics equipment shelf

2. TAS processor (GTS800)
3. Attenuator
4. Electrical connector
5. Attenuator
6. Electrical connector
7. Electrical connector
8. Electrical connector
SEE DETAIL A 9. Electrical connector
10. Electrical connector
11. Thumbwheel
12. Electrical connector
13. Mounting tray
14. Washer
15. Washer
16. Screw SEALANT (C-251)

2
3
5 7
4 6 8

9
1

13

12 10

14
11
15

16

DETAIL A
NOTE
1 After installation of the mounting tray (13), seal the mating edges of the electrical bonding areas with
sealant (C-251).
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0028

Figure 97-64. Traffic Advisory System Processor (GTS 800) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 217
BHT-407-MM-11

97-294. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM 97-296. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM

PROCESSOR (GTS 800) — CLEANING PROCESSOR (GTS 800) —
INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol
C-251 Sealant
C-516 Clean Cloth

WARNING
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
cloth (C-516).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
(C-385). EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

NOTE
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
soft bristle brush. The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
optional traffic advisory system kit
97-295. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM (BHT-407-II-28). If the Traffic Advisory
PROCESSOR (GTS 800) — INSPECTION System (TAS) processor (3440A1) is being
installed for the first time, this must be
accomplished in accordance with the
NOTE instructions provided in the BHT-407-II-28.
The following inspection criteria are Any subsequent installation may use the
primarily intended when the part or following procedure.
component has been removed from the
1. If previously removed, make sure the mating
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
surfaces of the mounting tray (13, Figure 97-64) and
requirements, applicable criteria may also
the aft avionics equipment shelf (1) are clean and
be used when the part or component is
show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
installed on the helicopter.
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.

1. Examine electrical connectors for corrosion, 2. If the mounting tray (13) was previously removed,
damage, and bent or burnt contacts. install the tray with the six screws (16). Tighten the
screws.
2. Examine the case for dents, cracks, wear,
mechanical damage, and corrosion damage. NOTE
If the mating surfaces of the components
3. Visually examine the attaching hardware for were clean and showed no signs of
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion corrosion at the time of installation, the
damage. Replace when necessary. following step is not required.

97-00-00
Page 218 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

3. If the mounting tray was previously removed,

NOTE
make sure the bond resistance between the mounting
tray (13) and the aft avionics equipment shelf (1) The following step is not required if the
meets Class R-II electrical bonding requirements same component as that removed is being
(BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). reinstalled and repair of the component did
not take place.
4. Apply sealant (C-251) to seal mating edges of the
electrical bonding areas between the mounting tray 17. If a new, repaired, or replacement traffic advisory
(13) and the aft avionics equipment shelf (1). system processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2) was
installed, complete the Optional Kits Software and
Configuration Loading Procedure (Chapter 95).
5. If the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2) was
replaced, install the three attenuators (3 and 5) to the
18. Do an operational check of the TAS (paragraph
TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1).
97-305).

6. Insert the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2)

19. In the baggage bay, install the top access panel.
in the mounting tray (13). Rotate the thumbwheel (11)
clockwise to secure the TAS processor (GTS 800)
(3340A1) in the mounting tray. 97-297. DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (GA 58) —
REMOVAL
7. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from
the electrical connectors.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
8. Connect the electrical connector (3340A1P1) (9)
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
to the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
9. Connect the electrical connector (3340A1P2) (12)
to the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2). C-136 Caps and/or Plugs

10. Connect the electrical connector (3340A1P3) (10)

to the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2). WARNING

11. Connect the electrical connector

(3340A1-P1T) (8) to the TAS processor (GTS 800) OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(3340A1) (2). WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
12. Connect the electrical connector EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
(3340A1-P2T) (6) to the TAS processor (GTS 800)
(3340A1) (2). 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter.
13. Connect the electrical connector
(3340A1-P3T) (4) to the TAS processor (GTS 800) 2. With a plastic scraper, carefully remove the
(3340A1) (2). sealant from the contour of the directional antenna
(GA 58) (3340E1) (2, Figure 97-65).
14. Connect the electrical connector (3340A1-P4T)
(17) to the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2). 3. Open the forward fairing assembly (4).

15. Connect the electrical connector (3340A1-P1B) 4. Disconnect antenna connector (3340E1P1) (9).
(7) to the TAS processor (GTS 800) (3340A1) (2).
5. Disconnect antenna connector (3340E1P2) (8).
16. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
helicopter. 6. Disconnect antenna connector (3340E1P3) (7).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 219
BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

1 3

2 1 2

4 3

5
NOTES
1 Install antenna with arrow
1. Screw pointing towards the front of the
2. Directional antenna (GA 58) (3340E1) 7
helicopter.
3. Packing 6
4. Forward fairing assembly 8 2 After installation, apply sealant
5. Mounting plate (C-251) to the mating edges of
6. Antenna connector (3340E1P4) the antenna and the forward
9
7. Antenna connector (3340E1P3) fairing assembly.
8. Antenna connector (3340E1P2) DETAIL A
9. Antenna connector (3340E1P1) 3 After installation, cover the head
of the screws (1) with sealant
SEALANT (C-251) (C-251).

NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0027_c01

Figure 97-65. Directional Antenna (GA 58) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 220 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

7. Disconnect antenna connector (3340E1P4) (6). 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
soft bristle brush.
8. Remove the sealant that covers the heads of the
screws (1). 97-299. DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (GA 58) —
INSPECTION
9. Remove the screws (1).

10. Gently remove the directional antenna (GA 58) NOTE

(3340E1) (2) and the packing (3) from the forward The following inspection criteria are
fairing assembly (4). primarily intended when the part or
component has been removed from the
11. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
the connectors. requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is
12. If required, remove the mounting plate (5) from installed on the helicopter.
the forward fairing assembly (4) as follows:
1. Examine antenna connectors for corrosion,
damage, and bent or burnt contacts.
CAUTION
2. Visually examine the exterior of the antenna for
miscellaneous damage.
MAKE SURE NOT TO DAMAGE THE
INNER SKIN OF THE FORWARD
F A IRI NG A S SE M B LY. DO NO T U SE 3. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
SHARP TOOLS. cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
damage. Replace when necessary.
a. Remove the bead of sealant from the contour
of the mounting plate (5). 4. Make sure the mating surface is clean and
acceptable for bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM).
b. Remove the mounting plate (5) from the
forward fairing assembly (4).
97-300. DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (GA 58) —
97-298. DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA (GA 58) — INSTALLATION
CLEANING

MATERIALS REQUIRED
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-251 Sealant
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth

WARNING
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
cloth (C-516).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
(C-385). EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 221
BHT-407-MM-11

7. Apply sealant (C-251) around the perimeter of the

NOTE
directional antenna (GA 58) (3340E1) (2) and the
The following installation procedure applies forward fairing assembly (4).
only to helicopters equipped with the
optional traffic advisory system kit
8. Cover the heads of the screws (1) with sealant
(BHT-407-II-28). If the directional antenna
(C-251).
(3440E1) is being installed for the first time,
this must be accomplished in accordance
with the instructions provided in the 9. If the mounting plate was previously removed,
BHT-407-II-28. Any subsequent installation apply a bead of sealant (C-251) to the mating edges of
may use the following procedure. the forward fairing assembly (4) and the mounting
plate (5).
1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the directional
antenna (GA 58) (3340E1) (2, Figure 97-65) and the 10. Connect antenna connector (3340E1P1) (9).
forward fairing assembly (4) are clean and show no
signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8, for surface preparation. 11. Connect antenna connector (3340E1P2) (8).

12. Connect antenna connector (3340E1P3) (7).

NOTE
The mounting plate (5) is held in position on 13. Connect antenna connector (3340E1P4) (6).
the forward fairing assembly (4) with a bead
of sealant.
14. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
2. If the mounting plate (5) was previously removed, helicopter.
make sure its mating surfaces with the forward fairing
assembly (4) are clean and show no signs of 15. Do an operational check of the traffic advisory
corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, system (paragraph 97-305).
Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
97-301. LOWER MONOPOLE ANTENNA (KA-61) —
3. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from REMOVAL
the antenna connectors.

4. Make sure the packing (3) is installed on the

MATERIALS REQUIRED
underside of the directional antenna (GA 58)
(3340E1) (2).
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

5. Secure the directional antenna (GA 58) NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

(3340E1) (2) to the forward fairing assembly (4) and
the mounting plate (5) with the screws (1). Tighten the C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
screws.

NOTE WARNING
If the mating surfaces of the components
were clean and showed no signs of
corrosion at the time of installation, the OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
following step is not required. WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
6. Make sure the bond resistance between the EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
mounting plate (5) and the directional antenna (GA 58)
(3340E1) (2) meets Class A-I electrical bonding 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). from the helicopter.

97-00-00
Page 222 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

2. Remove the aft panel at the rear of the baggage be used when the part or component is
bay area. installed on the helicopter.

3. Disconnect the antenna connector (3440E2P1) 1. Examine antenna connectors for corrosion,
(3, Figure 97-66). damage, and bent or burnt contacts.

4. With a plastic scraper, carefully remove the 2. Visually examine the exterior of the antenna for
sealant from the contour of the monopole antenna (5) miscellaneous damage.
and the washers (2).
3. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
5. Remove the self-locking nuts (1) and cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
washers (2). damage. Replace when necessary.

4. Make sure the mating surface is clean and

6. Gently remove the monopole antenna (5) and the
acceptable for electrical bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM).
shim (4) from the skin of the aft lower fairing (6).

97-304. LOWER MONOPOLE ANTENNA (KA-61) —

7. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on
INSTALLATION
the electrical connectors.

MATERIALS REQUIRED
97-302. LOWER MONOPOLE ANTENNA (KA-61) —
CLEANING
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

MATERIALS REQUIRED NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. C-251 Sealant

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol WARNING

C-516 Clean Cloth
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
cloth (C-516). NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol NOTE
(C-385).
The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a optional traffic advisory system kit
soft bristle brush. (BHT-407-II-28). If the antenna (3440E2) is
being installed for the first time, this must
97-303. LOWER MONOPOLE ANTENNA (KA-61) — be accomplished in accordance with the
INSPECTION instructions provided in the BHT-407-II-28.
Any subsequent installation may use the
NOTE following procedure.

The following inspection criteria are 1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the monopole
primarily intended when the part or antenna (3440E2) (5, Figure 97-66), channel (7), and
component has been removed from the skin of the aft lower fairing (6) are clean and show no
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
requirements, applicable criteria may also BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 223
BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

B
1
STA STA
2 192.00 197.21
2

3 FWD

6 4 7
BL
0.00
3 5

DETAIL A
0.5 IN. 1
6 (12.7 mm)
DIA
VIEW B

1. Self-locking nut NOTES

2. Washer
3. Antenna connector (3340E2P1) 1 Prepare the channel (7) surface for class A-1 electrical bonding
4. Shim requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
5. Monopole antenna (3340E2)
6. Aft lower fairing 2 After installation, seal the mating edges of the self-locking nuts
7. Channel (1), the washers (2) and the channel (7), with sealant (C-251).

3 After installation, apply sealant (C-251) to the mating edges of

SEALANT (C-251) the monopole antenna (3340E2) (5), shim (4), and the aft lower
fairing (6).
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0026_c01

Figure 97-66. Monopole Antenna (KA-61) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 224 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

2. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from 97-305. TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM —
the antenna connectors. OPERATIONAL CHECK

3. Install the shim (4) and the monopole antenna

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
(3440E2) (5) on the aft lower fairing (6).

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
4. Install the washers (2) and self-locking nuts (1) to
secure the shim (4) and the monopole antenna Aeroflex IFR 6000 or Transponder Test Set
(3440E2) (5). Tighten the nuts. Equivalent

Commercial Headset
NOTE
If the mating surfaces of the components NOTE
were clean and showed no signs of
Use an external power unit, if available, to
corrosion at the time of installation, the
prevent the battery from being drained of its
following step is not required. stored electrical power.

5. Make sure the bond resistance between the 1. Connect the headset in the pilot ICS jack.
channel (7) and the monopole antenna (3440E2) (5)
mounting studs meets Class A-I electrical bonding 2. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the
requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). external DC power unit to ON.

3. On the Primary Flight Display (PFD), turn the

6. Connect the antenna connector (3440E2P1) (3). VOL knob and set the volume to a comfortable level.

7. Apply sealant (C-251) around the perimeter of the 4. On the PFD, make sure the inset map is not
shim (4), monopole antenna (3440E2) (5), and the displayed. If it is, turn then press the INSET softkey,
skin of the lower aft fairing (6). and then the OFF softkey to remove the inset map
from the PFD.

8. Seal the mating edges of the self-locking nuts (1),

washers (2), and channel (7) with sealant (C-251). NOTE
For additional information to navigate to the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) GPS
9. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
STATUS page, refer to MFD Page Group
helicopter. Navigation within Chapter 95.

5. On the Multi-Function Display (MFD), turn the

10. Refer to the Optional Kits Software and
large FMS knob until the AUX tab is shown, then turn
Configuration Loading Procedure (Chapter 95), and
the small FMS knob until GPS STATUS is selected.
verify that the Bell — GTS 800 TAS option,
CONFIGURATION - BOTTOM ANTENNA fields for
6. ON the GPS STATUS page, make sure the GPS
SET and ACTIVE are MONOPOLE. position is valid.

11. Do an operational check of the traffic advisory NOTE

system (paragraph 97-305).
For additional information to navigate to the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) TRAFFIC
12. Install the aft panel at the rear of the baggage bay page, refer to MFD Page Group Navigation
area. within Chapter 95.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 225
BHT-407-MM-11

7. On the MFD, turn the large FMS knob until altitude of -1000 feet (-304.8 m), steady
TRAFFIC is highlighted, then press the FMS button to altitude, relative bearing of 33.75°, and a
display the traffic map page. range of 3.625 NM (6.7 km).

8. On the MFD, press the ALT MODE softkey. • On the traffic map page, a non-threat advisory
is shown (white unfilled diamond), with a
9. On the MFD, select the UNREST softkey. relative altitude of 1000 feet (304.8 m), steady
altitude (no arrow), relative bearing of 326.25°,
and a range of 3.625 NM (6.7 km).
10. On the MFD, turn the RANGE knob until the
traffic map is set to the 2/6 NM range.
• When the self-test completes, the aural
advisory “TAS system test passed” is heard.
RESULT:

• On the traffic map page, the STANDBY • When the test completes, on the traffic map
softkey is selected and grayed out. page, at the upper left corner, the operating
mode is STANDBY.
• On the traffic map page, at the upper left
corner, the operating mode is STANDBY and NOTE
the altitude mode is UNRESTRICTED.
Refer to the IFR 6000 Operation manual for
• On the traffic map page, no intruder symbols additional information on operating the IFR
are shown. 6000 test equipment.

12. Mount the directional antenna on the IFR 6000

NOTE test set.
When the self-test ends, the TAS will return
to standby mode. Redo the self-test as 13. On the IFR 6000 test set, press the SETUP key
needed to make sure all the results that until the SETUP-TCAS screen is shown.
follow are verified.
14. Set the parameters as follows, using the NEXT
11. On the traffic map page, press the TEST softkey.
PARAMETER softkey:

RESULT:
• RF PORT: ANTENNA
• On the PFD, the traffic inset map is shown.
• ANT RANGE: Enter the horizontal distance in
• On the PFD, the yellow TRAFFIC alert is feet between the directional antenna of the
shown in the upper left corner. helicopter and the test set

• On the traffic map page, the TEST softkey is • ANT HEIGHT: Enter the height in feet
shown against a gray background. between the directional antenna of the
helicopter and the test set
• On the traffic map page, the operating mode
shows TEST. • UUT ADDRESS: MANUAL

• On the traffic map page, a traffic advisory is

NOTE
shown (yellow filled circle), with a relative
altitude of -200 feet (-61.0 m), climbing, with a The mode S address can be found on the
relative bearing of 270°, and a range of 2 NM TRANSPONDER CONFIGURATION page
(3.7 km). (Figure 97-55).

• On the traffic map page, a proximity advisory • MANUAL AA: Enter the mode S address of
is shown (white filled diamond), with a relative the helicopter transponder

97-00-00
Page 226 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

• ANT CABLE LOSS: Enter the cable loss as

NOTE
shown on the label of the test set cable
The procedure that follows sets the TAS
• ANT GAIN (dBi): Set to the 1.03 and 1.09 Ghz processor in a simulated flight with the
antenna gain identified on the supplied test helicopter airborne at 50,000 feet
set directional antenna (15,200 m) with a magnetic heading of 0°
and is needed to do the intruder ramp test.
• SQUITTERS: ON
19. On the MFD, press the softkey sequence (the first
• ALT REPORTING: ON softkey is at the left of the MFD) 3, 4, 4, 3.

• DISPLAYED ALT: RELATIVE 20. Press the GND TEST softkey.

• TEST SET AA: A92493 (or any address 21. Press the OPERATE softkey.
different from the helicopter under test)
22. On the test set, press the RUN TEST softkey.
15. On the test set, press the TCAS mode button to
return to the TCAS Test Screen.
RESULT:

16. Set the parameters as follows, using the NEXT • On the traffic map page, a single intruder is
PARAMETER softkey: acquired at approximately 10 NM (18.5 km) at
0 ±30° relative bearing and 500 feet (152.4 m)
• SCENARIO: CUSTOM above the helicopter altitude.

• TCAS TYPE: TCAS 1 • The intruder heading trend (vector line) is

directed towards the helicopter.
• % REPLY: 100
• The intruder changes from other traffic (open
• INTRUDER TYPE: ATCRBS diamond) to a proximity advisory (filled white
diamond) at 6 NM (11.1 km).
• RANGE START: 10 NM
• The intruder changes from proximity advisory
• RANGE STOP: 0.35 NM (filled white diamond) to a traffic advisory
(filled yellow circle) at 3 NM (5.6 km).
• RANGE RATE: 360KTS
• When the intruder changes to a traffic
• ALT START: +50500 FT advisory, the yellow TRAFFIC flag is shown in
the upper left of the PFD.
• ALT RATE: 0 FPM
• When the intruder changes to a traffic
• CONVERGE: OFF advisory, the aural alert “Traffic, 12 o’clock,
high, 3 miles” is heard in the pilot headset.
• ALT DETECT: OFF
23. On the collective stick, press the T/A MUTE
• XPDR: ON switch.

17. Position the test set less than 50 feet away from RESULT:
the directional antenna of the helicopter, in a straight
line, directly in front of the helicopter. • The aural alert “Traffic, 12 o’clock, high, 3
miles” is muted in the pilot headset.
18. On the MFD, rotate the RANGE knob to select a
6 to 12 NM (11.1 to 22.2 km). 24. On the test set, press the STOP TEST softkey.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 227
BHT-407-MM-11

25. On the MFD, rotate the RANGE knob to set the 31. On the test set, press the STOP TEST softkey.
map range to 2-6 NM.
32. Position the test set less than 50 feet away from
26. On the test set, press the RUN TEST softkey. the directional antenna of the helicopter, in a straight
line, behind the helicopter.
RESULT:
33. On the test set, press the RUN TEST softkey.
• On the traffic map page, the intruder takes
between 35 to 45 seconds to travel from the
6 NM (11.1 km) range ring, to the 2 NM (3.7 RESULT:
km) range ring.
• On the traffic map page, a single intruder is
27. On the test set, press the STOP TEST softkey. acquired at approximately 10 NM (18.5 km) at
180 ±30° relative bearing and 500 feet
28. Position the test set less than 50 feet away from (152.4 m) above the helicopter altitude.
the directional antenna of the helicopter, in a straight
line, to the right of the helicopter. • The intruder heading trend (vector line) is
directed towards the helicopter.
29. On the test set, press the RUN TEST softkey.
• The intruder changes from other traffic (open
RESULT: diamond) to a proximity advisory (filled white
diamond) at 6 NM (11.1 km).
• On the traffic map page, a single intruder is
acquired at approximately 10 NM (18.5 km) at
• The intruder changes from proximity advisory
90 ±30° relative bearing and 500 feet
(filled white diamond) to a traffic advisory
(152.4 m) above the helicopter altitude.
(filled yellow circle) at 3 NM (5.6 km).
• The intruder heading trend (vector line) is
directed towards the helicopter. • When the intruder changes to a traffic
advisory, the yellow TRAFFIC flag is shown in
• The intruder changes from other traffic (open the upper left of the PFD.
diamond) to a proximity advisory (filled white
diamond) at 6 NM (11.1 km). • When the intruder changes to a traffic
advisory, the aural alert “Traffic, 6 o’clock,
• The intruder changes from proximity advisory high, 3 miles” is heard in the pilot headset.
(filled white diamond) to a traffic advisory
(filled yellow circle) at 3 NM (5.6 km). 34. On the collective stick, press the T/A MUTE
switch.
• When the intruder changes to a traffic
advisory, the yellow TRAFFIC flag is shown in
the upper left of the PFD. RESULT:

• When the intruder changes to a traffic • The aural alert “Traffic, 6 o’clock, high, 3
advisory, the aural alert “Traffic, 3 o’clock, miles” is muted in the pilot headset.
high, 3 miles” is heard in the pilot headset.
35. On the test set, press the STOP TEST softkey.
30. On the collective stick, press the T/A MUTE
switch.
36. Position the test set less than 50 feet away from
the directional antenna of the helicopter, in a straight
RESULT:
line, to the left of the helicopter.
• The aural alert “Traffic, 3 o’clock, high, 3
miles” is muted in the pilot headset. 37. On the test set, press the RUN TEST softkey.

97-00-00
Page 228 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: • When the intruder changes to a traffic

advisory, the aural alert “Traffic, 9 o’clock,
high, 3 miles” is heard in the pilot headset.
• On the traffic map page, a single intruder is
acquired at approximately 10 NM (18.5 km) at 38. On the collective stick, press the T/A MUTE
270 ±30° relative bearing and 500 feet switch.
(152.4 m) above the helicopter altitude.
RESULT:
• The intruder heading trend (vector line) is
directed towards the helicopter. • The aural alert “Traffic, 9 o’clock, high, 3
miles” is muted in the pilot headset.

• The intruder changes from other traffic (open 39. On the test set, press the STOP TEST softkey.
diamond) to a proximity advisory (filled white
diamond) at 6 NM (11.1 km). 40. On the MFD, press the STANDBY softkey.

• The intruder changes from proximity advisory 41. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
the external DC power unit to OFF.
(filled white diamond) to a traffic advisory
(filled yellow circle) at 3 NM (5.6 km).
42. Remove the headset from the helicopter.

• When the intruder changes to a traffic 43. Return the helicopter to the standard
advisory, the yellow TRAFFIC flag is shown in configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
the upper left of the PFD. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 229/230
 BHT-407-MM-11

RADAR ALTIMETER (RA-4500) SYSTEM (OPTIONAL KIT)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-306. RADAR ALTIMETER SYSTEM 97-307. RADAR ALTIMETER TRANSCEIVER

(RA-4500)

NOTE The radar altimeter transceiver (RA-4500) (3410TR1)

The radar altimeter (RA-4500) system is is installed in the aft avionics bay on the left side. The
part of the optional radar altimeter kit radar altimeter transceiver (3410TR1) provides the
(BHT-407-II-29). crew with accurate Above Ground Level (AGL) altitude
over a range of -20 to 2500 feet.
The function of the optional Radar Altimeter
(RAD ALT) kit is to provide the crew with accurate The radar altimeter transceiver (3410TR1) determines
Above Ground Level (AGL) altitude information. The the altitude Above Ground Level (AGL) by transmitting
system has the capability of alerting the crew when a a signal to the ground then processing the reflected
signal.
predetermined altitude (decision height) is reached.

The transmitter output frequency is 4.300 ±10 GHz.

The RAD ALT System includes the following
components:
The accuracy of the radar altimeter transceiver
(3410TR1) is ±3 feet (0.91 m) from 0 to 100 feet (0 to
• Radar altimeter (RA-4500) transceiver 30.5 m), ±3% at from 100 to 500 feet (30.5 to 152.4m),
(3410TR1) and ±5% at 500 (152.4m) and above.

• Radar altimeter antennas (3410E2 and 97-308. RADAR ALTIMETER ANTENNAS

3410E3)
The radar altimeter antennas (3410E2 and 3410E3)
• Radio altimeter indicator on the Primary Flight are flush mounted antennas and they are installed on
Display (PFD) the aft fuselage. The polarization is linear. They are
terminated on one end with a threaded
Neill-Concelman (TNC) connector. The Voltage
Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component
Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) is 2.0:1.
reference designator index table and location figure
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the
components. The right antenna (3410E2) is used to transmit; the left
antenna (3410E3) is used to receive.

To help clarify system operation, refer to the simplified

schematic (Figure 97-67) while reading information 97-309. RADAR ALTIMETER DISPLAY ON
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)
about the RAD ALT System.

The system provides an output of Above Ground Level

NOTE (AGL) altitude via an ARINC 429 low-speed serial
databus to the Primary Flight Display (PFD) as a
If you install Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT)
four-digit green colored readout of aircraft radar
optional equipment for the first time, do this altitude from -20 to 2500 feet (-6.1 to 762 m). The PFD
in accordance with the instructions display resolution is in 1-foot increments from -20 to
provided in the applicable Installation 50 feet (-6.1 to 15.2 m), in 5-foot increments between
Instruction (II). Follow the instructions 50 and 200 feet (15.2 to 61.0 m), in 10-foot increments
provided in this chapter for any subsequent between 200 and 1500 feet (61.0 to 457.2 m), and in
installation. 50-foot increments above 1500 feet (457.2 m).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 231
BHT-407-MM-11

RADAR ALTIMETER
LCTN - AFT AVIONICS CMPT
3410TR1
RAD ALT 3410TR1P1 (RA 4500)
3410CB1

28 VDC 5A 3 +28 VDC PWR

BUS 4 +28 VDC PWR
5 RESERVED
6 RESERVED
7 RESERVED

1 AIRCRAFT GROUND
2 AIRCRAFT GROUND
9 RESERVED
10 429 SPEED SELECT
15 RESERVED
INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 1 16 RESERVED
3140A1 17 RESERVED
(GIA 63H) 3140A1P3 18 NAV-BIAS
19 NAV-COMM
HI 29 11 ARINC 429 TRANSMIT A
ARINC 429 RAD ALT
LO 31 12 ARINC 429 TRANSMIT B

20 NAV-COMM
21 NAV-TXA
22 NAV-TXB

WEIGHT ON GEAR SWITCH

LCTN -FWD CROSS TUBE
8S5

GROUND 2 8 WEIGHT ON GEAR

1
3
5
4 13 NAV-TX RS-232C
6
AIR 1
14 NAV-RX RS-232C

3410TR1P2
TX
XMIT ANTENNA

3410TR1P3
RX
RECV ANTENNA

3410E2P1 3410E3P1

RAD ALT XMTR ANT RH RAD ALT RCVR ANT LH

LCTN - LOWER FUSELAGE LCTN - LOWER FUSELAGE
3410E2 3410E3

NOTE

1 WIRE CONNECTED FOR RADAR

ALTITUDE ZERO CALIBRATION. 407-476-602-A 407-476-614 407gc_MM_97_0004

Figure 97-67. Radar Altimeter (RA-4500) — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 232 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

A digital readout of the Radar Altitude (RA) is shown

on the PFD to the right of the heading indicator WARNING
(Figure 97-68). If the radar altimeter is selected as the
Minimum Decent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH)
source, the indication will change from green to amber
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
when the MDA/DH is reached. If the radar altimeter
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
detects a failure or the radar altitude indication is
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
invalid, a RA FAIL flag appears in the radar altitude
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
indicator.
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
97-310. RADAR ALTIMETER SYSTEM — from the helicopter.
OPERATION
2. From the baggage bay, gain access to the aft
Electrical power from the 28 VDC bus feeds the RAD avionics equipment shelf (6, Figure 97-69).
ALT circuit breaker (3410CB1) and is then directed to
contacts 3 and 4 of the electrical connector 3. Disconnect the electrical connector
(3410TR1P1) of the radar altimeter transceiver (3410TR1P1) (2).
(3410TR1). The radar altimeter transceiver (3410TR1)
distributes the power throughout the RAD ALT system. 4. Disconnect the antenna electrical connectors
(3410TR1P2 and 3410TR1P3) (7 and 8).
The radar altimeter transceiver (3410TR1) transmits a
4.300 GHz signal from the transmit antenna (3140E2), 5. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on all
which bounces back from the ground and is received the electrical connectors.
by the receive antenna (3140E3). The radar altimeter
transceiver then compares the send and receive times 6. Remove the screws (3), lockwashers (4), and
and computes the radar altitude. washers (5) that secure the radar altimeter transceiver
(3410TR1) (1).
The radar altitude is sent in a digital format on the
ARINC 429 bus to the integrated avionics unit No. 1. 7. Remove the radar altimeter transceiver
From there, the radar altitude is sent to the Primary (3410TR1) (1) from the aft avionics equipment
Flight Display (PFD). shelf (6).

97-311. RADAR ALTIMETER SYSTEM — 97-313. RADAR ALTIMETER TRANSCEIVER

COMPONENT REPLACEMENT (RA-4500) — CLEANING

To replace an electrical component, refer to the

Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance MATERIALS REQUIRED
Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
procedures, refer to BHT-ELEC-SPM. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
97-312. RADAR ALTIMETER TRANSCEIVER
(RA-4500) — REMOVAL C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth

MATERIALS REQUIRED
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. cloth (C-516).

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a

clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs
(C-385).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 233
BHT-407-MM-11

RADAR ALTITUDE
INDICATOR

RADAR ALTITUDE
INVALID

RADAR ALTITUDE
BELOW MDA/DH

VIEW A
PFD

407gc_MM_97_0012

Figure 97-68. Radar Altimeter — Indications and Fail Flag

97-00-00
Page 234 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

2
1

SEE DETAIL A

8
3
1
4

1. Radar altimeter transceiver (3410TR1)

2. Electrical connector (3410TR1P1)
3. Screw
4. Lockwasher
5. Washer
6. Aft avionics equipment shelf
7. Antenna connector (3410TR1P3)
8. Antenna connector (3410TR1P2)

SEALANT (C-251)

NOTE
1 After installation of the radar altimeter transceiver (3140TR1) (1), seal the mating edges of the
electrical bonding areas with sealant (C-251).
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0015

Figure 97-69. Radar Altimeter Transceiver (RA-4500) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 235
BHT-407-MM-11

3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a

NOTE
soft bristle brush.
The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
97-314. RADAR ALTIMETER TRANSCEIVER optional radar altimeter kit (BHT-407-II-29).
(RA-4500) — INSPECTION If the optional RAD ALT transceiver
(RA-4500) (3410TR1) is being installed for
the fist time, this must be accomplished in
NOTE accordance with the instructions provided
The following inspection criteria are in the BHT-407-II-29. Any subsequent
primarily intended when the part or installation may use the following
component has been removed from the procedure.
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also 1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the radar
be used when the part or component is altimeter transceiver (3410TR1) (1, Figure 97-69) and
installed on the helicopter. the aft avionics equipment shelf (6) are clean and
show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
1. Examine electrical and antenna connectors for
corrosion damage or faulty contacts.
2. Set the radar altimeter transceiver (3410TR1) (1)
on the aft avionics equipment shelf (6).
2. Examine the case for dents.
3. Install the screws (3), lockwashers (4), and
3. Visually examine the attaching hardware for washers (5) that secure the radar altimeter transceiver
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion (3410TR1) (1). Tighten the screws.
damage. Replace when necessary.
NOTE
4. Make sure the surface is clean and prepared for If the mating surfaces of the components
bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). were clean and showed no signs of
corrosion at the time of installation, the
following step is not required.
97-315. RADAR ALTIMETER TRANSCEIVER
(RA-4500) — INSTALLATION
4. Make sure the bond resistance between the radar
altimeter transceiver (3410TR1) (1) and the aft
avionics equipment shelf (6) meets Class R-II
MATERIALS REQUIRED electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8).
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
5. Apply sealant (C-251) to cover the mating edges
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE of the electrically bonded areas of the radar altimeter
transceiver (3410TR1) (1) and the aft avionics
C-251 Sealant
equipment shelf (6).

6. Remove protective caps and/or plugs on all the

WARNING electrical connectors.

7. Connect the electrical connector

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (3410TR1P1) (2).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 8. Connect the antenna connectors (3410TR1P2
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). and 3410TR1P3) (7 and 8).

97-00-00
Page 236 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

9. If the radar altimeter transceiver (3410TR1) (1)

NOTE
was replaced, do the radar altitude zero calibration of
the radar altimeter transceiver (paragraph 97-320). The following procedure is for the left radar
altimeter antenna (3410E3). The procedure
is the same for the right radar altimeter
10. In the baggage bay, install the top access panel. antenna (3410E2), except where indicated.

1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power

11. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
from the helicopter.
helicopter.
2. Use a plastic scraper to remove any trace of
sealant around the base of the antenna.
NOTE
The following step is not required if the 3. Remove the screws (3, Figure 97-70).
same component as that removed is being
reinstalled and repair of the component did 4. Disconnect the antenna connector (3410E3P1)
not take place. (6) (or antenna connector (3401E2P1)).

12. If a new, repaired, or replacement radar altimeter 5. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on all
transceiver (3410TR1) (1) was installed, complete the the electrical connectors.
Optional Kits Software and Configuration Loading
Procedure (Chapter 95). 6. Remove the radar altimeter receive antenna
(3140E3) (2) (or radar altimeter transmit antenna
13. Do an operational check of the radar altimeter (3410E2) (1)).
system (paragraph 97-321).
97-317. RADAR ALTIMETER ANTENNA —
CLEANING
97-316. RADAR ALTIMETER ANTENNA —
REMOVAL
MATERIALS REQUIRED

MATERIALS REQUIRED Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-156 Caps and/or Plugs C-516 Clean Cloth

1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean

cloth (C-516).
WARNING
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (C-385).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). soft bristle brush.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 237
BHT-407-MM-11

4 3

SEE DETAIL A

1 4 2

2 3

1 1 4

DETAIL A

1. Radar altimeter transmit antenna (3410E2)

NOTES
2. Radar altimeter receive antenna (3410E3) 1 Align arrows of both antennas (1 and 2) to the left
3. Screw side of the helicopter.
4. Mounting plate assembly
5. Aft lower fairing assembly 2 Wet install the screws (3) with sealant (C-251).
6. Antenna connector (3410E3P1)
3 Apply sealant (C-251) to the mating surfaces of the
plate assembly (4) and aft lower fairing assembly (5).
SEALANT (C-251)
4 After installation, seal mating edges of antennas
25 IN-LBS
(1 and 2) and aft lower fairing assembly (5) with
(2.82 Nm)
sealant (C-251).

NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0010_c01

Figure 97-70. RAD ALT Antennas (S67-2002) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 238 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-318. RADAR ALTIMETER ANTENNA —

NOTE
INSPECTION
The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
NOTE optional radar altimeter kit (BHT-407-II-29).
The following inspection criteria are If the optional radar altimeter antennas
primarily intended when the part or (3410E2 and 3410E3) are being installed
component has been removed from the for the fist time, this must be accomplished
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection in accordance with the instructions
requirements, applicable criteria may also provided in the BHT-407-II-29. Any
be used when the part or component is subsequent installation may use the
installed on the helicopter. following procedure.

1. Examine the radar altimeter receive antenna NOTE

(3410E3) (2, Figure 97-70) for damage. The following procedure is for the left radar
altimeter antenna (3410E3). The procedure
2. Examine the condition of the antenna connector is the same for the right radar altimeter
(3410E3P1) (6). antenna (3410E2), except where indicated.

1. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from all the

3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface electrical connectors.
and the attaching hardware.
2. Make sure the mating surfaces of the radar
4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for altimeter antenna (1 or 2, Figure 97-70) and the fairing
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion assembly (5) are clean and show no signs of
damage. Replace when necessary. corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
5. Make sure the mounting surfaces are clean and
acceptable for electrical bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM, 3. Connect the antenna connector (3410E3P1) (6)
Chapter 8). to the radar altimeter receive antenna (3410E3) (2).

97-319. RADAR ALTIMETER ANTENNA — NOTE

INSTALLATION If the replacement antenna includes screws
and a gasket, discard them.

MATERIALS REQUIRED 4. Position the radar altimeter receiver antenna

(3410E3) (2) on the mounting surface with the arrow
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. pointing toward the left side of the helicopter.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 5. Wet install screws (3) with sealant (C-251) and
torque T to 25 inch-pounds (2.8 Nm) to secure the
C-251 Sealant radar altimeter receive antenna (3410E3) (2) in place.

NOTE
WARNING If the mating surfaces of the components
were clean and showed no signs of
corrosion at the time of installation, the
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS following step is not required.
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 6. Make sure the bond resistance between the
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). antenna (1 or 2) and the aft lower fairing assembly (5)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 239
BHT-407-MM-11

meets Class A-II electrical bonding requirements 6. After the self-tests, make sure the Radar Altitude
(BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). (RA) shows a valid reading (No RA FAIL flag).

7. Apply a bead of sealant (C-251) around the edge 7. Let the radar altimeter transceiver warm up for at
of the base of the radar altimeter antenna (1 or 2). least 5 minutes.

8. Connect the battery or external DC power to the 8. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
helicopter. the external DC power unit to OFF.

9. Do an operational check of the radar altimeter 9. Connect the wire from contact 13 of the electrical
system (paragraph 97-321). connector (3140TR1P1) to contact 1 of the splice
(3140SP1).

97-320. RADAR ALTIMETER SYSTEM — RADAR

ALTITUDE ZERO CALIBRATION 10. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the
external DC power unit to ON for approximately 30
seconds.
1. Move the helicopter to an area clear of trees,
buildings, or large objects.
11. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
the external DC power unit to OFF.

WARNING
12. Disconnect the wire from contact 13 of the
electrical connector (3140TR1P1) from contact 1 of
splice (3140SP1).
CLEAR ALL PERSONNEL WHEN RADAR
WAVES ARE TRANSMITTED. RADAR
WAVES CAN CAUSE BLINDNESS AND 13. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the
STERILITY. external DC power unit to ON.

2. Clear all personnel from the helicopter. 14. The radar altimeter transceiver will run through its
self-tests for approximately 20 seconds and will
display 40 ±3 feet (12.2 ±0.9 m).
NOTE
Use an external power unit, if available, to 15. After the self-test is completed, make sure the RA
prevent the battery from being drained of its displays 0 feet (0 m).
stored electrical power.

16. If the RA does not display 0 feet, make sure there

3. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the
were no obstacles close to the helicopter and redo
external DC power unit to ON.
step 8 through step 15.

4. Temporarily actuate the weight on gear switch to

17. Remove the temporary shim to position the
simulate that the helicopter is in flight. This may be
weight on gear switch to its normal position. The WOG
accomplished by installing a tapered shim to move the
CAS message should display.
weight on gear switch plunger upward. Move the
plunger upward until an audible click is heard and the
WOG CAS message is extinguished. 18. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
the external DC power unit to OFF.
5. The radar altimeter transceiver will run through its
self-tests for approximately 20 seconds and will 19. Cap and stow the wire from contact 13 of
display 40 ±3 feet (12.2 ±0.9 m). electrical connector (3140TR1P1) (BHT-ELEC-SPM).

97-00-00
Page 240 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

CORRECTIVE ACTION:
97-321. RADAR ALTIMETER SYSTEM —
OPERATIONAL CHECK
• If the RA does not display 0 feet (0 m), do the
Radar Altimeter System — Radar Altitude
NOTE Zero Calibration (paragraph 97-320).

Refer to the avionics system radar altimeter • If the RA does not display 0 feet (0 m), do the
kit (S/N 54300 and subsequent) wiring rigging of the weight on gear switch
diagram (Chapter 98), as applicable, for (Chapter 96).
additional information on troubleshooting
the system. • If the RA FAIL flag is shown, measure for 28
VDC at contacts 3 and 4 of electrical
NOTE connector (3410TR1P1). If 28 VDC is not
measured, repair/replace the wires or
Use an external power unit, if available, to components between contacts 3 and 4 of
prevent the battery from being drained of its electrical connector (3410TR1P1) and the 28
stored electrical power. VDC BUS. If 28 VDC is measured at contacts
3 and 4 of electrical connector (3410TR1P1),
1. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the measure for continuity to ground at contacts 1
external DC power unit to ON. and 2 of electrical connector (3410TR1P1). If
continuity is not measured, repair/replace the
wires between contacts 1 and 2 of electrical
NOTE connector (3410TR1P1) and ground point
Allow a delay of approximately 5 minutes WTD453. If continuity is measured at contacts
before starting the operational check to 1 and 2 of electrical connector (3410TR1P1),
allow the radar altimeter transceiver to verify that the connectors (3410TR1P3,
warm up. 3410E3P1 3410TR1P2, and 3410E2P1) are
connected to the radar altimeter transceiver
2. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set (3140TR1) and antennas (3410E2 and
the external DC power unit to OFF for 10 seconds. 3410E3). Verify that there is no damage to the
coaxial antenna cables. If after the previous
checks are done the RA FAIL flag is still
3. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the displayed, replace the radar altimeter
external DC power unit to ON. transceiver (3140TR1).

RESULT: 4. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set

the external DC power unit to OFF.
• On the Primary Flight Display, (PFD), the
Radar Altitude (RA) shows 40 ±3 feet (12.2 5. Return the helicopter to the standard
±0.9 m) for approximately 20 seconds, and configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
then shows a RA of 0 feet (0 m). Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 241/242
 BHT-407-MM-11

XM WEATHER AND RADIO SATELLITE DATALINK RECEIVER (GDL 69AH)

(OPTIONAL KIT) (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-322. XM WEATHER AND RADIO

NOTE
SATELLITE SYSTEM
If you install Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT)
optional equipment for the first time, do this
NOTE in accordance with the instructions
provided in the applicable Installation
The XM weather and radio satellite system
Instruction (II). Follow the instructions
is part of the optional XM weather and radio
provided in this chapter for any subsequent
satellite kit (BHT-407-II-36).
installation.
The optional XM weather and radio satellite system
97-323. XM WEATHER AND RADIO SATELLITE
receives satellite weather services and satellite radio
SYSTEM — OPERATION
through the GDL 69AH datalink satellite receiver.

The weather data and entertainment programming NOTE

operate in the S-band frequency range to give
For additional information on the use and
continuous reception at any altitude.
operation of the XM weather and radio
satellite system, refer to the G1000H
The received graphical weather information and Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide –
associated text is displayed on the Multi-Function Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).
Display (MFD) (3160DS1) and on the inset map of the
Primary Flight Display (PFD) (3160DS2). Electrical power from the 28 VDC BUS feeds the
circuit breaker (2320CB1) which supplies the 28 VDC
The XM weather/audio system includes the to the XM receiver (2320A1) electrical connector
components that follow: (2320A1P1), pin 35, as shown in Figure 97-71.

• XM receiver (GDL 69AH) (2320A1) The XM receiver receives satellite weather and digital
audio signals through the coax connector (2320A1P2)
• GPS/WAAS/XM antenna (GA37) (3450E8) from the GPS/WAAS/XM antenna (3450E8).

The XM receiver (2320A1) is installed in a rack behind The XM receiver sends the weather data and volume
the PFD (3160DS2). control for the audio to the MFD via a high-speed data
bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
The GPS/WAAS/XM antenna (3450E8) is installed on
the forward fairing if the Traffic Advisory System (TAS) Audio from the XM receiver is sent to the audio panel
system is not installed. If the traffic advisory system kit (2301A1) on the pedestal where it is amplified and fed
(BHT-407-II-28) is installed, the antenna is installed on to the headset jacks in the passenger compartment.
a support assembly on the forward side of the forward
fairing assembly. 97-324. XM RECEIVER (GDL 69AH) — REMOVAL

Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component

reference designator index table and location figure MATERIALS REQUIRED
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the
components. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

To help clarify system operation, refer to the simplified NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

schematic (Figure 97-71) while reading information
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
about the XM weather and radio satellite system.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 243
BHT-407-MM-11

XM RAD
2320CB1

28 VDC 3A
BUS

XM WEATHER/AUDIO RECEIVER
2320A1
(GDL 69AH) 2320A1P1

28 VDC POWER IN 35

MFD (L-DU)
3160DS1

3160DS1P1 (GDU 1040H)

ETHERNET IN 1 A 23 10 ETHERNET OUT 3 A

ETHERNET IN 1 B 22 11 ETHERNET OUT 3 B
ETHERNET OUT 1 A 25 12 ETHERNET IN 3 A
ETHERNET OUT 1 B 24 13 ETHERNET IN 3 B

POWER GROUND 78
AUDIO PANEL
2301A1

2301A1P2 (GMA 350H)

AUDIO OUT 1 LT 19 23 MUSIC 1 IN LT

AUDIO OUT 1 RT 18 24 MUSIC 1 IN RT

AUDIO OUT 1 LO 17 25 MUSIC 1 LO

2320A1P2 2320P1 2320P2 3450E8P2

DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA XM/WAAS GPS
INTEGRATED NO. 1 ANTENNA
2320CP1 3450E8
AVIONICS
COUPLER SYSTEM

407gc_MM_97_0005

Figure 97-71. XM Weather and Radio Satellite System — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 244 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

MATERIALS REQUIRED
WARNING
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR C-516 Clean Cloth
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
cloth (C-516).
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter.
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
2. If installed, remove the Primary Flight Display clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol
(PFD) (Chapter 95). (C-385).

3. At the forward lower area of the rack. loosen the 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
screw (8, Figure 97-72) to release the wedge on the soft bristle brush.
bottom of the XM receiver (GDL 69AH) (2320A1) (1)
from the wedge in the rack (3). 97-326. XM RECEIVER (GDL 69AH) —
INSPECTION
4. Pull the ring (9) on the front of the XM receiver
(GDL 69AH) (2320A1) (1) and lift the receiver
0.75 inch (19.05 mm) to remove the receiver from the NOTE
rack (3). The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or
5. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the component has been removed from the
electrical connectors. helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
6. If necessary, remove the rack (3) as follows: be used when the part or component is
installed on the helicopter.
a. Remove the sealant from the base of the
1. Visually examine the XM receiver (GDL 69AH)
rack (3).
(2320A1) (1, Figure 97-72) for cracks, wear,
mechanical damage, and corrosion damage. Replace
b. Pull on the spring clips (5) to unlock the when necessary.
backplate (4) from the rack (3).

c. Remove the screws (2) from the rack (3). 2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion
damage. Replace when necessary.
d. Remove the rack (3) from the supports (6
and 7).
97-327. XM RECEIVER (GDL 69AH) —
97-325. XM RECEIVER (GDL 69AH) — CLEANING INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol C-251 Sealant

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 245
BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B

DETAIL A 4

2
WEDGE
1. XM receiver
(GDL 69AH) (2320A1)
2. Screw 5
3. Rack
4. Backplate
5. Spring clip
6. Support
1
7. Support
9
8. Screw
9. Ring
1

SEALANT (C-251) FOOT 6

13 TO 17 IN-LBS WEDGE 7
(1.5 TO 1.9 Nm) 8

NOTE DETAIL B
1 After installation of the rack (3), apply sealant (C-251) to seal the mating edges of the electrical bonding area.

NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0008

Figure 97-72. XM Weather/Audio Receiver — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 246 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

2. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from

WARNING the electrical connectors.

3. Put the XM receiver (GDL 69AH) (2320A1) (1) in

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS the rack (3). Lift the receiver 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) to
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR position the foot on the receiver forward of the wedge
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC on the rack.
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

NOTE CAUTION
The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the MAKE SURE THE THREADS OF THE
optional XM satellite weather and radio kit SCREW (8) PROPERLY ENGAGE THE
(BHT-407-II-36). If the optional XM receiver MATING THREADS OF THE RACK (3).
(GDL 69AH) (2320A1) is being installed for CONFIRM PROPER ALIGNMENT
the fist time, this must be accomplished in BETWEEN THE SCREW AND THE
accordance with the instructions provided THREADED HOLE OF THE RACK
in the BHT-407-II-36. Any subsequent DURING INSTALLATION. DO NOT USE
installation may use the following FORCE WHILE INSTALLING THE
procedure. SCREW OR CROSS THREADING AND
DAMAGE TO THE PARTS CAN OCCUR.
1. If previously removed, install the rack (3,
Figure 97-72) as follows: 4. Ensuring proper thread engagement, start the
screw (8) into the mating threaded hole of the rack (3).
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the supports Do not tighten the screw at this time.
(6 and 7) and the rack (3) are clean and show no signs
of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
CAUTION
b. Install the rack (3) with the screws (2) on the
supports (6 and 7). Tighten the screws. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW. A
TORQ UE OF MORE THAN 13 TO 17
INCH-POUNDS (1.5 TO 1.9 NM) CAN
NOTE
DAMAGE THE RACK.
If the mating surfaces of the components
were clean and showed no signs of 5. Tighten the screw (8) until the connectors are
corrosion at the time of installation, the connected and the retaining wedge in the rack (3) is
following step is not required. fully engaged with the wedge on the bottom of the XM
receiver (GDL 69AH) (2320A1) (1). Torque the
c. Make sure the bond resistance between the screw T .
supports (6 and 7) and the rack (3) meets Class R-I
electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, 6. If previously removed, install the Primary Flight
Chapter 8). Display (PFD) (Chapter 95).

d. Apply sealant (C-251) to the mating edges of 7. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
the supports (6 and 7) and the rack (3) to cover the helicopter.
electrical bonding area.

NOTE
e. Put the backplate (4) in position at the back of
the rack (3) and make sure the spring clips (5) are The following step is not required if the
engaged and lock the backplate in place. same component as that removed is being

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 247
BHT-407-MM-11

reinstalled and repair of the component did 2. Open the forward fairing for access to the
not take place. antenna (3450E8) antenna connectors.

8. If a new, repaired, or replacement XM receiver

NOTE
(2320A1) (1) was installed, complete the Optional Kits
Software and Configuration Loading Procedure The GPS/WAAS/XM antenna (3450E8) is
(Chapter 95). installed on the forward fairing if the Traffic
Advisory System (TAS) is not installed. If
the traffic advisory system kit
NOTE (BHT-407-II-28) is installed, the GPS/
WAAS/XM antenna (3450E8) is installed on
For additional information, refer to the XM a support assembly on the forward fairing.
Radio Entertainment Section of the
G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s 3. Disconnect the antenna connectors (3450E8P1
Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00). and 3450E8P2) (5 and 4, Figure 97-73) from the GPS/
WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37) (3450E8) (2).
9. Do the XM satellite radio activation procedure
available at www.garmin.com (P/N 190-00355-04). 4. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the
coax connectors (4 and 5).
10. Do the GDL Testing as specified in Section 7 of
the G1000/G1000H System Maintenance Manual 5. Remove the screws (1) from the GPS/WAAS/XM
(190-00907-00) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 95). antenna (GA 37) (3450E8) (2).

11. Do an XM weather/audio operational check 6. Remove the GPS/WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37)
(paragraph 97-332). (3450E8) (2) and packing (6) from the forward fairing
assembly or support assembly (3).

97-328. GPS/WAAS/XM ANTENNA (GA 37) —

REMOVAL 97-329. GPS/WAAS/XM ANTENNA (GA 37) —
CLEANING

MATERIALS REQUIRED
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth

WARNING
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
cloth (C-516).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR 2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). (C-385).

1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a
from the helicopter. soft bristle brush.

97-00-00
Page 248 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A
1

1 3

2 4

DETAIL A
(SUPPORT ASSEMBLY SHOWN -
TYPICAL BOTH SIDES) NOTES
1. Screw 1 Antenna (GA 37) location if TAS antenna is
2. GPS/WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37) (3450E8) not installed.
3. Forward fairing assembly or support assembly
4. Antenna connector (3450E8P2) 2 Antenna (GA37) location if TAS antenna is
5. Antenna connector (3450E8P1) installed (BHT-407-II-28).
6. Packing
3 Wet install the screws with sealant (C-251).

LOCKWIRE (C-508) 4 After installation, apply sealant (C-251) to

the mating edges of the GPS/WAAS/XM
antenna (GA 37) and the forward fairing
SEALANT (C-251)
assembly or support assembly.
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0007_c01

Figure 97-73. GPS/WAAS/XM Antenna (GA 37) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 249
BHT-407-MM-11

97-330. GPS/WAAS/XM ANTENNA (GA 37) —

NOTE
INSPECTION
The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
NOTE optional XM satellite weather and radio kit
The following inspection criteria are (BHT-407-II-36). If the optional GPS/
primarily intended when the part or WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37) is being
component has been removed from the installed for the fist time, this must be
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection accomplished in accordance with the
requirements, applicable criteria may also instructions provided in the BHT-407-II-36.
be used when the part or component is Any subsequent installation may use the
installed on the helicopter. following procedure.

1. Do an inspection of the GPS/WAAS/XM antenna 1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the GPS/
(GA 37) (3450E8) (2, Figure 97-73) as follows: WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37) (3450E8) (2,
Figure 97-73) and the surface of the forward fairing
assembly or support assembly (3) are clean.
• Visually examine the housing of the GPS/
WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37) (3450E8) (2) for
condition NOTE
The GPS/WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37)
• Visually examine the antenna connectors (4 (3450E8) (2) is installed on the forward
and 5) for condition fairing if the Traffic Advisory System (TAS)
is not installed. If the traffic advisory system
Repair or replace as necessary. kit (BHT-407-II-28) is installed, the GPS/
WAAS/XM antenna (GA 37) (3450E8) is
2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for installed on a support assembly on the
cracks, wear, damage, and corrosion. Replace as forward fairing assembly.
required.
2. Install the packing (6) and the GPS/WAAS/XM
antenna (GA 37) (3450E8) (2) on the forward fairing or
97-331. GPS/WAAS/XM ANTENNA (GA 37) — support assembly (3).
INSTALLATION

3. Wet install the screws (1) with sealant (C-251).

Tighten the screws.
MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-251 Sealant

C-508 Lockwire
4. Deleted

WARNING 5. Apply a bead of sealant (C-251) to make a fillet

seal around the base of the GPS/WAAS/XM antenna
(GA 37) (3450E8) (2) and the forward fairing or
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS support assembly (3).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 6. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from the
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). coax connectors.

97-00-00
Page 250 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

7. Connect the antenna connectors (3450E8P1 and 4. Connect the headsets to the pilot and copilot ICS
3450E8P2) (5 and 4) to the GPS/WAAS/XM antenna disconnect stations, and to one of the passenger ICS
(GA 37) (3450E8) (2). Secure the connectors with disconnect stations.
lockwire (C-508).
5. On the audio panel, make sure the telephone and
8. Close the forward fairing assembly. entertainment, PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons are
set to ON.
9. Do an XM weather/audio operational check
(paragraph 97-332).
NOTE
10. Do an operational check of the GPS1 system
When a button is set to ON, the triangular
(paragraph 97-235).
annunciator above the button comes on.

97-332. XM WEATHER/AUDIO — OPERATIONAL 6. Push the VOL knob and turn the outer CRSR
CHECK knob to the desired source as indicated by the flashing
blue annunciator. Turn the inner VOL knob to a
desired volume.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED

NOTE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
For additional information to navigate to the
David Clark H10-36 Headset (Qty 3) required Multi-Function Display (MFD)
pages, refer to the XM Radio Entertainment
1. Move the helicopter outside with an unobstructed Section of the Garmin G1000H Integrated
view of the southern sky. Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX
(190-01255-00).

NOTE 7. On the MFD AUX/XM RADIO page, make sure

the VOLUME setting is in the default MUTE position.
Use an external power unit if available to
prevent the battery from being drained of its
stored electrical power. RESULT:

2. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the

• Audio is muted in the pilot, copilot, and
external DC power unit to ON.
passenger headsets.

NOTE 8. Select an available music station with the CHNL/

For additional information to navigate to the CH-/CH+ softkeys
required Multi-Function Display (MFD)
pages, refer to the XM Radio Entertainment 9. Select the VOL softkey and adjust the volume
Section of the Garmin G1000H Integrated with the VOL - / VOL + softkeys.
Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX
(190-01255-00).
RESULT:
3. On the Multi-Function Display (MFD) AUX/XM
INFO page, make sure the data and audio signal • Music is heard in the pilot, copilot, and
strengths are at satisfactory levels. passenger headsets.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 251
BHT-407-MM-11

• Passenger music is muted only while

NOTE
receiving on COM1.
For additional information to navigate to the
required Multi-Function Display (MFD) 16. On the audio panel, set the MIC2 button to ON
pages, refer to the XM Radio Entertainment and make sure MIC2 and COM2 buttons come ON.
Section of the Garmin G1000H Integrated
Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX
17. On the Primary Flight Display (PFD), tune COM2
(190-01255-00).
to an approved frequency and communicate between
the pilot and copilot seats.
10. On the MFD AUX/XM RADIO VOL page, push
the MUTE button.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• Pilot and copilot music is muted while
• Music is muted in the pilot, copilot, and transmitting or receiving on COM2.
passenger headsets.
• Passenger music is muted only while
11. Select the VOL softkey and adjust the volume receiving on COM2.
with the VOL - / VOL + softkeys. Adjust the pilot
volume control up and down. 18. On the instrument panel, push the FIRE TEST
switch (if installed).
RESULT:
RESULT:
• Pilot music audio level increases and
decreases with the volume control setting. • Pilot and copilot music is muted while the
aural alert sounds for the fire test.
12. Adjust the copilot volume control up and down.
• Passenger music is not muted.
RESULT:
19. On the audio panel, set the PILOT button to OFF
• Copilot music audio level increases and to disable the music output to the pilot.
decreases with the volume control setting.
RESULT:
13. Adjust the passenger volume control up and
down.
• Music is muted in the pilot headset.

RESULT:
20. Set the COPLT button to OFF to disable the
music output to the copilot.
• Passenger music audio level increases and
decreases with the volume control setting.
RESULT:
14. On the audio panel, set the MIC1 button to ON
and make sure MIC1 and COM1 buttons come ON. • Music is muted in the copilot headset.

15. On the PFD, tune COM1 to an approved 21. Set the PASS button to OFF to disable the music
frequency and communicate between the pilot and output to the passengers
copilot seats.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• Music is muted in the passenger headset.
• Pilot and copilot music is muted while
transmitting or receiving on COM1. 22. Remove the headsets.

97-00-00
Page 252 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck

NOTE
Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).
For information to navigate to the required
Multi-Function Display (MFD) pages, refer 24. On the MFD MAP/WEATHER DATA LINK page,
to the XM Radio Entertainment Section of enable all the available weather products and make
the Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck sure the weather information is shown after waiting the
Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00). specified refresh intervals as shown in Table 97-14.

25. Set the BATT switch to OFF, or set the external

23. On the MFD AUX/XM INFO page, make a note of
DC power unit to OFF.
the WEATHER PRODUCTS available for the
SERVICE CLASS subscription.
26. Return the helicopter to the standard
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
NOTE
For information to navigate to the required
Multi-Function Display (MFD) pages, refer
to the XM Satellite Weather Section of the

Table 97-14. Weather Products

( ) AIRMET – 12 min. ( ) ECHO TOP – 7.5 min. (N/A) SCIT ( ) ICING/SLD – 22 min.
(N/A) CANADA ( ) FRZ LVL – 12 min. ( ) SIGMET – 12 min. ( ) TURBULENCE – 12 min.

( ) CITY – 12 min. ( ) LTNG – 5 min. ( ) SFC – 12 min. ( ) AIREPS –12 min.

( ) CLD TOP – 15 min. ( ) METAR – 12 min. ( ) TAF – 12 min. ( ) PIREPS – 12 min.

( ) COUNTY – 5 min. ( ) NEXRAD – 10 min. ( ) TFR – 12 min.

( ) CYCLONE – 12 min. ( ) RADAR CVRG – 5 min. ( ) WIND – 12 min.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 253/254
 BHT-407-MM-11

WI-FI DATALINK AND STORAGE UNIT (GDL 59H) / IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER (GSR 56H)
(OPTIONAL KIT) (407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-333. WI-FI DATALINK AND IRIDIUM The datalink system includes the components that
SYSTEM follow:

• Datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2)

NOTE
The Wi-Fi datalink and storage unit and • Wi-Fi datalink antenna (2320E2)
Iridium transceiver are part of the optional
datalink kit (BHT-407-II-35). The datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) is installed
in a rack behind the Primary Flight Display (PFD)
The optional Wi-Fi datalink and storage unit (GDL 59H) (3160DS2).
provides a phone interface, a flight parameter data
logger, and a high speed datalink between the The Wi-Fi datalink antenna (2320E2) is installed in the
helicopter systems and ground computer network while left nose area of the crew compartment.
the helicopter is on the ground. The datalink system
uses the IEEE 802.11g (Wi-Fi) protocol and is capable The Iridium system includes the components that
of WEP64, WEP128, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK follow:
encryption formats.
• Iridium transceiver (GSR 56) (2320A3)
The datalink receiver (GDL 59H) transfers logged data
reports including engine trend and exceedance data, • Iridium antenna (2320E3)
system maintenance data, and Crew Advisory System
(CAS) messages. Also included in the message are the The Iridium transceiver (GSR 56) (2320A3) is installed
time of the message, and the message state: active, on the aft avionics shelf.
inactive, or inhibited.
The Iridium antenna (2320E3) is installed on the aft oil
The datalink receiver (GDL 59H) also provides an cooler fairing assembly.
interface to an optional Iridium transceiver (GSR 56).
The Iridium transceiver adds the capability of The datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) and Iridium
downloading the logged data reports in-flight or out of transceiver (GSR 56) must be registered and activated
range of a Wi-Fi connection on an airborne low speed prior to use.
datalink, and Iridium satellite telephone service and
Short Message Service (SMS) text messaging. Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component
reference designator index table and location figure
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the
NOTE
components.
For information to navigate to the required
Multi-Function Display (MFD) pages, refer To help clarify system operation, refer to the simplified
to the Satellite Telephone and Data Link schematic (Figure 97-74) while reading information
Services Section of the Garmin G1000H about the Wi-Fi datalink and storage unit and Iridium
Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell transceiver system.
407GX (190-01255-00).

Iridium telephone and text messaging are available to NOTE

the flight crew through the Multi-Function Display If you install Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT)
(MFD), audio panel, and headset. Operation of these optional equipment for the first time, do this
features is done through the AUX/TELEPHONE, AUX/ in accordance with the instructions provided
TEXT MESSAGING, AUX/REPORT STATUS, and in the applicable Installation Instruction (II).
AUX/WI-FI SETUP pages on the MFD. Follow the instructions provided in this
chapter for any subsequent installation.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 255
BHT-407-MM-11

IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER
LCTN - AFT FUSELAGE
GSR 2320A3
2320CB2 2320A3P1 (GSR 56H)

28 VDC 3A 32 AIRCRAFT POWER 1

BUS 21 HEATER POWER
DATALINK 36 HEATER POWER
LCTN - INSTRUMENT PANEL
GDL 2320A2
2320CB3 2320A2P1 (GDL 59H) 2320A2P1

1A 71 +28 VDC PWR IN IRIDIUM STATUS DISCRETE 1 56 31 STATUS DISCRETE OUT

IRIDIUM 1 REMOTE POWER ON 73 16 IRIDIUM REMOTE POWER ON
RS-232 OUT 1 63 13 RS-232 IN
SIGNAL GROUND 44 14 SIGNAL GROUND
RS-232 IN 1 64 12 RS-232 OUT

HI 16 4 HI
IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN
LO 35 5 LO

52 POWER GROUND HI 15 1 HI
IRIDIUM AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT
LO 34 2 LO

37 HEATER 1 LO
38 HEATER 2 HI
3 POWER GROUND
IRIDIUM ANTENNA
LCTN - AFT ENGINE COWL
2320E3

2320E3P1 2320A3P2
IRIDIUM ANTENNA

AUDIO PANEL
2301A1
2301A1P1 (GMA 350H)

LO 38 28 LO
AUDIO SYS 1 IN XCVR 4 MIC OUT
HI 19 27 HI

LO 39 26 LO
AUDIO SYS 1 OUT XCVR 4 AUDIO IN
HI 20 25 HI

MFD (L-DU)
3160DS1
3160DS1P1 (GDU 1040H)

ETHERNET IN 1A 10 48 ETHERNET OUT 4A

ETHERNET IN 1B 30 49 ETHERNET OUT 4B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 9 50 ETHERNET IN 4A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 29 51 ETHERNET IN 4B

WI-FI DATALINK ANTENNA

LCTN - INTERNAL NOSE
2320E2

2320A2P2 2320E2P1
WI-FI ANTENNA

407-476-617-A 407gc_MM_97_0016

Figure 97-74. Datalink and Iridium — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 256 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-334. WI-FI DATALINK AND IRIDIUM SYSTEM — transceiver (GSR 56) (2320A3) connector
OPERATION (2320A3P1), pin 16.

The Iridium antenna (2320E3) is connected to the

NOTE
Iridium transceiver (2320A3) connector (2320A3P2).
For additional information on the use and
operation of the Wi-Fi datalink and Iridium 97-335. DATALINK RECEIVER (GDL 59H) —
system, refer to the Garmin G1000H REMOVAL
Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide –
Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).

Electrical power from the 28 VDC BUS is supplied to MATERIALS REQUIRED

the Wi-Fi datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2)
electrical connector (2320A2P1), pin 71, from the Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
circuit breaker (2320CB3), as shown in Figure 97-74.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

The Wi-Fi datalink antenna (2320E2) connects the C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
helicopter systems to a ground network while the
helicopter is on the ground. The antenna is connected
to the Wi-Fi datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) on
connector (2320A2P2). The datalink receiver WARNING
(GDL 59H) (2320A2) communicates with the
Multi-Function Display (MFD) via a high-speed data
bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
The datalink receiver is connected to the NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
Intercommunication System (ICS) for voice EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
transmission from the pilot, copilot, or passenger
positions through the datalink receiver (GDL 59H) 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
(2320A2) audio pins 15, 16, 34, and 35 on connector from the helicopter.
(2320A2P1) to the Iridium transceiver (GSR 56)
(2320A3) audio pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 on connector
2. If installed, remove the Primary Flight Display
(2320A3P1).
(PFD) (Chapter 95).
Downloading of the logged data reports from the MFD,
while in flight, is through the datalink receiver 3. At the forward lower area of the rack (2,
(GDL 59H) (2320A2) RS-232 pins 63 and 64 on Figure 97-75), loosen the screw (8) until the wedge on
connector (2320A2P1) to the Iridium transceiver (GSR the bottom of the datalink receiver (GDL 59H)
56) (2320A3) RS-232 pins 12 and 13 on connector (2320A2) (1) is released from the wedge in the rack.
(2320A3P1).
4. Pull the ring (9) on the front of the datalink
The datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) monitors receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) (1) and lift the receiver
the status of the Iridium transceiver (GSR 56) 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) to remove the receiver from the
(2320A3) via the Iridium status discrete signal on pin rack (2).
56 of connector (2320A2P1).
5. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the
Electrical power from the 28 VDC BUS is supplied to electrical connectors.
the Iridium transceiver (GSR 56) (2320A3) electrical
connector (2320A3P1), pin 32, from the circuit breaker
(2320CB2). The Iridium transceiver (GSR 56) 6. If necessary, remove the rack (2) as follows:
(2320A3) is turned on or off remotely by a discrete
ground from the datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) a. Remove the sealant from the base of the
connector (2320A2P1), pin 73, to the Iridium rack (2).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 257
BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B

1. Datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2)

2. Rack DETAIL A
3. Screw
4. Backplate
5. Spring clip SEALANT (C-251)
6. Support
7. Support 13 TO 17 IN-LBS
8. Screw (1.5 TO 1.9 Nm)
9. Ring
2 4
NOTE
1 After installation of rack (2), 1
apply sealant (C-251) to cover
the electrical bonding area.
4 PLACES
3
WEDGE

1
6
9

1
7
FOOT
WEDGE
8

DETAIL B
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0014

Figure 97-75. Datalink Receiver (GDL 59H) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 258 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

b. Pull on the spring clips (5) to unlock the 97-338. DATALINK RECEIVER (GDL 59H) —
backplate (4) from the rack (2). INSTALLATION

c. Remove the screws (3) from the rack (2).

MATERIALS REQUIRED
d. Remove the rack (2) from the supports (6
and 7). Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

97-336. DATALINK RECEIVER (GDL 59H) — NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

CLEANING
C-251 Sealant

MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. WARNING

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
C-516 Clean Cloth
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean

NOTE
cloth (C-516).
The following installation procedure applies
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a only to helicopters equipped with the
clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol optional datalink kit (BHT-407-II-35). If the
(C-385). optional datalink receiver (GDL 59H)
(2320A2) is being installed for the fist time,
this must be accomplished in accordance
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a with the instructions provided in the
soft bristle brush. BHT-407-II-35. Any subsequent installation
may use the following procedure.
97-337. DATALINK RECEIVER (GDL 59H) —
INSPECTION 1. If previously removed, install the rack (2,
Figure 97-75) as follows:
NOTE
a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the supports
The following inspection criteria are (6 and 7) and the rack (2) are clean and show no signs
primarily intended when the part or of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
component has been removed from the Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also b. Install the rack (2) with the screws (3) on the
be used when the part or component is supports (6 and 7). Tighten the screws.
installed on the helicopter.

1. Visually examine the datalink receiver (GDL 59H) NOTE

(2320A2) (1, Figure 97-75) for cracks, mechanical If the mating surfaces of the components
damage, and corrosion damage. Replace when were clean and showed no signs of
necessary. corrosion at the time of installation, the
following step is not required.
2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion c. Make sure the bonding resistance between
damage. Replace as necessary. the supports (6 and 7) and the rack (2) meets

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 259
BHT-407-MM-11

Class R-II electrical bonding requirements fully engaged with the wedge on the bottom of the
(BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) (1). Torque the
screw 15 ±2 inch-pounds (1.69 ±0.23 Nm).
d. Apply sealant (C-251) to the mating edges of
the supports (6 and 7) and the rack (2) to cover the 6. If previously removed, install the Primary Flight
electrical bonding area. Display (PFD) (Chapter 95).

e. Put the backplate (4) in position at the back of 7. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
the rack (2) and make sure the spring clips (5) are helicopter.
engaged and lock the backplate in place.

2. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from NOTE

the electrical connectors. The following step is not required if the
same component as that removed is being
3. Put the datalink receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) (1) reinstalled and repair of the component did
in the rack (2). Lift the receiver 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) not take place.
to position the foot of the receiver forward of the
wedge on the rack. 8. If a new, repaired, or replacement datalink
receiver (GDL 59H) (2320A2) (1) was installed,
complete the Optional Kits Software and Configuration
Loading Procedure (Chapter 95).
CAUTION

NOTE
MAKE SURE THE THREADS OF THE
For information on registering with Garmin
SCREW (8) PROPERLY ENGAGE THE
Flight Data Services, refer to the
MATING THREADS OF THE RACK (2).
instructions located within the Garmin
CONFIRM PROPER ALIGNMENT
G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s
BETWEEN THE SCREW AND THE
Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00) or
THREADED HOLE OF THE RACK
contact Garmin at www.garmin.com.
DURING INSTALLATION. DO NOT USE
FORCE WHILE INSTALLING THE
SCREW OR CROSS THREADING AND 9. If a new or replacement unit was installed, and
DAMAGE TO THE PARTS CAN OCCUR. the System Data Logging feature of the G1000H
system is desired, an account must be established
with Garmin (contact Garmin Flight Data Services).
4. Ensuring proper thread engagement, start the
screw (8) into the mating threaded hole of the rack (2).
Do not tighten the screw at this time. 10. Do an operational check of the Wi-Fi datalink
system (paragraph 97-351).

97-339. WI-FI ANTENNA — REMOVAL

CAUTION

DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREW. A MATERIALS REQUIRED

TORQUE OF MORE THAN 15
±2 INCH-POUNDS (1.69 ±0.23 NM) CAN Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
DAMAGE THE RACK.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
5. Tighten the screw (8) until the connectors are
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
connected and the retaining wedge in the rack (2) is

97-00-00
Page 260 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean

cloth (C-516).
WARNING

2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR (C-385).
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
3. Remove dirt from the antenna connector with a
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power soft bristle brush.
from the helicopter.
97-341. WI-FI ANTENNA — INSPECTION
2. Open the left crew door.

3. Disconnect the antenna connector (2320E2P1) NOTE

(5, Figure 97-76) from the Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) (3).
The following inspection criteria are
primarily intended when the part or
4. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the
component has been removed from the
electrical connector.
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
requirements, applicable criteria may also
5. Remove the screws (1) and the washers (2) from
be used when the part or component is
the Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) (3).
installed on the helicopter.

6. Remove the Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) (3) and

packing (4) from the bracket assembly (10). 1. Do an inspection of the Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2)
(3, Figure 97-76) as follows:
7. If necessary, remove the bracket assembly (10)
as follows: • Visually examine the housing of the Wi-Fi
antenna (2320E2) (3) for condition
a. Remove the screw (6), washers (7), and
nuts (9).
• Visually examine the antenna connector
(2320E2P1) (5) for condition
b. Remove the screw (16) and the washers (17).

c. Remove the nut (15), washer (14), clamps (12 Replace as required.
and 13), washer (19), and screw (11) from the bracket
assembly (10) and the inner flange (8).
2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
cracks, wear, damage and corrosion. Replace as
d. Remove the bracket assembly (10) from the
required.
inner flange (8) and the bracket (18).

97-340. WI-FI ANTENNA — CLEANING 97-342. WI-FI ANTENNA — INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. WARNING

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
C-516 Clean Cloth
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 261
BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

2
3

5
6
11
7

10 1. Screw
2. Washer
18 3. Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2)
19 4. Packing
5. Antenna connector (2320E2P1)
8
6. Screw
7 7. Washer
8. Inner flange
17 9
9. Nut
16 10. Bracket assembly
11. Screw
12. Clamp
13. Clamp
14. Washer
12 15. Nut
16. Screw
13
17. Washer
14 15 18. Bracket
19. Washer

DETAIL A
407gc_MM_97_0019_c01

Figure 97-76. Wi-Fi Antenna — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 262 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

6. Connect the antenna connector (2320E2P1) (5)

NOTE
to the Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) (3).
The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
optional datalink kit (BHT-407-II-35). If the NOTE
optional Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) is being
If the mating surfaces of the components
installed for the fist time, this must be
were clean and showed no signs of
accomplished in accordance with the
corrosion at the time of installation, the
instructions provided in the BHT-407-II-35.
following step is not required.
Any subsequent installation may use the
following procedure.
7. With the coax connectors connected at both
ends, make sure the bond resistance between the
1. If previously removed, install the bracket
Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) (3) and the bracket assembly
assembly (10, Figure 97-76) as follows:
(10) meets Class R-II electrical bonding requirements
(BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
a. Put the bracket assembly (10) in position on
the inner flange (8) and the bracket (18).
8. Close the left crew door.
b. Install the screw (11), washer (19), clamps (12
and 13), washer (14), and nut (15) on the bracket 9. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
assembly (10) and the inner flange (8). Do not tighten helicopter.
the hardware at this time.
10. Do an operational check of the Wi-Fi datalink
c. Install the screws (16) and the washers (17) system (paragraph 97-351).
on the bracket assembly (10). Do not tighten the
screws at this time.
97-343. IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER (GSR 56) —
d. Install the screw (6), washers (7), and the nut REMOVAL
(9). Tighten the nut.

e. Tighten the screw (16) and the nut (15). MATERIALS REQUIRED

2. Make sure the mating surfaces of the Wi-Fi Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
antenna (2320E2) (3) and the bracket assembly (10)
are clean and show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
preparation.

NOTE WARNING
If a new Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) (3) is
installed, make sure to install the supplied
packing and discard the supplied washers. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
3. Install the Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) (3) and NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
packing (4) on the bracket assembly (10). EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

4. Install the screws (1) and the washers (2) on the 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
Wi-Fi antenna (2320E2) (3). Tighten the screws. from the helicopter.

5. Remove the protective caps and/or plugs from 2. In the baggage compartment, remove the top
the coax connectors. access hole cover.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 263
BHT-407-MM-11

3. Loosen the knurled knob (2, Figure 97-77) and 1. Visually examine the Iridium transceiver
remove the Iridium transceiver (GSR 56) (2320A3) (1) (GSR 56) (2320A3) (1, Figure 97-77) for cracks,
from the rack (3). mechanical damage, and corrosion damage. Replace
when necessary.
4. Put protective caps and/or plugs (C-136) on the
electrical connectors.
2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
wear, cracks, mechanical damage, and corrosion
5. If necessary, remove the rack (3) as follows: damage. Replace as necessary.

a. Remove the screws (6), lockwashers (5), and

97-346. IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER (GSR 56) —
washers (4) from the rack (3).
INSTALLATION

b. Remove the rack (3) from the aft avionics

equipment shelf (7).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
97-344. IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER (GSR 56) —
CLEANING Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

MATERIALS REQUIRED C-251 Sealant

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
WARNING
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
cloth (C-516).

2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a NOTE

clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol
The following installation procedure applies
(C-385).
only to helicopters equipped with the
optional datalink kit (BHT-407-II-35). If the
3. Remove dirt from electrical connector(s) with a optional Iridium transceiver (2320A3) is
soft bristle brush. being installed for the fist time, this must be
accomplished in accordance with the
97-345. IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER (GSR 56) — instructions provided in the BHT-407-II-35.
INSPECTION Any subsequent installation may use the
following procedure.

NOTE
1. If previously removed, install the rack (3,
The following inspection criteria are Figure 97-77) as follows:
primarily intended when the part or
component has been removed from the
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection a. Make sure the mating surfaces of the aft
requirements, applicable criteria may also avionics equipment shelf (7) and rack (3) are clean
be used when the part or component is and show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
installed on the helicopter. BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.

97-00-00
Page 264 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

7
1

1 3

2
1. Iridium transceiver (GSR 56) (2320A3)
2. Knurled knob
3. Rack
4. Washer
5. Lockwasher
6. Screw
7. Aft avionics equipment shelf
DETAIL A
SEALANT (C-251)

NOTE
1 After installation of rack (3), apply sealant (C-251) to cover the electrical bonding area.
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0018_c01

Figure 97-77. Iridium Transceiver (GSR 56) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 265
BHT-407-MM-11

b. Put the rack (3) in position on the aft avionics Garmin G1000H Integrated Flight Deck
equipment shelf (7). Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).

c. Install the screws (6), lockwashers (5), and 8. Contact Garmin Flight Data Services
washers (4). Tighten the screws. (www.garmin.com) to set up a subscriber account with
Iridium Communications, Inc. for satellite telephone,
text messaging, and low speed data services.
NOTE
If the mating surfaces of the components 9. Do an operational check of the Iridium datalink
were clean and showed no signs of system (paragraph 97-351).
corrosion at the time of installation, the
following step is not required. 97-347. IRIDIUM ANTENNA — REMOVAL

d. Verify the electrical bonding between the aft

avionics equipment shelf (7) and rack (3) meets Class
R-II electrical bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, MATERIALS REQUIRED
Chapter 8).
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
e. Apply sealant (C-251) to cover the electrical NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
bonding areas.
C-136 Caps and/or Plugs
2. Remove protective caps and/or plugs from the
electrical connectors.

3. Install the Iridium transceiver (GSR 56) (2320A3)

WARNING
(1) on the rack (3).

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4. Install and tighten the knurled knob (2).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
5. Install the top access hole cover in the baggage EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
compartment area.
1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
6. Connect the battery or external DC power to the from the helicopter.
helicopter.
2. Open the access door (3, Figure 97-78) on top of
the aft oil cooler fairing assembly.
NOTE
The following step is not required if the 3. Disconnect the antenna connector (2320E3P1)
same component as that removed is being (4) from the Iridium antenna (2320E3) (1).
reinstalled and repair of the component did
not take place. 4. Remove the screws (2) from the Iridium antenna
(2320E3) (1).
7. If a new, repaired, or replacement Iridium
transceiver (GSR 56) (2320A3) (1) was installed,
complete the Optional Kits Software and Configuration 5. Put a protective cap caps and/or plugs (C-136) on
Loading Procedure (Chapter 95). the coax connector.

6. Remove the Iridium antenna (2320E3) (1) and

NOTE the packing (6) from the aft oil cooler fairing assembly.
For additional information, refer to the
Satellite Telephone and Data Link services 7. If required, remove the backing plate (5) from the
registration instructions located within the aft fairing cooler assembly.

97-00-00
Page 266 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

1. Iridium antenna (CI 490-22) (2320E3)

2. Screw
3. Access door
4. Coax connector (2320E3P1)
5. Backing plate
6. Packing

SEALANT (C-251)

1 3 2
SEE DETAIL A

NOTES
2 1
1 Wet install the screws (2) with
sealant (C-251).

2 After installation, apply sealant

(C-251) to the mating edges of the
6 antenna and the aft oil cooler fairing.

5 3 After installation, cover the head of

the screws (2) with sealant (C-251).

4
AFT OIL COOLER
FAIRING ASSEMBLY

DETAIL A
407gc_MM_97_0013_c01

Figure 97-78. Iridium Antenna — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 267
BHT-407-MM-11

97-348. IRIDIUM ANTENNA — CLEANING 97-350. IRIDIUM ANTENNA — INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol C-251 Sealant

C-516 Clean Cloth

WARNING
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
cloth (C-516).
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
clean cloth (C-516) moistened with isopropyl alcohol
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
(C-385).

NOTE
3. Remove dirt from the antenna connector with a
soft bristle brush. The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
optional datalink kit (BHT-407-II-35). If the
97-349. IRIDIUM ANTENNA — INSPECTION optional Iridium antenna (2320E3) is being
installed for the fist time, this must be
accomplished in accordance with the
NOTE
instructions provided in the BHT-407-II-35.
The following inspection criteria are Any subsequent installation may use the
primarily intended when the part or following procedure.
component has been removed from the
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection 1. Make sure the mating surfaces of the Iridium
requirements, applicable criteria may also antenna (2320E3) (1, Figure 97-78) and the surface of
be used when the part or component is the aft oil cooler fairing assembly are clean and show
installed on the helicopter. no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
1. Do an inspection of the Iridium antenna (2320E3)
(1, Figure 97-78) as follows: 2. If the backing plate (5) has been previously
removed, make sure the mating surfaces of the inner
skin of the aft oil cooler fairing assembly and the
• Visually examine the housing of the Iridium
backing plate are clean and show no signs of
antenna (2320E3) (1) for condition
corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
• Visually examine the antenna connector
(2320E3P1) (4) for condition

CAUTION
Replace as required.

2. Visually examine the attaching hardware for DO NOT APPLY SEALANT BETWEEN
cracks, wear, damage and corrosion. Replace as THE BASE OF THE IRIDIUM ANTENNA
required. AND THE AFT OIL COOLER FAIRING

97-00-00
Page 268 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

ASSEMBLY OR IT COULD HAVE AN 97-351. WI-FI/IRIDIUM DATALINKS —

UNWANTED EFFECT ON RADIO OPERATIONAL CHECKS
FREQUENCY BONDING.

3. Position the Iridium antenna (2320E3) (1),

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
packing (6), and backing plate (5) on the aft oil cooler
fairing assembly. Wet install the screws (2) with
sealant (C-251). Tighten the screws. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

4. Apply a bead of sealant (C-251) to make a fillet David Clark H10-36 Headset (Qty 3)
seal around the base of the Iridium antenna (2320E3)
(1), backing plate (5), and aft oil cooler fairing
assembly. NOTE
Before Wi-Fi and Iridium datalink services
5. Remove the protective cap and/or plug from the can be used, separate accounts must be
coax connector. set up to access the Iridium satellite
network for voice and Garmin Flight Data
6. Connect the antenna connector (2320E3P1) (4) Services for data transmission of
to the Iridium antenna (2320E3) (1). maintenance reports.

NOTE NOTE
If the mating surfaces of the components For information to navigate to the required
were clean and showed no signs of Multi-Function Display (MFD) pages, refer
corrosion at the time of installation, the to the Satellite Telephone and Data Link
following step is not required. Services Section of the Garmin G1000H
Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell
7. Make sure the bond resistance between the 407GX (190-01255-00).
Iridium antenna (2320E3) (1) and the aft oil cooler
fairing assembly meets Class A-II electrical bonding 1. As applicable, do the Wi-Fi datalink and Iridium
requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8). datalink operational checks (paragraph 97-352 and
paragraph 97-353).
8. Cover the heads of the screws (2) with sealant
(C-251). 97-352. Wi-Fi Datalink — Operational Check

9. Close the access door (3) on top of the aft oil 1. Move the helicopter to a previously configured
cooler fairing assembly. Wi-Fi network access point.

10. Connect the battery or external DC power to the

helicopter. NOTE
Use an external power unit if available to
11. Do an operational check of the Iridium datalink prevent the battery from being drained of its
system (paragraph 97-351). stored electrical power.

2. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the

external DC power unit to ON.

NOTE
For additional information to navigate to the
required Multi-Function Display (MFD)
pages, refer to the WiFi Connections
Section of the Garmin G1000H Integrated

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 269
BHT-407-MM-11

Flight Deck Pilot’s Guide – Bell 407GX

NOTE
(190-01255-00).
For additional information to navigate to the
3. On the MFD AUX/WI-FI SETUP page, select the required Multi-Function Display (MFD)
desired network via the FMS knob. Push the pages, refer to the Telephone
CONNECT softkey and enter the network password, if Communication Section of the Garmin
applicable. G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s
Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).
RESULT:
6. On the MFD AUX/TELEPHONE page, place a
call via the Iridium network from the pilot headset.
• Successful connection is established to the
selected network, as shown in the
CONFIGURATION STATUS window. RESULT:

• Signal strength with the selected network is • Acceptable two-way conversation is

shown at acceptable levels in the maintained.
CONFIGURATION STATUS window.
7. On the MFD AUX/TELEPHONE page, push the
4. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set HOLD softkey.
the external DC power unit to OFF.
RESULT:
5. Return the helicopter to the standard
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After • Conversation is put on hold.
Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).
8. On the MFD AUX/TELEPHONE page, push the
97-353. Iridium Datalink — Operational Check HOLD softkey.

1. Move the helicopter outside with an unobstructed RESULT:

view of the southern sky.
• Hold status is removed.

NOTE 9. Adjust the pilot ICS telephone volume up and

Use an external power unit if available to down.
prevent the battery from being drained of its
stored electrical power. RESULT:

2. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the • Pilot telephone volume level changes with the
external DC power unit to ON. setting of the audio panel telephone volume
control.
3. Connect the headsets to the pilot and copilot ICS
disconnect stations, and to one of the passenger ICS 10. Adjust the copilot ICS telephone volume up and
disconnect stations. down.

4. On the audio panel, make sure the telephone and RESULT:

entertainment, PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons are
set to ON. • Copilot telephone volume level changes with
the setting of the audio panel telephone
5. Push the VOL knob and turn the outer CRSR volume control.
knob to the desired source as indicated by the flashing
blue annunciator, and turn the inner VOL knob to a 11. Adjust the passenger ICS telephone volume up
desired volume. and down.

97-00-00
Page 270 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

RESULT: 17. On the audio panel, push the PILOT button to

disable the telephone output to the pilot.
• Passenger telephone volume level changes
with the setting of the audio panel telephone RESULT:
volume control.
• Telephone audio is muted in the pilot headset.
12. On the audio panel, make sure MIC1 and COM1,
PILOT, COPLT, and PASS are set to ON. 18. On the audio panel, push the COPLT button to
disable the telephone output to the copilot.
13. Tune COM1 to an approved frequency and
communicate between the pilot and copilot seats. RESULT:

RESULT: • Telephone audio is muted in the copilot

headset.
• Pilot and copilot telephone audio is muted
while transmitting or receiving on COM1. 19. Push the PASS button to disable the telephone
output to the passengers.
• Passenger telephone audio is muted only
while receiving on COM1. RESULT:

14. On the audio panel, select MIC2 and make sure • Telephone audio is muted in the passenger
MIC2 and COM2 buttons are set to ON. headset.

15. Tune COM2 to an approved frequency and NOTE

communicate between the pilot and copilot seats.
For additional information to navigate to the
required Multi-Function Display (MFD)
RESULT: pages, refer to the Telephone
Communication Section of the Garmin
• Pilot and copilot telephone audio is muted G1000H Integrated Flight Deck Pilot’s
while transmitting or receiving on COM2. Guide – Bell 407GX (190-01255-00).

• Passenger telephone audio is muted only 20. On the MFD AUX/TELEPHONE page, push the
while receiving on COM2. HANGUP softkey to end the call.

16. Push the FIRE TEST switch (if installed). 21. Remove the headsets.

RESULT: 22. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
the external DC power unit to OFF.
• Pilot and copilot telephone audio is muted
while the aural alert sounds. 23. Return the helicopter to the standard
configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
• Passenger telephone audio is not muted. Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 271/272
 BHT-407-MM-11

EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) (C406-N HM) (OPTIONAL KIT)

(407GX HELICOPTERS S/N 54300 AND SUBSEQUENT)

97-354. EMERGENCY LOCATOR 97-355. ELT ARM/XMIT SWITCH/LIGHT

TRANSMITTER SYSTEM
The ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) is installed
on the top left side of the instrument panel above the
NOTE
Left Display Unit (L-DU).
The ELT is part of the optional ELT kit
(BHT-407-II-38).
The ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) provides a
means to manually activate, test, and reset the ELT
The function of the optional Emergency Locator (2560TR1).
Transmitter (ELT) kit is to send out a distress signal
that allows the beacon to be located by the satellite
system and a search and rescue aircraft to locate the The ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) is an
helicopter. alternate action LED switch/light. The ELT ARM/XMIT
switch/light (2560S1) normally displays a green steady
The ELT system includes the components that follow: ELT ARM segment.

• ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) If the ELT is activated accidentally, the unit has to be
reset by positioning the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light
(2560S1) to XMIT then to ARM after approximately 1
• Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
second. The ELT cannot be reset from the opposite
(C406-N HM) (2560TR1)
switch position if either the panel mounted switch or
the ON/OFF switch on the ELT transmitter remains in
• ELT programming adapter the ON position.

• ELT buzzer (2560A1) The ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) does not
provide the ability to disarm or disable (when
• ELT antenna (2560E1) automatically activated via G-switch) the ELT
(2560TR1) from the cockpit.
Refer to the electrical, avionics, and kit component
reference designator index table and location figure 97-356. EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
(Chapter 96) to find the installed location of the (C406-N HM)
components.
The ELT is an Automatic Fixed (AF) type ELT which
To help clarify system operation, refer to the simplified transmits an emergency radio signal on 121.5, 243.0,
schematic (Figure 97-79) while reading information and 406.028 MHz. The 121.5/243.0 MHz section of
about the ELT system.
the transmitter is contained in a module with the
406.028 MHz transmitter. The top circuit board
NOTE contains the microprocessor that controls the module
and all ELT functions. The ELT is a single output
If you install Bell Helicopter Textron (BHT) device.
optional equipment for the first time, do this
in accordance with the instructions
provided in the applicable Installation The ELT (2560TR1) is installed in the rear section of
Instruction (II). Follow the instructions the aft fuselage. It is enclosed in a high impact fire
provided in this chapter for any subsequent resistant polycarbonate plastic case. It consists of a
installation. mounting tray, a protective top cover, and an end cap.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 273
BHT-407-MM-11

ELT
LCTN - AFT FUSELAGE
ELT 2560TR1
2560CB1 2560TR1P1 (C406-N HM)
28 VDC 2A 10 28 VDC POWER
ESS BUS 2

PROGRAMMING
ADAPTER
2
BROWN 3 DDCS
RED 4 +5 V DNGL
YELLOW 1 BDIN (OPT)
GREEN 2 BDLCK (OPT)
ORANGE 15 BDOUT (OPT)
BLACK 16 DGND (OPT)
ELT REMOTE SWITCH
LCTN - INSTR PANEL 1
2560S1 2560S1P1
LIGHT SYSTEM ANNUNCIATORS
A
AND SWITCH LIGHTS
2
ELT ARM
1
ELT XMIT 3 6 LIGHT
4
B

11 A/C GND
5
LIGHT SYSTEM ANNUNCIATORS
6
AND SWITCH LIGHTS
ARM 7
8
9 18 EXTERNAL ON
10
11 8 RESET 2
12
13 9 RESET 1
XMT 14
15 2560CR1
16
2560CR2
19 SPARE
INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT NO. 2 20 SPARE
22 SPARE
3140A2
(GIA 63H) 3140A2P3

MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 1 A 71 5 ARINC 429 IN – (A)

MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 1 B 70 17 ARINC 429 IN – (B)

12 G-SWITCH LOOP
ELT BUZZER 13 G-SWITCH LOOP
LCTN - AFT FUSELAGE
2560A1

+ 14 HORN PWR
– 21 HORN GND

ELT ANTENNA 2560E1P1 2560TR1P2

LCTN - LOWER
AFT FUSELAGE ELT ANTENNA
2560E1
NOTES

1 WIRES CONNECTED WHEN PROGRAMMING

ADAPTER IS INSTALLED.

2 WHEN PROGRAMMING ADAPTER IS NOT INSTALLED, CONTACTS 3 AND 4 OF

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 2560TR1P1 ARE SHORTED WITH A JUMPER WIRE. 407-476-613-A 407gc_MM_97_0001

Figure 97-79. Emergency Locator Transmitter — Simplified Schematic

97-00-00
Page 274 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

The ELT automatically activates during a crash and The programming adapter allows for the programming
transmits the standard swept tone on 121.5 MHz and of the helicopter’s 24 bit address or tail number. This
243.0 MHz. Every 50 seconds for 520 milliseconds, feature provides the ability to move the ELT between
the 406.028 MHz transmitter turns on. During that time helicopters.
an encoded digital message is sent to the satellite.
The message contains: 97-359. ELT BUZZER

• Serial number of the transmitter or helicopter A warning buzzer (2560GB2) is located on a bracket
ID (24 bit address or serial number) close to the ELT (2560TR1).

• Country code The warning buzzer is powered by the ELT. The

buzzer is not designed to operate continuously but
• Cospas/Sarsat ID code sounds at predetermined intervals.

• Position coordinates Because aircraft communication radios are not

capable of receiving the 406.028 MHz frequency, the
buzzer allows for the monitoring of the ELT by
The 406.028 MHz transmitter will operate for 24 hours operating the buzzer when the ELT is transmitting in
with the supplied battery power, then the 121.5/243.0 the 406.028 MHz frequency.
MHz will continue to operate until the battery power is
exhausted.
97-360. ELT — OPERATION

The ELT is equipped with a crash activation sensor or

Electrical power from the ESS BUS 2 feeds the ELT
G-switch that is activated with a change of velocity of
circuit breaker (2560CB1) and is then directed to
4.5 ±0.5 feet per second.
contact 10 of electrical connector (2560TR1P1) of the
ELT (2560TR1). The ELT (2560TR1) distributes the
The ELT is connected to the integrated avionics unit power throughout the ELT system. Electrical power is
No. 2 (3140A2) and receives longitude and latitude also directed to contact 4 of the remote switch (ELT
position data. ARM/TRANSMIT) (2560S1), and is used to supply
power to illuminate the XMIT segment when the switch
97-357. ELT ANTENNA is set the ELT XMIT position.

When the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) is

NOTE pressed, it supplies a ground path through its closed
The ELT antenna (2560E1) is part of the contacts (9 and 10) to the ELT (2560TR1) at the
optional ELT kit (BHT-407-II-38). terminal (2560TR1P1-18) to activate the ELT
(2560TR1) distress signal. The ELT ARM segment
then extinguishes and the amber flashing ELT XMIT
The ELT antenna (2560E1) is installed in the rear
segment illuminates to confirm transmit mode.
section of the aft fuselage. It is a rod antenna with an
omnidirectional radiation pattern and its polarization is
vertical. It is terminated with a bayonet NOTE
Neill-Concelman (BNC) connector. The Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) of the ELT antenna If an error condition is detected by the ELT
(2560E1) is 2.0:1 maximum for 121.5/243.0 MHz and immediately following power-up, both the
1.5:1 maximum for 406.028 MHz. LEDs on the ELT unit and the remote
switch (ELT XMIT) will flash rapidly with a
two-flash pulse (one short/one long). This
97-358. ELT PROGRAMMING ADAPTER indicates either the program adapter (PA) is
not installed or a PA communication/wiring
An optional programming adapter (Figure 97-80) is fault exists. This fault sequence will
placed in line with the ELT wiring harness and continue up to 1 minute after helicopter
connects to the mating connector. power is removed.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 275
BHT-407-MM-11

STRAIN RELIEF

PROGRAMMING ADAPTER

CONNECTOR

ASSEMBLED VIEW

429_MM_97_0013+

Figure 97-80. ELT — Optional Programming Adapter

97-00-00
Page 276 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

The ELT is designed against human error and misuse Practices (Chapter 96). For wiring maintenance
regarding automatic activation. It cannot be activated procedures, refer to the BHT-ELEC-SPM.
unless terminals 12 and 13 of electrical connector
(2560TR1P1) are shorted together and securely 97-363. ELT (C406-N HM) — REMOVAL
mounted in the tray. The ELT cannot be accidently
activated by dropping, rough handling, or during
shipping.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Under normal operation condition, the ELT ARM/XMIT
switch/light (2560S1) is set to ARM and the ELT Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.
master switch (located on the ELT) is set to OFF. With
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
the switches set in those positions, the ELT will
operate automatically during a crash. C-156 Caps and/or Plugs

To manually activate the ELT, set the ELT master

switch (located on the ELT) to ON or set the ELT ARM/
XMIT switch/light (2560S1) to XMIT. WARNING
If the ELT is activated accidentally, the unit has to be
reset by positioning the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(2560S1) to XMIT then to ARM after approximately
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
1 second. The ELT cannot be reset from the opposite
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
switch position if either the panel mounted switch or
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
the ON/OFF switch on the ELT transmitter remains in
the ON position.
1. Remove the aft panel at the rear of the baggage
The ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) does not bay area.
provide the ability to disarm or disable (when
automatically activated via G-switch) the ELT 2. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
(2560TR1) from the cockpit. from the helicopter.

97-361. ELT BATTERY REPLACEMENT

3. Loosen the thumbscrews (6, Figure 97-81) on the
end cap (5).
In accordance with FAA/TCCA regulations, batteries
must be replaced after 2 years of shelf or service life
or for any of the following reasons: 4. Pull the end cap (5) away from the ELT
(2560TR1) (2).
• After the transmitter is used in an emergency
situation including an inadvertent activation of 5. Push the protective cover (1) away from the
unknown duration connector end to remove it from the mounting tray (9).

• After the transmitter is operated for more than

1 cumulative hour 6. Pull the ELT (2560TR1) (2) towards the connector
end to remove it.
Refer to the ARTEX C406-N HM Description,
Operation, Installation, and Maintenance Manual 7. Disconnect the electrical connector
(570-5060) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 97) for (2560TR1P1) (11).
information on how to replace the battery pack.
8. Disconnect the antenna connector
97-362. ELT SYSTEM — COMPONENT
(2560TR1P2) (4).
REPLACEMENT

To replace an electrical component, refer to the 9. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on all
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Maintenance the electrical connectors.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 277
BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

9 10
5

8
(4 PLACES)
7
6
3 1. Protective cover
11 2. ELT (2560TR1)
3. Programming adapter
4. Antenna connector (2560TR1P2)
5. End cap
2 6. Thumbscrew
ELT SWITCH
7. Screw
8. Washer
9. Mounting tray
10. Bracket
11. Electrical connector (2560TR1P1)
1

DETAIL A
NO OBJECT BEYOND THIS POINT 407gc_MM_97_0003_c01

Figure 97-81. ELT (C406-N HM) — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
Page 278 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

10. If the mounting tray (9) needs to be removed, 1. Examine electrical and antenna connectors for
remove the screws (7) and washers (8). corrosion damage or faulty contacts.

97-364. ELT (C406-N HM) — CLEANING 2. Examine the case for dents.

3. Make sure the hardware is free of cracks or other

MATERIALS REQUIRED obvious damage.

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. 4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for
cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE damage. Replace when necessary.
C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol
97-366. ELT (C406-N HM) — INSTALLATION
C-516 Clean Cloth

WARNING
NOTE
For additional information, refer to the
ARTEX C406-N HM Description, OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Operation, Installation, and Maintenance WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
Manual (570-5060) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
Chapter 97). EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).

1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean NOTE

cloth (C-516).
The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
optional ELT kit (BHT-407-II-38). If the
clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
optional ELT (C406-N HM) (2560TR1) is
(C-385).
being installed for the fist time, this must be
accomplished in accordance with the
3. Remove dirt from the electrical connectors with a instructions provided in the BHT-407-II-38.
soft bristle brush. Any subsequent installation may use the
following procedure.
97-365. ELT (C406-N HM) — INSPECTION
NOTE
NOTE The ELT kit is configured ON in the basic
The following inspection criteria are system software and configuration load.
primarily intended when the part or Based on this, a separate software and
component has been removed from the configuration installation procedure is not
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection required during the following procedure.
requirements, applicable criteria may also
be used when the part or component is 1. If the programming adapter is not installed, make
installed on the helicopter. sure the ELT has been programmed with the aircraft
information. Refer to the ARTEX C406-N HM
Description, Operation, Installation, and Maintenance
NOTE Manual (570-5060) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 97)
For additional information, refer to the for information on how to program the ELT with the
ARTEX C406-N HM Description, aircraft information.
Operation, Installation, and Maintenance
Manual (570-5060) (BHT-407-CR&O-V, 2. If the ELT has been replaced, make sure the ELT
Chapter 97). is registered with the proper authority. Refer to the

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 279
BHT-407-MM-11

ARTEX C406-N HM Description, Operation,

Installation, and Maintenance Manual (570-5060) WARNING
(BHT-407-CR&O-V, Chapter 97) for information on
how to register the ELT.
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
3. If the mounting tray (9, Figure 97-81) was
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
removed, install the mounting tray to the brackets (10) EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
with the screws (7) and washers (8). Tighten the
screws. 1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power
from the helicopter.

4. Insert the ELT (2560TR1) (2) into the mounting 2. Remove the aft fuselage panel at the rear of the
tray (9) at an angle so that the locking ears at the baggage bay area.
opposite end of the flight-to-arrow fit into the mounting
tray slots. 3. Use a plastic scraper to remove any trace of
sealant around the rod of the antenna (2560E1) (1,
Figure 97-82), the grommet (4), and at the antenna
5. Fit the protective cover (1) onto the ELT
base.
(2560TR1) (2).
4. Disconnect the antenna connector
6. Remove all protective caps and/or plugs from the (2560E1P1) (5).
electrical connectors.
5. Install protective caps and/or plugs (C-156) on all
the electrical connectors.
7. Feed the electrical connector (2560TR1P1) (11)
and antenna connector (2560TR1P2) (4) through the 6. Remove the screws (2).
holes in the end cap and connect them to their
respective connectors on the ELT (2560TR1) (2). 7. Remove the antenna (2560E1) (1).

8. Position the end cap (5) onto the ELT (2560TR1) 97-368. ELT ANTENNA — CLEANING
(2) and tighten the thumbscrews (6) securely.

MATERIALS REQUIRED
9. Install the aft panel at the rear of the baggage bay
area. Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
10. Do an operational check of the ELT system
(paragraph 97-375). C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol

C-516 Clean Cloth

97-367. ELT ANTENNA — REMOVAL
1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
cloth (C-516).
MATERIALS REQUIRED
2. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt with a
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. clean cloth (C-516) dampened with isopropyl alcohol
(C-385).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
3. Remove dirt from antenna connector(s) with a
C-156 Caps and/or Plugs
soft bristle brush.

97-00-00
Page 280 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL A

2 4 3
1

3 2 4
6

2 4 PLACES

1 1 2

DETAIL A

407gc_MM_97_0002a

Figure 97-82. ELT Antenna — Removal and Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 281
BHT-407-MM-11

1. Antenna (2560E1)
2. Screw
3. Antenna support
4. Grommet
5. Electrical connector (2560E1P1)
6. Fairing

SEALANT (C-251)
1

SEALANT (C-308)
2

NOTES
1 Do not paint the antenna (2560E1) (1).

2 Prepare the mating surfaces of the antenna support (3) and antenna (2560E1) (1) for Class A-II electrical
bonding requirements (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).

3 Fillet seal the edges of the grommet (4) and fill the gap (internally and externally) between the grommet
and antenna (2560E1) (1) using sealant (C-308).

4 After installation, seal the mating edges of the antenna (2560E1) (1) and the antenna support (3) with
sealant (C-251).

407gc_MM_97_0002b

Figure 97-82. ELT Antenna — Removal and Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)

97-00-00
Page 282 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

97-369. ELT ANTENNA — INSPECTION

WARNING
MATERIALS REQUIRED

Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96).
C-308 Sealant
NOTE
NOTE The following installation procedure applies
only to helicopters equipped with the
The following inspection criteria are
optional ELT kit (BHT-407-II-38). If the
primarily intended when the part or
optional ELT antenna (2560E1) is being
component has been removed from the
installed for the fist time, this must be
helicopter. To accommodate all inspection
accomplished in accordance with the
requirements, applicable criteria may also
instructions provided in the BHT-407-II-38.
be used when the part or component is
Any subsequent installation may use the
installed on the helicopter.
following procedure.
1. Examine the component for damage.
1. Remove all protective caps and/or plugs from all
the electrical connectors.
2. Examine the condition of the antenna
connector(s) for damage, cleanliness, and corrosion.
2. Make sure the ELT switch located on the ELT
(2560TR1) (2, Figure 97-81) is set to OFF, and the
3. Examine the condition of the mounting surface for
remote switch (2560S1) located on the instrument
cleanliness and corrosion damage.
panel is set to ARM.

4. Visually examine the attaching hardware for

cracks, wear, mechanical damage, and corrosion 3. If the grommet (4, Figure 97-82) was removed or
damage. Replace when necessary. loosened during the removal, remove the old sealant
and reinstall the grommet with sealant (C-308).

5. Visually examine the grommet (4) for condition

and debonding. Replace as required with sealant 4. Make sure the mating surfaces of the antenna
(C-308) (BHT-ALL-SRM, Chapter 3). (2560E1) (1) and the antenna support (3) are clean
and show no signs of corrosion. Otherwise, refer to the
BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8 for surface preparation.
6. Make sure the mounting surface is clean and
acceptable for electrical bonding (BHT-ELEC-SPM,
Chapter 8). 5. Install the antenna connector (2560E1P1) (5) and
position the antenna (2560E1) (1) on the antenna
support (3).
97-370. ELT ANTENNA — INSTALLATION

MATERIALS REQUIRED 6. Secure the antenna (2560E1) (1) with the screws
(2). Tighten the screws.
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE NOTE

If the mating surfaces of the components
C-251 Sealant were clean and showed no signs of
corrosion at the time of installation, the
C-308 Sealant
following step is not required.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 283
BHT-407-MM-11

7. Make sure the bond resistance between the release (8) with the module extraction tool (M81714/
antenna (2560E1) (1) and the antenna support (3) 69-01).
meets Class A-II electrical bonding requirements
(BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 8).
NOTE
8. Apply sealant (C-308) around the rod of the To assist with the re-installation, it is
antenna (2560E1) (1) and the grommet (4). recommended that the wires be identified
to which connector position they were
removed from before the connector is
9. Apply sealant (C-251) to cover the mating edges disassembled.
of the electrically bonded area of the antenna support
(3) and the antenna (2360E1) (1). 3. If applicable, remove the wires with the extraction
tool (M81969/14-10) (BHT-ELEC-SPM, Chapter 4).
10. Install the aft fuselage panel at the rear of the
baggage bay area. 4. Grasp the cap (1) with the thumb and forefinger
and pull it straight out from the base (5).
Approximately 2 to 5 pounds (8.9 to 22.2 N) of force is
11. Connect the battery or external DC power to the
required to remove the cap from the base. The cap is
helicopter.
permanently attached to the base with a flex circuit (2).

12. Do an operational check of the ELT (paragraph 5. Rotate the cap (1) to the left side of the base
97-375). opening. Two mounting screws (3) will now be visible.

97-371. ELT ARM/XMIT SWITCH/LIGHT — 6. Rotate both mounting screws (3)

REMOVAL counterclockwise to move the mounting cams (4) into
the recessed area.

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 7. Remove the base (5) from the sleeve (7).

8. Remove the sleeve (7) from the instrument

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
panel (6).
M81714/69-01 Module Extraction Tool
97-372. ELT ARM/XMIT SWITCH/LIGHT —
M81969/14-10 Insertion/Extraction CLEANING
Tool

MATERIALS REQUIRED
WARNING
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR C-385 Isopropyl Alcohol
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). C-516 Clean Cloth

1. Disconnect the battery and external DC power 1. Remove all moisture and loose dirt with a clean
from the helicopter. cloth (C-516).

2. Remove the electrical connector (9, 2. Remove dirt from electrical connector with a soft
Figure 97-83) from the base (5) by depressing the bristle brush and isopropyl alcohol (C-385).

97-00-00
Page 284 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

SEE DETAIL B
A

VIEW A

1. Cap
6 2. Flex circuit
3. Mounting screw
4. Mounting cam
5 5. Base
D 6. Instrument panel
4 FW 7. Sleeve
3 8. Release
1 DETAIL B 9. Connector
2

407GC_MM_97_0017

Figure 97-83. ELT ARM/XMIT Switch/Light — Removal and Installation

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 285
BHT-407-MM-11

97-373. ELT ARM/XMIT SWITCH/LIGHT —

NOTE
INSPECTION
Refer to the Emergency Locator
To inspect the ELT arm/xmit switch/light, refer to Transmitter (ELT) kit (S/N 54300 and
Miscellaneous Electrical Components — Inspection subsequent) wiring diagram (Chapter 98)
Practices (Chapter 96). for the installed location of the electrical
wires.
97-374. ELT ARM/XMIT SWITCH/LIGHT —
INSTALLATION 6. If applicable, connect the wire with the insertion
tool (M81696/14-10) (BHT-ELEC-SPM).

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 7. Snap the connector module into the rear of the
base (5).

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 8. Rotate the cap (1) back into position and insert it
into the base, pressing firmly until it seats with a snap.
M81969/14-10 Insertion/Extraction
Cycle the pushbutton a few times to ensure smooth
Tool
application.

9. Connect the battery or external DC power to the

WARNING helicopter.

10. Do an operational check of the ELT system

OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (paragraph 97-375).
WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ON OR
NEAR ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT (CHAPTER 96). 97-375. ELT SYSTEM — OPERATIONAL CHECK

1. Grasp the cap (1, Figure 97-83) with the thumb

and forefinger and pull it straight out from the base (5). WARNING
Approximately 2 to 5 pounds of (8.9 to 22.2 N) of force
is required to remove the cap from the base. The cap
is permanently attached to the base with a flex
ALWAYS PERFORM THE TEST WITHIN
circuit (2).
THE FIRST 5 MINUTES OF THE HOUR
(UTC). BE SURE TO NOTIFY ANY
2. Rotate the cap (1) to the left side of the base NEARBY CONTROL TOWER (ATC) OF
opening. Two mounting screws (3) will now be visible. YOUR INTENTIONS. DO NOT ALLOW
TEST DURATION TO EXCEED 5
3. Rotate both mounting screws (3) SECONDS. THE ELT WILL TRANSMIT A
counterclockwise to move the mounting cams (4) into 406.028 MHZ SIGNAL APPROXIMATELY
the recessed area. 47 SECONDS AFTER THE ELT IS
ACTIVE AND THE SATELLITE SYSTEM
CONSIDERS THE TRANSMISSION TO
4. Orient the base (5) so that the word TOP is in the BE A VALID DISTRESS SIGNAL.
correct position and slide it over the base from the
back of the instrument panel (6).
NOTE
5. Rotate both mounting screws (3) clockwise to Refer to the Emergency Locator
draw up the mounting cams (4) and capture the Transmitter (ELT) kit (S/N 54300 and
mounting sleeve (7). Torque each mounting screw 16 subsequent) wiring diagram (Chapter 98),
to 20 inch-ounces (0.11 to 0.14 Nm). Do not as applicable, for additional information on
overtighten. troubleshooting the system.

97-00-00
Page 286 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

• If the buzzer does not sound, check for

NOTE
continuity between contact 14 of connector
Use an external power unit if available to (2560TR1P1) and connector (2560A1)
prevent the battery from being drained of its positive terminal (+), and between contact 21
stored electrical power. of connector (2560TR1P1) and connector
(2560A1) negative terminal (-). If there is no
1. Set the BATT switch to the ON position, or set the continuity, repair/replace wiring or
external DC power unit to ON. components between contact 14 of connector
(2560TR1P1) and connector (2560A1)
2. On the audio panel, press the MIC1 pushbutton positive terminal (+), or between contact 21 of
to select COM1 as the active radio. connector (2560TR1P1) and connector
(2560A1) negative terminal (-). If there is
3. On the Primary Flight Display (PFD), press and continuity, replace buzzer (2560A1) or ELT
hold the COM flip-flop button on the right of the screen (2560TR1).
for 2 seconds to tune the receiver to 121.5 MHz.
• If the upper segment ELT ARM does not
4. On the audio panel, make sure the manual extinguish, replace the ELT remote switch
squelch annunciator (above the MAN SQ selector) is (2560S1).
not illuminated. If it is, press the MAN SQ selector to
extinguish it. • If the ELT XMIT light does not flash, check for
continuity between contact 6 of connector
5. Adjust the volume by turning the small right knob (2560TR1P1) and 2560S1-3. If there is
clockwise until a slight background noise is heard. continuity, replace ELT (2560TR1) or ELT
remote switch (2560S1). If there is no
continuity, repair/replace wiring or
6. Press the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) components between contact 6 of connector
and wait for 3 sweeps (maximum), which takes about (2560TR1P1) and contact 3 of connector
1 second. (2650S1).

RESULT: 7. Press the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1).

• The ELT signal is heard on the VHF receiver.

NOTE
• The buzzer is heard in the cockpit.
After the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light
(2560S1) is set to the ARM position, if the
• On the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1),
ELT senses a failure, the ELT mounted
the upper segment ELT ARM extinguishes.
LED will flash according to the following
code:
• On the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1),
the lower segment ELT XMIT flashes
• 1 flash – G loop fault
continuously.
• 3 flashes – Transmitter fault
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• 5 flashes – No GPD data
• If there is no audio from the VHF receiver,
check for continuity between antenna
connector (2560TR1P2) and electrical • 7 flashes – Battery fault
connector (2560E1P1). If there is no
continuity, repair/replace wiring between RESULT:
electrical connector (2560E1P1) and antenna
connector (2560TR1P2). If there is continuity, • The lower segment ELT XMIT illuminates for
replace the antenna (2560E1) or the ELT approximately 1 second then extinguishes.
(2560TR1), or consider replacement of the
integrated avionics unit No. 1. • No ELT signal is heard on the VHF receiver.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 16 FEB 2012 Rev. 34 Page 287
BHT-407-MM-11

CORRECTIVE ACTION: contact 17 of electrical connector

(2560TR1P1). If there is no continuity, repair/
• If the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) replace wiring or components between
flashes one time, repair/replace ground loop connectors (3450TR1P1 and 2560TR1P1). If
wiring between contact 12 of connector there is continuity, consider replacement of
(2560TR1P1) and contact 13 of connector the integrated avionics unit No. 2.
(2560TR1P1).
• If the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1)
• If the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) flashes seven times, the battery usage may
flashes three times, check for continuity have exceeded 1 hour; replace the battery
between connectors (2560E1P1 and pack (paragraph 97-361).
2560TR1P2). If there is no continuity, repair/
replace wiring between connectors
• If audio is heard, replace the ELT (2560TR1)
(2560E1P1 and 2560TR1P2). If there is
or consider replacement of the integrated
continuity, replace antenna (2560E1) or ELT avionics unit No. 2.
(2560TR1).

• If the ELT ARM/XMIT switch/light (2560S1) 8. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position, or set
flashes five times, check for continuity the external DC power unit to OFF.
between contact 71 of electrical connector
(3140A2P3) and contact 5 of electrical 9. Return the helicopter to the standard
connector (2560TR1P1) or between contact configuration. Refer to Standard Practices — After
70 of electrical connector (3140A2P3) and Electrical Maintenance or Repairs (Chapter 96).

97-00-00
Page 288 Rev. 34 16 FEB 2012 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

AVIONICS SYSTEMS WIRING DIAGRAMS

(407 HELICOPTERS S/N 53000 THROUGH 54299)

97-376. AVIONICS SYSTEMS WIRING

DIAGRAMS

NOTE
The avionics systems wiring diagrams
contained in this chapter are only applicable
to 407 helicopters S/N 53000 through
54299.

Refer to Chapter 98 for all wiring diagrams

applicable to 407GX helicopters S/N 54300
and subsequent.

This section contains the wiring diagrams

(Figure 97-84 through Figure 97-98) for the avionics
systems in the configurations covered in this chapter
for 407 helicopters S/N 53000 through 54299.

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 289
BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-84. VHF No. 1 and Audio Panel (No Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
Page 290 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-85. VHF No. 1 and Audio Panel (Three Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 291
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-86. VHF No. 1 and Audio Panel (Five Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2)

97-00-00
Page 292 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-86. VHF No. 1 and Audio Panel (Five Aft ICS Stations) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2)

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 293
BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-87. Headset (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
Page 294 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-88. Omni with CDI (KI-208) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 295
BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-89. VHF COMM No. 2 (KY-196A) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
Page 296 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-90. ADF System (KR-87) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 297
BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-91. GPS System (KLN-89B) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
Page 298 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-92. GPS/NAV Switching System (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 299
BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-93. GPS (KLN-89B) Dataloader/PC Interface (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
Page 300 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-94. Encoding Altimeter (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 301
BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-95. Transponder System (KT-70) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
Page 302 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

g p

Figure 97-96. Transponder System (KT-76A) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 303
BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-97. Compass System (KCS-55A) with Navigation System (HSI) (KI-525A) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
Page 304 Rev. 33 23 SEP 2011 ECCN EAR99
 BHT-407-MM-11

Figure 97-98. ELT System (Pointer 4000-10) (S/N 53000 Through 54299) — Wiring Diagram

97-00-00
ECCN EAR99 23 SEP 2011 Rev. 33 Page 305/306